Solution Manual For Construction Materials, Methods and Techniques Building for a Sustainable Future

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 8

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 1-2 and 1-3

      

Gain an understanding of the scope of the construction industry Identify the different phases and activities that make up the building design and construction planning process Define the types of drawings and specifications that make up a set of construction documents Be familiar with the roles and responsibilities of owners, architects and contractors Recognize the structure and organization of construction documents Categorize the types of project delivery methods used in commercial construction and how they are administered Describe the phases and administrative procedures that serve to organize the on-site construction phase

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction and overview of the basics of the construction process. The construction industry is one of the largest business sectors in the United States, encompassing establishments engaged in the construction of buildings and other engineering projects, such as roadways and utility infrastructure. Construction with all of its related and supporting industries is vital to the economic health of the country, accounting for an annual average of 5 to 10 percent of our gross domestic product.

Slides 1-4

Lesson Plan I.

Construction: A Dynamic Industry A. Three major areas: 1. Building construction 2. Heavy or infrastructure construction 3. Industrial construction

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

Slides 1-5

B. Materials and methods constantly changing fields 1. New products and equipment developed continuously C. Automation of construction sites through robotics, drones, and state-of-the-art budgeting and scheduling tools and technologies all promise to be productivityenhancing changes.

Slides 1-6

II.

Pre-Construction Activities A. Pre-Construction Activities 1. A building project is the result of collective ideas, talents, and services of a large, diverse group of professionals 2. The three main players in any construction team are the: a. Owner b. Architect and engineers c. General contractor

Slides 1-7

B. A vast array of planning decisions are made at the onset of a construction project: 1. an evaluation of the vision for a project 2. project scope 3. functional requirements 4. the determination of a site 5. budgets and financing 6. project scheduling 7. assurance that regulatory constraints such a zoning and code regulations will be satisfied

Slides 1-8

C. Pre-Design and Design Development 1. Pre-design a. Determine project goals and objectives b. Design sketches and feasibility studies

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

c. Research and decision making process to determine specific needs building will fulfill and identify scope of work d. Establish design intent e. Result: written program

Slides 1-9

2. Design development a. Detailed drawings of building with exact sizes/relationships of building elements i. Floor plan ii. Building sections iii. Elevation drawing iv. Computer aided drafting (CAD) b. Architect hires specialty consultants for specific systems c. Figure 1.9: An elevation drawing

Slides 1-10

Slides 1-11

3. Building Information Modeling (BIM) a. NIBS optimized a computer software system that standardizes design, construction, operation, and maintenance process for buildings i. Compiled in a single electronic format Building Information Modeling (BIM) ii. Enhances efficiencies during the construction process

Slides 1-12

4. Construction Documents (CD) a. Final phase of the design process i. Drawings (working papers) i. Show dimensional relationships between all aspects of the building ii. Specifications i. Describe in writing detailed information on exact types of materials to be used and ways construction processes are conducted

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

Slides 1-13

D. Specifications and the MasterFormat 1. MasterFormat: standard for writing specifications a. System of descriptive titles/numbers to organize construction activities, products, and requirements into a standard order b. Divided into 50 basic divisions i. Thirty-four active ii. Sixteen reserved for future expansion c. See Table 1.1

Slides 1-14

III.

The Project Delivery Process A. Construction contractors 1. General contractors a. Responsible for construction of entire project at specific cost by a specified date 2. Specialty contractors/subcontractors a. Employed by general contractor to perform specific work at specified cost 3. Superintendent a. GCs on site representative responsible for continuous field supervision 4. Selecting the contractor a. Competitive bidding b. Invitational bidding c. Negotiated contract d. Multiple prime contracts e. Fast tracking

Slides 1-15

IV.

Project Delivery Methods and Types of Construction Contracts

Slides 1-16

A. Design-Bid-Build 1. Traditional method moving sequentially from conception through construction

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

B. Design-Build 1. Single party from design to construction C. Construction Management (CM) 1. Design phase input and oversight and administration of bidding and construction 2. Contracted in one of two ways: a. Construction Management for Fee b. Construction Manager at Risk

Slides 1-17

V.

Integrated Design Process (IDP) A. Project team established at onset of building planning and design 1. Collaborates in establishing design intent and functional requirements throughout project 2. Coordination issues can be solved holistically throughout the design and construction sequence

Slides 1-18

VI.

The Construction Process A. Formal notice to proceed issued B. Construction scheduling C. Critical path method (CPM) D. Permitting 1. A building permit is a certificate issued by the local governing authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) authorizing the construction of a project required to establish a field office on site

Slides 1-19 and 1-20

E. Hold pre-construction conference F. Completed construction documents provide guidelines for project G. Shop drawing gives precise directives for the fabrication of certain components H. Architect verifies product by reviewing drawings, schedules, performance data, and brochures I. Construction mock-up may be required J. Inspections conducted by owner representatives to ensure compliance K. RFIs may be needed to obtain clarification L. CCDs will most likely be needed to change original contract documents

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

M. A change order (a written directive to the contractor issued after the execution of an agreement) authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision to the project, along with related adjustments in contract budget and time

Slides 1-21 and 1-22

N. Project Close Out 1. When nearing completion, architect or CM returns to site to conduct inspection of substantial completion 2. A list of remaining items to be installed or repaired (punch list) is created 3. All warranties provided to owner 4. Certificate of occupancy issued

Slides 1-23 and 1-24

VII.

Construction Safety A. Accident prevention/safety training must be implemented and maintained B. OSHA initiated regulation of safety standards for construction industry C. GC responsible for administering safety procedures on construction site D. Figure 1.21: Examples of common personal protective equipment used on the construction site

Chapter Hints 1. Have the students visit their local municipality to find out about local regulations and ordinances. Ask the students to locate a copy of the municipalities’ ordinances regarding construction projects, if possible.

2. Meet with a local contractor to discuss the business environment in the student’s locale and have students interview the contractor regarding his or her history in the business.

3. Locate a set of preliminary and final construction documents for a project and have the students observe the details and specifications of each.

4. Have the students visit the Web site for the Associated General Contractors of America: http://www.agc.org. Then ask the students to locate their specific state chapter of the association and review the latest news and events in their area.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the three major divisions of the construction industry? Building construction, heavy construction, electrical, mechanical, and special trades.

2.

What professionals are responsible for the preparation of construction documents?

Architects and all consultants (including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and civil engineers, fire protection consultants, interior and landscape designers, and cost estimating consultants).

3.

What is the difference between construction drawings and specifications?

Construction drawings show the dimensional relationship between all aspects of the building while specifications are written descriptions on the exact times of materials to be used and the ways in which the construction processes are conducted. In other words, the drawings graphically indicate the relationship between the elements, while the specifications spell out the specific types, qualities, and properties of those materials, and their installation.

4.

How does the MasterFormat help all participants in the industry to communicate?

MasterFormat provides a standard for writing specifications that facilitates the retrieval of information and serves as a means for all participants within the construction industry to communicate.

5.

What is the difference between a general contractor and a subcontractor? General contractors assume the responsibility for the entire project. Subcontractors perform the required work within their technical areas, such as all the electrical, plumbing, roofing, etc.

6.

What are the three most commonly used types of project delivery methods? DesignBid-Build, Design-Build, and Construction Management (CM).

7.

How are contractors selected to work on a construction project? There are a number of ways contractors are selected to work on a construction which include:

  8.

Competitive bidding: publicly financed projects Invitational bidding: privately funded projects

What is the purpose of a shop drawing? A shop drawing gives precise directives for the fabrication of certain components and they are substantially different from architectural drawings in both style and content. They include manufacturing conventions and special fabrication instructions.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 01: The Construction Industry: An Overview

9.

When is a punch list generated and what does it contain? The punch list is initially prepared by the contractor and then added to by the architect and engineering consultants during their inspections. It contains a listing of the remaining items to be installed or repaired.

10. What purposes are served by OSHA? OSHA develops safety guidelines and administers their enforcement through a system of recurring site inspections. OSHA Standards-29 CFR–1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction give extensive guidelines for construction means, methods, and materials handling.

11. What are material data sheets? Material data sheets outline the hazards associated with certain construction materials. All safety equipment and barriers must undergo regular inspections that are documented on a written log.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 10 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 10

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 2-2 and 2-3

      

Discuss the regulations specified by zoning ordinances Explain the content and application of the International Building Code Understand the function of the Americans with Disabilities Act Become familiar with professional and trade organizations and their impact on the construction industry List the impacts of the construction industry on global warming and resource depletion Value the concept of sustainable development and construction Discuss the purposes served by green building rating and certification systems

Introduction This chapter studies the materials used in construction and their technical aspects. It also discusses the influences that zoning ordinances, building codes, and various other standards established by trade and professional organizations have on the use of materials. The chapter examines the variety of regulatory and additional supporting information in the construction industry.

Slides 2-4

Lesson Plan I.

Zoning Ordinances A. Local land-use regulations B. Regulate degree of building development according to land use C. Zoned in districts of similar activities 1. Single and multi-family, residential, business, park land, industrial zones D. Usually based on a comprehensive master plan

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

Slides 2-5

II.

Building Codes A. Regulate building design & construction B. Provide standards to safeguard public life, health, property, general welfare C. Provide architect/engineer design basis D. Voted upon/approved by governing body of municipality

Slides 2-6 and 2-7

III.

The Development of Building Codes A. Written, maintained, revised by four model code organizations until 1995 B. Now, one comprehensive model code: International Building Code 1. Model code by all government agencies 2. Grouping of 13 codes (I-codes) a. Govern materials and construction of buildings, mechanical and environmental systems C. Table 2.1: International Code Council Suite of Codes

Slides 2-8

IV.

The International Residential Code (IRC) A. The IBC regulates structures in a jurisdiction except one- and two-family dwellings B. ICC then developed a residential code 1. International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings, first published in 2000

Slides 9-4 and 2-10

V.

The International Building Code (IBC) A. Minimum regulations for commercial building systems 1. Prescriptive code a. Specifies type of design or material to be used b. Gives explicit guidelines for implementation

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

B. Performance code 1. Lists operating characteristics of component 2. References industry standards C. Organization and content of IBC 1. Use and occupancy classification 2. Types of construction 3. Building area and height 4. Means of egress 5. Engineering requirements

Slides 2-11 and 2-12

VI.

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) / Universal Design A. Federal legislation mandating building accessibility to persons with physical and cognitive disabilities B. ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) 1. Written, graphic set of compliance regulations outlining specific requirements for accessible parking, travel paths, doors, and fixtures C. Figure 2.6: A graphic from the ADA Accessibility Guidelines illustrating the minimum clear width passage for a wheelchair

Slides 2-13

VII.

Standard Development Organizations A. Many professional, private, and governmental organizations make major contributions to the safe and efficient use of construction materials 1. Conduct research and testing 2. Disseminate resulting information

Slides 2-14

B. National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS) 1. Chartered by U.S. Congress 2. Authoritative national source of knowledge and advice on matters of building science and technology 3. Leadership forum to bring building community together to serve public interest

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

Slides 2-15

C. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 1. Coordinates production of engineering and product standards worldwide 2. Nongovernmental organization 3. Each industrial nation has national standards organizations 4. Publishes standards addressing a wide range of issues of interest to the construction industry

Slides 2-16

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. Coordinating organization for the national standards system in the United States 2. Coordinates the efforts of the hundreds of organizations in the United States that develop standards 3. Helps identify what standards are needed and timetables for completion 4. More than 10,000 American National Standards in virtually every field and discipline

Slides 2-17

E. ASTM International 1. Previously known as American Society of Testing and Materials 2. Development of standards on characteristics and performance of materials, products, systems, and services 3. Publishes the Book of ASTM Standards and Standards annually a. Also publishes Standards Adjuncts

Slides 2-18

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. Establishes, maintains, and operates laboratories for examination and testing of devices and materials a. To determine potential hazards to life and property 2. Researches material, device, product, equipment, assembly, and system use 3. Publishes UL Standards for Safety

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

Slides 2-19

G. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHREA) 1. Establishes standards a. For uniform testing, rating of heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and refrigeration equipment 2. Conducts research, disseminates publications, and provides continuing education 3. Publishes ASHRAE Handbook

Slides 2-20

H. National Association of Home Builders of the United States (NAHB) 1. Established and maintains the National Housing Center in D.C. and a National Housing Center Library 2. Publishes a number of newsletters and magazines 3. Offers nationwide seminars, workshops and conferences 4. NAHB Research Foundation a. Technical research center of technical research for residential and lightframe construction industries

Slides 2-21

I.

Trade Associations 1. Devoted to advancement of knowledge of construction materials and methods 2. Some examples: a. American Concrete Institute b. Portland Cement Association c. The American Masonry Association d. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) e. American Wood Council (AWC)

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

Slides 2-22 through 2-24

VIII. Sustainable Design and Green Building Rating Systems 1. Challenge is to support a continued growth in living standards worldwide within limits of diminishing natural resources and escalating pollution 2. Primary goal of sustainable construction is to reduce the damage caused by inefficiently designed structures a. Through the application of traditional building design strategies used in clever combination with new technologies B. The Environmental Impact of the Construction Industry 1. Natural resources are being depleted at unprecedented rates 2. In past half-century, energy consumption has doubled to keep up with demands of growing population 3. Fossil fuels are a nonrenewable resource 4. The larger problem of the increased use of fossil fuels is the resulting impact on the environment i. Climate change ii. Greenhouse effect 5. Figure 2.10 According to the U.S. Energy Information Administration, buildings, both commercial and residential account for more than a quarter of the nation’s energy consumption.

6. The Environmental Impact of the Construction Industry

Slides 2-25

7. Commercial and residential buildings are major contributors to energy and resource depletion a. 25 percent of raw materials and energy produced are used in the building sector 8. Construction and demolition debris (C&D) accounts for over 100 million tons disposed in U.S. landfills annually 9. Necessary to understanding how to design and construct within environmental limits 10. Modern advances in component technologies have led to additional buildingrelated environmental problems

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

Slides 2-26

11. Factors contributing to Sick Building Syndrome (SBS) a. Compromised indoor air quality b. Improper maintenance of mechanical systems c. Vast number of new synthetic products d. Pressed wood and fiber panels utilizing formaldehyde e. Additional chemical concentrations in i. Paint ii. Carpeting iii. Office equipment iv. Cleaning agents v. Pesticides

Slides 2-27

12. Potential to mitigate climate change, improve quality of life, increase productivity and reduce operating costs by: a. Energy efficiency b. Renewable energy technologies c. Use of healthy, renewable materials

Slides 2-28

IX.

Sustainable Construction A. Primary goal is to lessen negative impact by combining best traditional building design strategies in combination with new technological advances B. Ultimate purpose is to create buildings, communities and urban areas that support healthy living through clean water and air, while protecting natural resources and habitats

Slides 2-29

X.

Sustainable Design A. Green Building 1. Design and construction process that reduces use of materials, resources and energy.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

2. Seeks to a. Achieve resource and energy efficiency b. Integrate healthy materials c. Promote ecologically and socially sensitive land use

Slides 2-30

XI.

Sustainable Building Certification Systems A. A number of organizations provide a means to guide and quantify sustainable building through a recognized system of certification B. U.S. Green Building Council and LEED Rating System 1. USGBC identifies strategies in the design and construction industry to advance creation of energy- and resource-efficient buildings 2. LEED defines principles for sustainable building by providing a common standard of measurement 3. LEED NC Version 4 a. Tool that simultaneously guides and evaluates building over its life cycle b. Organized into five broad topics

Slides 2-31 and 2-32

4. Green Globes Rating System (GBI) a. Third-party green building verification administered entirely online 5. NAHB National Green Building Program™ a. Green certification program for single and multifamily homes, residential remodeling, and site development projects 6. ENERGY STAR a. United States Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program for products, buildings, and homes b. Unlike LEED and Green Globes rating systems, ENERGY STAR entails a series of site inspections during construction process

Slides 2-33

7. Other assessment and certification systems a. British Research Establishment’s Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) i. Similar to the LEED system b. Living Building Challenge (LBC) i. Most stringent certification of sustainability

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

ii. Requires all of a building’s energy needs be supplied by on-site renewable energy and all storm water/building water discharge must be managed on site and used to supply the building’s water needs iii. Strict approach to use of materials iv. “Red list” of materials and chemicals that cannot be used

Chapter Hints 1. Ask the students to find a local contractor who specializes in “green” construction and have them interview him or her regarding the business and his or her history in the business.

2. Have the students work on or visit (or contact if visiting is not an option in the student’s locale) the nearest branch of the Heifer International organization.

Have the students share their experience with the rest of the class.

3. Have the students look through their home to identify any Energy Star products they may have, and share what they find with the class.

4. Have the students contact their municipality for a copy of that municipality’s most recent building codes. Ask them to report anything interesting they find to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

Describe the purpose of local zoning ordinances? Zoning ordinances are local regulations that control the use and development of land. These ordinances group buildings together into zoning districts in order to separate incompatible uses and promote cohesive city planning.

2.

What is the main intent of a building code? Building codes are sets of legal regulations that ensure a minimum standard of health and safety in buildings.

Building codes regulate the design and construction of buildings to provide minimum standards in order to safeguard life or limb, health, property, and public welfare.

3.

What model building codes are currently available for adoption in the United States and Canada? The International Building Code and the International Residential Code.

4.

What is the purpose of the Americans with Disabilities Act? The ADA is a federal law that mandates buildings be made accessible to persons with both physical and cognitive abilities.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 02: Regulatory Constraints, Standards, and Green Building Rating Systems

5.

What is universal design? Universal design is a new design movement seeking to go beyond the barrier-free guidelines of the ADA. It advocates the design of products and environments that are usable by all people, without the need for adaptation or special design.

6.

What is the mission of the American Society of Testing and Materials? The mission of ASTM is for the development of standards on characteristics and performance of materials, products, systems, and services and for the promotion of related knowledge.

7.

What purposes are served by trade associations? Trade associations promote the interests of its membership, which includes dissemination of information on the proper use of materials, products, and services of the members. They also support research and develop specifications and performance procedures that often become accepted national standards.

8.

What are the environmental impacts of the construction industry? Global consumption patterns have followed hand in hand with economic development.

Land that previously supported natural systems and agricultural production is under increased development pressure. Buildings, both commercial and residential, are major contributors to energy and resource depletion. In addition to the energy required to construct and operate our built environment, buildings consume other vital resources, including potable water.

9.

What is urban sprawl? Urban sprawl is defined as unchecked land development that places tremendous burdens on natural systems.

10. What is meant by sustainable development? Sustainable development is defined as development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.

11. What is the purpose of the LEED rating system? The aim of the LEED rating system is to define principles for sustainable building by providing a common standard of measurement.

12. What are the five broad topics addressed by the LEED rating system? Sustainable Sites, Water Efficiency, Energy and Atmosphere, Materials and Resources, and Indoor Environmental Quality.

13. What are the purposes of the Energy Star program? Geared primarily toward the residential market, Energy Star is a program implemented to identify and promote environmentally friendly products through a system of labeling.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 9

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 1-2

    

Develop a basic understanding of key properties, requirements, and related behavior characteristics of typical construction materials.

Identify the properties of materials that must be considered when specifying construction products Discuss the technical aspects of mechanical, thermal, acoustical, and chemical properties List the criteria for the selection of environmentally preferable materials Explain the concepts of embodied energy and life cycle analysis

Slides 3-3

Introduction This chapter studies the development of materials as it relates to construction. It discusses process a design professional must go through to choose materials that adhere to certain requirements in a variety of considerations. Those requirements include availability, manufacturing and processing, strength, constructability, appearance, environmental factors, expense, and durability.

Slides 3-4

Lesson Plan I.

Material Groups A. Four broad categories: 1. Metals 2. Non-metallic inorganic materials 3. Polymers 4. Organic materials

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Slides 3-5

II.

Material Properties A. Materials chosen for construction applications must be able to perform under a variety of loadings, stresses, and environmental conditions B. Respond to changes in applied load, temperature, and moisture content

Slides 3-6 and 3-7

III.

Mechanical Properties A. Measure of material’s ability to resist mechanical forces B. Response to static (continuous) and dynamic (intermittent) loads C. Tensile strength, compressive strength, shear strength, elasticity, ductility, hardness, impact resistance, fatigue strength, and permeability D. Stresses-Tension, Compression, Shear 1. Tensile stresses: forces pull on a member and tend to increase its length 2. Compressive stresses: push on a member and tend to shorten it 3. Shear stresses: forces that work in opposite directions parallel with the plane of the force 4. Figure 3.6: Stresses are created by tension, compression, and shear forces

Slides 3-8

E. Stress and Strain 1. Stress: intensity of internally distributed forces that resist a change in body form 2. Strain: change per unit length in linear dimension of body that accompanies a change in stress

Slides 3-9

F. Stress-Strain Diagrams 1. Representation of behavior of material under load 2. Given for compression, tension, and shear 3. Diagram data obtained from testing standard material specimens in a universal testing machine

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Slides 3-10

G. Modulus of Elasticity 1. Proportional constant between stress and strain: called E or E-value a. For stresses within the elastic range, E equals stress divided by strain b. E is basically a measure of stiffness and rigidity

Slides 3-11

H. Ductility and Hardness 1. Ductility a. Ability of a material to be deformed plastically without actually breaking or fracturing 2. Hardness a. Measure of ability of material to resist indentation or surface scratching

Slides 3-12

I.

Impact Strength and Fatigue Strength 1. Impact strength a. Ability of material to resist a very rapidly applied load, such as the strike of a hammer 2. Fatigue strength a. Resistance of a material to a cyclic load, one that varies in direction and/or magnitude

Slides 3-13

J.

Permeability 1. Rate that water flows through a material is a function of the material’s permeability 2. Measured in units of permeance, called perms 3. Typically referred to as the perm rating

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Slides 3-14

IV.

Thermal Properties A. Related to material’s response to heat B. Material subjected to change in temperature may: 1. Expand, contract, conduct, or reflect heat C. Construction materials classified as: 1. Insulators, materials that resist transfer of heat, or conductors, or materials that encourage the transfer of heat

Slides 3-15

D. Thermal Conductivity and Thermal Conductance 1. Thermal conductivity: a. Ability to transfer heat from high temperature area to lower temperature area 2. Thermal conductance: a. BTUs passing through one square foot of material one inch thick when temperature difference between the two is 1 F

Slides 3-16

Slides 3-17

E. Composite Thermal Performance 1. R- and U-values a. Frequently used in building codes to specify minimum thermal criteria for an exterior building component b. Insulating potential of building materials such as insulation and windows is often identified by either a U- or R-value

Slides 3-18

F. Changes of State 1. Freezing and melting indicate temperature at which material is said to undergo a change of state 2. Material’s melting point is of greater importance in construction than freezing point

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Slides 3-19

G. Heat Capacity 1. Solid and liquid materials with high specific heat capacity can: a. Store heat from the sun during the day b. Discharge heat by natural heat transfer at night 2. Process sometimes referred to as thermal mass a. Excellent way to provide low-cost heating and energy management

Slides 3-20

V.

Acoustical Properties A. Branch of physics that deals with generation, transmission, and control of sound waves B. Considers ability of a material to either absorb or reflect sound waves within a room

Slides 3-21 and 3-22

VI.

Chemical Properties A. Material’s tendency to undergo chemical change or reaction due to its composition and interaction with environment 1. Change can alter original composition of material and affect its properties B. Construction materials are chemically degraded by their environment C. Table 3.3: Galvanic Series of Selected Metals and Alloys

Slides 3-23

VII.

Ultraviolet Degradation A. Reduction in performance of some building materials is related to exposure to ultraviolet light 1. Or that portion of sunlight in the ultraviolet spectrum B. UV radiation tends to break down solvents

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Slides 3-24

VIII. Fire Resistance A. Combustibility is of prime importance in the selection of building materials B. Material of low combustibility is said to be fire resistant C. Emphasis on resistance to fire is a large component of building code constraints

Slides 3-25

IX.

Environmentally Preferable Products (EEPS) A. Materials that have a lesser or reduced effect on human health and the environment when compared to competing products that serve the same purpose B. Variety of factors are considered in determining environmental impact C. Life Cycle Analysis (LCA) 1. Takes into account all of the resource and energy inputs 2. Takes into account wastes and by-products (emissions, solid, water, etc.)

3. Data compiled for every phase of a product's life is evaluated to determine the environmental impact

Slides 3-26

X.

Embodied Energy A. Energy consumed by all processes associated with the production and use of a material or assembly 1. From the acquisition of natural resources to its final reuse or demolition

Slides 3-27

B. Life cycle energy cost of most building products starts with the extraction of raw materials C. Figure 3.10: The stages considered when determining the embodied energy content of a building material or component

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Slides 3-28 and 3-29

XI.

Natural Resources/Habitat Degradation A. Extraction, manufacture, and use of a construction material has profound effects on ecological systems and the supply of natural resources 1. Consider materials and impact of water systems

XII.

Renewable Materials A. Derived from living plant, animal, ecosystem that has the ability to regenerate itself B. Renewable materials preferred because their supply will not be depleted C. Include harvested wood, bamboo, cork, various composite materials derived from agricultural product

Slides 3-30

XIII. Recycled and Post Consumer/ Industrial/Agricultural Materials A. Post Industrial Recycled Content materials are created using industrial waste or by-product 1. Diverted from landfills 2. Integrated into new products a. Example: fly ash, a glass like powder recovered from the gases of coal fired electricity production

Slides 3-31

B. U.S. EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guideline program is a resource for recycled content materials recovered from solid waste 1. More products becoming available 2. Most are competitive with non-recycled products in both cost and performance

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

Slides 3-32

XIV. Toxicity to the Environment A. Indoor air quality is a prominent environmental problem 1. Results from inadequately maintained HVAC systems and material makeup of interior finish materials B. Organizations provide official recognition and labeling that certifies non-toxicity of building materials

Slides 3-33

XV.

Sustainable Construction Materials Assessment Criteria A. Specify materials that: 1. Protect natural environment 2. Are renewable and recyclable 3. Minimize resource and energy consumption 4. Are healthy and non-toxic

Chapter Hints 1. Have the students visit the Web site of the American Society for Testing and Materials at www.astm.org and find out what it takes to become a member of the organization. In addition, ask the students to request a free catalog.

2. Have the students try to find a local school or research laboratory with access to testing equipment or an equipment laboratory and observe some of the testing taking place. Have them report their findings to the class.

3. Have the student design an information project that shows the stress and strain limits of products used in their home and compare them to those used on the construction site.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the major material groups? Metal, non-metallic inorganics, polymers, and organics.

2.

List the parameters to be considered when selecting a construction material? When considering construction materials the following are important: integrity of shape, strength, deflection, deformation, structural integrity, useful life, specified functions, cost, appearance, availability, maintenance, and ease of installation.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 03: Properties of Materials

3.

What are the mechanical properties that define a material? Mechanical properties include tensile strength, compressive strength, shear strength, elasticity, ductility, hardness, impact resistance, fatigue strength, and permeability.

4.

How does a tensile stress differ from a compressive stress? Tensile stress occurs when a material is pulled, tending to increase its length. Compressive stress occurs when forces push on a member, tending to shorten it.

5.

What are the major thermal factors to consider when selecting a material? Melting temperature, thermal conductivity, and thermal expansion.

6.

Which of the four major material groups has the lowest thermal conductivity? Organic materials.

7.

What factor describes the overall thermal performance of a building assembly? Uvalue.

8.

What is the most common form of chemical degradation? Corrosion.

9.

What stages in a material’s life cycle are considered when calculating embodied energy? Resource Extraction: Mining, Logging, Quarrying; Manufacturing; On Site Construction; Occupancy Use and Maintenance; Demolition; Recycling, Reuse, Disposal.

10. What inputs and outputs does a Life Cycle Analysis (LCA) of a material consider? Life cycle assessment takes into account all of the resource and energy inputs that go into a material (e.g., construction, maintenance, demolition), while simultaneously calculating the resulting airborne emissions, solid and water borne wastes, and any other co-products and releases to arrive at a quantitative measure of embodied energy.

11. Give examples of renewable building materials. Wood harvested from sustainably managed forests, bamboo, cork, and various composite materials derived from agricultural products.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 9

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 4-2

    

Define the types of site surveys that are required to document site conditions Be aware of the problems that may occur during excavation and techniques to control them Discuss the types of structures used to control of surface and subsurface storm run-off Be familiar with paving materials and applications Understand the planning and construction of different earthwork components and techniques

Introduction This chapter discusses the application of ecologically based strategies to create projects that not only develop a site but also help repair and restore existing site systems and the importance of the coordinated efforts of architects, landscape architects, civil engineers, and construction managers. The chapter also covers site work, which includes a wide range of preconstruction activities encompassing subsurface investigation, preparing the site for construction, dewatering excavations, shoring and underpinning, earthwork, installing various types of piping, water distribution, sewage, and drainage systems, and constructing site improvements, such as fences, walks, and landscaping.

Slides 4-3

Lesson Plan I.

Site Assessment A. Before any project begins: 1. The building site must be thoroughly analyzed and understood to ensure efficient design and construction 2. Series of preconstruction investigations must be conducted a. Land and topographical surveys, subsurface soil testing, and environmental studies

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Slides 4-4 and 4-5

B. Land Surveying 1. Start from a position with known location and elevation 2. The basic tools: a. Measuring devices for determining horizontal distances, b. Level to determine height or elevation differences c. Theodolite (transit) to measure angles 3. Modern surveying equipment called total stations are a. Fully robotic b. Able to electronically send data to office computers c. Connect to Global Positioning Systems

Slides 4-6 and 4-7

4. Commercial construction survey types a. Property Survey: establishes the extent and geometry of property boundaries b. Existing Conditions Survey: all utilities, infrastructure, built structures, and significant natural conditions existing above or below grade c. Topography Survey: surface features in relief, and shows elevations 5. Construction surveys establish exact locations of: a. Foundation outlines b. Building points and elevations c. Architectural built elements d. Roadways 6. All surveys must be conducted by state-licensed surveyors

Slides 4-8 and 4-9

C. Environmental Assessment 1. Report prepared for building site stating potential or existing environmental contamination a. Phase 1: soil contamination, subsurface materials, and hazardous substances b. Phase 2: soil and groundwater and surface sampling

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Slides 4-10

D. Subsurface Investigation 1. Testing of site-soil samples in testing laboratory or by field-test 2. Determines how the building must be designed and constructed 3. Influences design of foundations, retaining walls, paving, and dewatering requirements

Slides 4-11

E. Site Plan 1. A site plan is a detailed drawing that shows proposed improvements for a site development project a. Single drawing or multiple drawings b. Common to have a drainage plan, utility plan, or landscape plan separate from the site plan 2. Site plans must be prepared by a licensed architect, engineer, or surveyor

Slides 4-12

II.

Site Work Activities A. Erosion control B. Demolition earthwork C. Site remediation D. Foundation site work E. Building in wet environments may include dredging, underwater work, seawalls F. Site trenching for utilities G. Walks, irrigation systems, and landscaping

Slides 4-13

H. Sedimentation and Erosion Control 1. Municipalities may require erosion and sedimentation control plans 2. SWPPP must be implemented 3. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures include temporary seeding, mulch barriers, earth berms, silt fencing, and sediment traps

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Slides 4-14 and 4-15

I.

Storm Water Drainage 1. The natural flow of water on a site is changed whenever land is developed 2. Implementation of storm water-drainage control is of primary concern during site development, during construction and after 3. Surface drainage systems 4. Sub-surface storm drainpipes 5. Best Management Practices (BMPs) are alternatives to conventional drainage techniques. They can a. substantially reduce surface runoff quantities and resultant pollutant loadings b. reduce amount of impervious surface areas to reduce stormwater runoff c. utilize landscape and soils to naturally move, store and filter stormwater runoff before it leaves the development site

Slides 4-16

J.

Demolition 1. Removal of buildings, parking areas, roads, and driveways 2. Existing improvements above and below grade 3. Clearing of trees and brush in areas 4. Removing and capping existing utilities 5. Removing hazardous materials or contaminated soil

Slides 4-17

K. Site Remediation 1. Prevents erosion 2. Generates productive soils 3. Restores natural habitats 4. Removes toxic substances 5. Activities may include soil, surface water, and groundwater remediation

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Slides 4-18

III.

Earthwork A. Involves a variety of activities: 1. Grading, excavating, backfilling 2. Compacting 3. Laying base courses 4. Stabilizing the soil 5. Setting up slope protection 6. Establishing erosion control

Slides 4-19

B. Grading 1. Remodeling existing land form to provide level area for structure, create circulation paths, and create drainage and landscape features 2. Rough grading a. Involves adjusting the level of ground to facilitate building excavation and construction

Slides 4-20

C. Excavation 1. Required for footings, foundations, and underground utilities 2. Foundation footing depth determined by geographic location 3. Base must be placed below frost line 4. Maximum allowable slopes are specified by OSHA regulations

Slides 4-21 and 4-22

D. Sheeting 1. Holds up face of excavation in form of sheet piling, lagging, slurry walls a. Wood, aluminum, steel, precast concrete 2. Subject to soil and subsurface water pressures 3. Some soils permit the use of tiebacks 4. Slurry wall protects excavated area and becomes permanent foundation

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Slides 4-23

E. Cofferdams and Caissons 1. Cofferdams are temporary watertight enclosures a. Used in water-bearing soil or in water b. Prevent water from entering interior area 2. Caisson is a watertight shell a. Used when construction work is below water level b. May be open or pneumatic

Slides 4-24

IV.

Dewatering Techniques A. Involves lowering level of subsurface water to allow excavation to occur in a dry and stable environment B. Usually begins before excavation and continues as excavation proceeds C. More than one series of well point, header, and pump assembly is usually required

Slides 4-25

V.

Underpinning Techniques A. Requires engineering expertise and special design considerations B. Existing soil conditions must be evaluated to ensure that new footings will be bearing upon suitable stratum C. Various ways to underpin a foundation 1. Trenches dug below existing foundation 2. Use of needles

Slides 4-26 and 4-27

VI.

Paving A. Most common paving materials for roads and parking areas are asphaltic concrete or concrete B. Finish paving occurs after a sub-base and base have been laid C. Figure 4.20: The base course and wearing surface for a typical flexible pavement

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Slides 4-28 and 4-30

D. Asphalt Paving 1. Consists of asphalt cement and graded aggregates proportioned and mixed in an asphalt plant at controlled temperatures 2. Four types of asphalt paving are in common use a. Made with either cutback or emulsified asphalt E. Concrete Paving 1. Roads, driveways, and parking lots are often paved with concrete 2. Sub-grade, sub-base, and base course preparation is much like that for asphalt 3. Paving machinery may be either form or slip-form types F. Permeable Paving 1. Materials that are pervious to water: a. Gravel, crushed stone, open paving blocks, and pervious paving blocks I. Minimize runoff from a site II. Increase natural infiltration of stormwater b. Used for drives, parking areas, walkways, and patios c. Can withstand both foot and heavy traffic

Slides 4-31

VII.

Seismic Considerations A. Seismic forces are destructive forces caused by earthquakes 1. Some seismic areas have earthquake zones 2. Magnitude measured by the Richter scale B. Local codes specify footing designs in seismic areas and vary with soil classification

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

Chapter Hints 1. Have the students look up the possibility of seismic activity in their local area.

Ask them to contact their municipality to discover what plans have been made with regard to possible seismic conditions.

2. Have the students find a local architect and interview him about the importance of teamwork on a construction site.

3. Have the students find a local site that is undergoing excavation work and ask them to determine the stage of the site at the time of their visit and log their observances of interaction between the workers.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What site development components are shown on the site plan? Results of the land survey, original contours, finished contours, locations of things such as buildings, roads, wells, utilities, setback, easements, site projects as access roads, parking areas, fences, retaining walls, etc.

2.

What types of activities are required to prepare the site for construction? Remove waste material, trees, brush, remove existing structures in the way, strip and save topsoil, and grade site to new contours.

3.

What different methods are used in controlling site drainage? Surface drainage systems, subsurface storm drainpipes, or French drains that may have different inlet types.

4.

What information is gained through subsurface investigations? Establish characteristics of subsoil and get samples for testing.

5.

What types of technologies can be used for site remediation? New technologies include phyto-remediation, which utilizes plants to metabolize organic contaminants. In addition, bio-remediation uses bacteria that are able to digest and remove toxic chemicals.

6.

What type of work is conducted under the earthwork section of a construction contract? Grading, excavating, backfilling, compacting, laying base courses, stabilizing the soil, setting up slope protection, establishing erosion control, soil treatment, and building earth dams.

7.

What are the various ways the sides of an excavation can be supported to protect workers from caving earth? Slope on approved angle of repose, sheeting, slurry wall, and use of soil anchors.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 04: The Building Site

8.

What purpose does dewatering serve? Dewatering lowers the subsurface water so the excavation remains dry and stable.

9.

When would underpinning be necessary? Underpinning is used when it becomes necessary to support the foundation of an existing building located next to an area to be excavated.

10. What are the layers of material used to pave a parking area with asphaltic concrete? It is a granular base of high quality, such as crushed stone, gravel, slag, or a combination of these.

11. What is the difference in laying a concrete paving between form type pavers and slipform pavers? Form type pavers have the paver ride on the metal side forms. Slipform pavers place a slab without side forms.

12. Describe what happens in the earth when an earthquake occurs. An earthquake is an oscillatory movement of the earth’s surface. The crust may bend, rocks may snap and seismic waves travel along the surface of the earth.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 8

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 5-2

   

Define the major types of soils and their classification systems Be familiar with commonly performed soil tests Understand how factors related to soils can affect construction activities Describe various techniques available to stabilize soils

Introduction This chapter discusses types of soils and the classification of those soils, soil tests, and soil stabilization. The chapter stresses the importance of an understanding of soils, their characteristics, and their properties for those who design foundations. Building codes specify maximum design loads for various types of soils, and soil investigations on a site are required to produce information needed for design.

Slides 5-3 and 5-4

Lesson Plan I.

Soils A. Created through mechanical, chemical and biological forces acting on the earth’s crust of rock 1. Heat and gravity wear down masses of rock into small particles 2. Soils from different climate zones show distinctive characteristics 3. Activities of plants, animals, bacteria and humans activities also affect soil formation B. Soil structure affects bearing capacity, water movement, resistance to erosion, and soil’s ability to support vegetation 1. An understanding of soils, their characteristics, and properties is essential for those who design foundations a. Building codes specify maximum design loads for various types of soils b. Soil investigations are required to produce the information needed for design.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

Slides 5-5

II.

Types of Soils A. Most soils are a mixture of: 1. Gravel 2. Sand 3. Silt 4. Clay 5. Organic matter B. Rock particles larger than three inches are not classified as soil Slides 5-6

III.

Soil Classifications A. Based on the 1. Size of soil particles 2. Distribution and characteristics 3. Moisture content B. A sieve analysis is used to separate soils into different grain sizes 1. Coarse-grained 2. Fine-grained Slides 5-7 and 5-8

C. Two classification systems: 1. Unified Soil Classification System 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials D. States of consistency in terms of water content 1. Liquid limit, plastic limit, plasticity index, and shrinkage limit E. Figure 5.2: As moisture content increases, soils move from a solid to a plastic or liquid state

Slides 5-9

F. Unified Soil Classification System 1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers started a. Classify soils for use in roads, embankments, and foundations b. Classified according to percentage of grain-size particles I. Further classified by soil distribution index, plasticity index, liquid limit, and organic-matter content in 15 classes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

Slides 5-10

G. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials System 1. Classifies soils according to affect in highway construction and maintenance 2. Mineral soil is classified into seven groups, ranging from A-1 through A-7 a. Classified by grain-size distribution, liquid limit, and plasticity index

Slides 5-11 and 5-12

IV.

Subsurface Soil Testing A. For most commercial construction projects soil samples must be obtained on the building site for testing and analysis B. The design team designates the exact locations where soil borings are to be taken, normally along the building perimeter, at building corners, and at critical interior column loads C. Soil testing methods 1. Soil Load Tests 2. Standard Penetration Test (SPT) 3. Auger Borings 4. Core Borings D. The soil analysis, or soil test report, is prepared by a licensed geotechnical or civil engineer Slides 5-13

E. The soils report provides the necessary data for the project civil engineer, architect, structural or foundation engineer to design the project 1. Issues that could affect integrity of foundations a. Active faulting b. Slope instability c. Presence of expansive or corrosive soils d. Groundwater seepage

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

Slides 5-14 and 5-15

V.

Field Classification of Soil A. Separating soil particles by size by screening them through sieves B. Division of soil into various fractions based on the size of the soil particles C. Considers shape of the particles 1. Influences ability of soil to interlock particles

Slides 5-16

D. Testing for Soil Coarseness 1. All particles larger than three inches removed 2. Remaining particles are separated through a No. 200 sieve a. Permits smallest particles that can be seen by naked eye to pass through b. If more than 50 percent of sample does not pass through, it is a coarsegrained soil i. Which is divided further

Slides 5-17

E. Dry Strength Test 1. Indication of plasticity 2. Wet soil sample until stiff putty 3. Mold in one inch ball that is dried and squeezed a. If it does not break, it is highly plastic b. If it breaks but difficult to powder, it has medium plasticity c. If it is easily powdered, it has low plasticity

Slides 5-18

F. Toughness Test 1. Consistency of sample near plastic limit 2. Molded to putty, water added if needed 3. Rolled out, folded, and re-rolled until it crumbles a. Plastic limit reached when it crumbles b. Crumbled pieces lumped together and caused to crumble again

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

Slides 5-19

G. Shaking Test 1. Identifies character of fines in a soil 2. Formed into ball; water added if needed 3. Shaken in palms of hands to reveal glossiness, which is a positive reaction 4. Will eventually crumble 5. Fine sands give quickest reaction

Slides 5-20

VI.

Soil Volume Characteristics A. Volume of soil changes as it is excavated, hauled, placed, and compacted B. Volume also changes due to fluctuations in moisture content C. Clays are especially susceptible to changes in moisture

Slides 5-21

VII.

Soil Water A. Two major types of water in soils are capillary water and gravitational water 1. Capillary water is retained in the microscopic pores of individual sand particles and enables them to bind together 2. Gravitational water flows within soil in the voids between particles B. Moisture content and permeability must be considered

Slides 5-22

VIII. Soil-Bearing Capacities A. Specified by local building codes B. May have to test to determine maximum allowable pressure a soil can support C. Adjusted for deep footings and load bearing strata under piles D. Building will be stable if: 1. Soil is uniform in composition 2. Footing design is adequate

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

Slides 5-23

IX.

Soil Alterations A. Soil can be modified to improve load-bearing characteristics 1. After soil tests have been made and the soil’s properties determined B. Commonly used processes 1. Compaction 2. Stabilization 3. Dewatering

Slides 5-24 and 5-25

C. Compaction 1. Increasing density by mechanically forcing soil particles closer together 2. Produces immediate results 3. Depends on soil’s: a. Physical and chemical properties b. Moisture content c. Compaction method d. Thickness of layer 4. Figure 5.6: Smooth wheel rollers are used to compact granular materials and asphalt pavements

Slides 5-26 and 5-27

D. Soil Stabilization with Admixtures 1. Detailed in ASTM Standards on Soil Stabilization with Admixtures 2. Types: a. Blending soils: mixing imported material with original using motor grader or disc b. Lime—soil stabilization: lime added to soil, which produces a chemical reaction c. Asphalt—soil stabilization: produces a durable, stable soil used as finished surface or stabilized base course d. Cement—soil stabilization: granular soils with clay particles by blending them Portland cement e. Salt—soil stabilization: coarse crushed rock salt to stabilize clay or loamy soil

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

Chapter Hints 1. Have the students try to perform one of the soil tests discussed in this chapter on their own. This will be a rough test, but will give the student an idea of what these tests are like, nonetheless.

2. Have the student research their locale to determine the most likely type of soil they would encounter if working on a construction project.

3. Have the students locate a store or farm in the area that sells different types of soils. Ask the students to report their findings, including the prices of various soil types, to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the major soil types and how are they classified? Gravel and gravelly soils (hard rock material with particles between ¼ in. and 3 in.), sand and sandy soils (separate particles between 0.002 in. and ¼ in.), silts (fine sand particles between 0.00008 in. and 0.002 in.) and clays (material with microscopic particles less than 0.00008 in), and organic matter (partly decomposed animal and vegetable matter).

Soils are classified by the sizes of particles and their physical properties.

2.

How is the plasticity index of a soil determined? Plasticity index is the difference between the liquid limit and the plastic limit. It is determined through a dry strength test.

3.

Describe the field test for the dry strength of a soil. Use the dry strength test. Wet a soil sample until it is a stiff putty. Mold into a ball and let it dry. Squeeze between the thumb and forefinger. If it does not break it is highly plastic and is characteristic of clays and if it easily breaks down into a powder it has low plasticity.

4.

What happens to the volume of a given amount of soil after it has been excavated?

The volume of soil increases as it is excavated.

5.

How is the moisture content of a soil identified? The two major types of water present in soils are capillary and gravitational. Optimum moisture content is determined by laboratory testing of soil samples.

6.

How are subsurface conditions on a site determined? Soil load tests, standard penetration test (SPT), and core borings.

7.

Why are the load-bearing capacities of soil important? They influence the weight that can be placed upon them and the size and design of the footing. It also affects the stability of the soil and the settlement of the building.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 05: Soils

8.

In what ways can the properties of the soil be modified to improve its characteristics?

Soil properties can be modified by compaction, stabilization with admixtures, and dewatering.

9.

What admixtures are used to stabilize soil? Lime, asphalt, cement, and salt.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 06: Foundations

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 06: Foundations

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 6

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 06: Foundations

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 6-2

  

Understand the factors to be considered when designing foundations Identify various types of shallow and deep foundation systems Discuss the features and construction of common types of foundations

Introduction This chapter discussed the types of foundations and the factors considered when designing foundations. The chapter explores how the choice of foundation systems is determined by the size and type of building to be constructed, the soil and subsurface water conditions, and building code requirements.

Slides 6-3

Lesson Plan I.

Foundation Design A. Begins when architectural concepts developed B. Architect: responsible for building shape and size design, orientation, space utilization, and selection of materials C. Structural engineer: involved with building structural frame D. Foundation engineer: works with both

Slides 6-4

E. Foundation considerations 1. Prevention of settlement 2. Depth of foundation impacted by the climate conditions 3. Hydrostatic forces

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 06: Foundations

Slides 6-5

F. Foundation Types 1. Spread or mat foundations: transfer building loads to soil through footings at foundation wall or column 2. Pile foundations: long wood, concrete, or steel piles driven into the earth 3. Driven pile foundations: formed by drilling holes in earth filled with concrete or steel

Slides 6-6

II.

Shallow Foundations A. Use spread footings, slabs on grade, or mat foundations to distribute building loads over a large enough area of ground to not exceed the soil’s bearing capacity B. Generally located not far below site surface C. Less costly than deep foundations

Slides 6-7 and 6-8

D. Spread Footings 1. Most common is continuous wall or strip footing a. Provides stable base around entire perimeter of a structure 2. Requires reinforcing with steel bars 3. Must be placed on undisturbed soil 4. Wall footings on sloped sites are usually staggered using horizontal steps 5. Figure 6.8: Grade beams distribute loads between deep foundation elements, such as piles

Slides 6-9

E. Slab and Raft Foundations 1. Slab-on-grade is widely used a. Many variations for this type of foundation 2. Raft or mat foundations are reinforced concrete slabs several feet thick that cover entire footprint of building 3. For heavy loading conditions, steel grillage footings incorporate steel beams to reinforce the footing

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 06: Foundations

Slides 6-10 and 6-11

III.

Deep Foundations A. Used when impossible to provide suitable bearing surface for a structure close to the surface B. Generally make use of piles 1. Pile foundations use long and slender members that bypass shallow soil to deeper soil of rock of high bearing capacity 2. End bearing piles 3. Skin-friction piles C. Figure 6.15: Commonly used pile types

Slides 6-12 and 6-13

D. Displacement Piles 1. Dislodge soils radially and vertically as a slender wood, steel, or pre-cast concrete pile shaft is driven or mechanically vibrated into the ground 2. Also called “driven piles” 3. Commonly used materials are timber, H-piles, pipe piles, and pre-cast and pre-tensioned concrete piles E. Figure 6.17: Precast and pre-tensioned concrete piles may be cylindrical, square, or octagonal

Slides 6-14 through 6-16

F. Methods of Driving Displacement Piles 1. Drop: uses a heavy weight lifted up vertical rails called leads 2. Single-acting steam: mounted on top of pile 3. Double-acting steam: same as single, except steam pressure is applied to the piston backside of a piston 4. Hydraulic: hydraulic fluid used to move the ram 5. Diesel: self-contained driving unit that includes a vertical cylinder, a ram, an anvil, and diesel power unit parts 6. Vibratory: held by crane, mounted on pile end G. Figure 6.19: Drop hammers use a heavy weight that is lifted up vertical rails and released to drive piles

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 06: Foundations

Slides 6-17

IV.

Non-Displacement Piles A. Unlike displacement piles, these carry building loads solely through end-bearing B. Bored piles form an in situ pile by drilling and filling with concrete C. Considerations: how to drill, how to protect against soil collapse, and how to remove soil D. Continuous flight auger E. Steel casing F. Franki pressure-injected process

Slides 6-18 and 6-19

V.

Geopier Foundation A. Is a pile foundation system in which stiff rock columns are constructed deep into the ground to a suitable bearing depth B. Process of forming multiple bands of compacted stone placed on top of each other stiffens the surrounding soil C. Figure 6.25: The Helical Pier foundation uses steel helical piers drilled into the soil before the footing is poured

Chapter Hints 1. Instruct the students to find a construction site in their area that is in the process of foundation work. A site using piles would be the best type to visit.

If one is not available, other foundation work sites will do. Have the students report on what they observe.

2. Have the students find a local construction company and ask them about any foundation issues in the local buildings. Have the students research any issues and how they were handled.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 06: Foundations

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the factors considered during foundation design? Important considerations in foundation designs are the prevention of settlement, the climate conditions of the site, and the hydrostatic forces.

2.

How are foundation and basement walls waterproofed? Foundation and basement walls are waterproofed with asphaltic or membrane materials. Coarse-grained material is backfilled against the side of the foundation, usually with a perforated drain at the base.

3.

What are the major types of foundations? Spread (or mat), driven pile, and drilled pile foundations.

4.

What types of materials are used for pile foundation construction? Timber, open pipe, closed pipe, H-pile, cast-in-place, straight steel shells, tapered steel shell, pre-cast concrete, and composite.

5.

What distinguishes displacement piles from non-displacement piles? Nondisplacement piles carry building loads solely through end bearing. Displacement piles are driven into the earth and non-displacement piles are created through excavation.

6.

What types of equipment are used to drive piles? Piles are driven into the earth with pile hammers such as drop, single-acting steam, double-acting steam, diesel, vibratory, and hydraulic hammers.

7.

How are non-displacement piles constructed? Non-displacement piles are constructed by drilling and filling the excavation with concrete.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 12 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 12

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 7-2 and 7-3

     

Identify the various types of Portland cement and cite their purposes and uses Be familiar with the properties of Portland cement and their effect on concrete Discuss the role of water in concrete and its desired properties List the types of aggregate used in concrete and their desirable characteristics Understand the purposes of various concrete admixtures and their effect on concrete Be aware of how commonly used concrete tests are conducted and what they reveal about a mix

Introduction This chapter discusses concrete, one of the most widely used construction materials with a long history of use. The chapter discusses types of concrete, concrete aggregates, concrete admixtures, and concrete tests.

Slides 7-4 and 7-5

Lesson Plan I.

Concrete A. One of the most widely used construction materials with a long history of use 1. Strong, durable, and long lasting 2. Possesses plastic qualities for infinite formal possibilities 3. Derived from naturally occurring, readily available materials a. Portland cement, coarse and fine aggregates, and water in proper proportions B. Concrete can be made by 1. Simple hand mixing methods 2. Large quantities at a computer-controlled batching plant C. Produced in three basic types 1. Redi-mix concrete 2. Pre-cast concrete 3. Concrete masonry units

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Slides 7-6 and 7-7

II.

Portland Cement A. The binding compound of concrete B. Fine, pulverized material consisting of compounds of lime, iron, silica, alumina C. ASTM-Designated types 1. Type I: normal 2. Type IA: normal, air-entrained 3. Type II: moderate 4. Type IIA: moderate, air-entrained 5. Type III: high early strength 6. Type IIIA: high early strength, air-entrained 7. Type IV: low heat of hydration 8. Type V: sulfate resisting

Slides 7-8 and 7-9

D. Additional types of Portland cement: 1. Blended hydraulic cements 2. Masonry cements 3. Waterproof Portland cement 4. Plastic cements 5. Expansive cement 6. Regulated set cement

Slides 7-10

E. Figure 7.4: Blended cements use a combination of Portland cement or clinker and gypsum blended or interground with pozzolans, slag, or fly ash F. Properties of Portland cement 1. Specifications place limits on chemical composition and physical properties 2. Includes: a. Fineness, soundness, consistency, setting time, false set, compressive strength, heat of hydration, and specific gravity

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Slides 7-11

G. Storing Portland cement 1. Moisture sensitive, so must be protected from dampness 2. Specific considerations for sacked material, warehouse storage, bags, bulk cement, and bins and silos

Slides 7-12

III.

Supplementary Cementing Materials (SCMs) A. The manufacturing of Portland cement is a major source of environmental pollution 1. Per ton produced a. 3 to 6 million Btu of energy required b. 1.7 tons of raw materials (limestone) required c. Significant emissions include i. Carbon dioxide (CO2) ii. Nitrogen oxides iii. Sulfur oxides iv. Particulates

Slides 7-13

B. SCM mineral admixtures consist of natural or by-products of other manufacturing processes used to reduce the amount of Portland cement in a concrete mix 1. Fly ash: a. Fine, glass-like powder recovered from gases created by coal-fired electric power generation b. Provides an economical and environmentally preferable substitute for Portland cement

Slides 7-14

IV.

Water 1. Should be clear and free of sulfates, acids, alkalis, and humus 2. Potable water from municipal water systems or wells provides suitable water 3. Water from lakes, ponds, or rivers should be carefully checked for suitability before use

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Slides 7-15

V.

Aggregates A. Aggregates are inert granules (crushed stone, gravels and minerals) that are mixed with cement and sand to form concrete 1. 60 to 80 percent of concrete is made up of aggregates 2. Must conform to ASTM specifications 3. Must be clean, strong, free of absorbed chemicals, and devoid of coatings of clay, humus, and other fine materials

Slides 7-16

B. Characteristics of Aggregates 1. Resistance to abrasion and skidding 2. Resistance to freezing and thawing 3. Compressive strength 4. Shape and texture of particles 5. Specific gravity 6. Absorption and surface moisture 7. Chemical stability

Slides 7-17

C. Grading Aggregates 1. Graded into standardized sizes by passing them through a sieve a. Specified by ASTM C136 and CSA A23.2.2 b. Seven sieve sizes for fine aggregates c. Ten sieve sizes for coarse aggregates 2. Limits used are specified for percentage of material passing each sieve Slides 7-18

D. Types of Aggregates 1. Structural lightweight aggregates a. Produce lightweight structural concrete

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

2. Insulating lightweight aggregates a. Produce loose-fill insulation and plaster 3. Heavyweight aggregates a. Produce heavyweight concretes for radiation shielding, applications that need great weight

Slides 7-19

E. Testing Aggregates for Impurities 1. Must be free of clay, silt, organic impurities 2. Impurities influence composition, strength, setting of concrete 3. Organic impurities determined by ASTM C40

Slides 7-20

F. Handling and Storing Aggregates 1. Should be stored in layers of uniform thickness 2. Must be stored and handled so they are not contaminated by unwanted substances, such as earth and leaves

Slides 7-21

VI.

Admixtures A. Ingredients added to concrete, other than Portland cement, aggregates, and water B. May be added before or during mixing C. Change properties of concrete D. Should be used sparingly and only on the advice of a concrete specialist

Slides 7-22

E. Air-Entraining Agents 1. Used to entrain microscopic air bubbles 2. Distributed uniformly throughout the cement paste 3. Improve durability 4. Increase damage resistance 5. Improve workability 6. Improve resistance to sulfate attack

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Slides 7-23

F. Retarders 1. Used to slow cement past setting time 2. Often employed in hot weather 3. Reduce water required 4. Result in a better watercement ratio 5. Increase concrete strength 6. Help when large amounts are needed or when placement is difficult

Slides 7-24

G. Water Reducers 1. Reduce amount of water needed to produce concrete of given consistency 2. Increase slump amount a. Lower watercement ratio b. Greater concrete strength 3. Shorten set time 4. Increase drying shrinkage

Slides 7-25

H. Accelerators 1. Speed up concrete strength development 2. Used in cold weather to develop strength faster in order to offset freeze damage 3. Useful in concrete in which steel is embedded

Slides 7-26

I.

Pozzolans 1. Siliceous and aluminous material that chemically reacts with calcium hydroxide at ordinary temperatures 2. Form compounds possessing cementitious properties 3. Sometimes added to concrete to help reduce internal temperatures

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Slides 7-27

J.

Workability Agents 1. Term used to describe ease with which concrete can be placed and consolidated 2. Improved workability may be needed if pumping or placing in forms containing considerable reinforcing 3. Addition of entrained air is the best

Slides 7-28

K. Superplasticizers 1. Reduce water and cement at constant watercement ratio 2. Produce normal concrete at normal watercement ratios for easy workability 3. Produce concrete of higher strength by reducing water content required while maintaining normal cement content

Slides 7-29

L. Permeability-Reducing and Damp Proofing Agents 1. Permeability-reducing agents a. Certain soaps, stearates, and petroleum products 2. Damp-proofing admixtures a. Used to reduce moisture that is transferred by capillary action

Slides 7-30

M. Bonding Agents 1. Concrete surface is of great importance a. Must be dry and clean (free of dirt, dust, grease, paint, etc.) b. Proper temperature should be maintained 2. Bonding admixtures added to Portland cement mixtures or applied to surface of old concrete to increase bond strength

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Slides 7-31

N. Coloring Agents 1. Can be colored by: a. Mixing pure, finely ground mineral oxides with dry Portland cement b. Exposing the aggregate c. Mixing synthetic oxides with fine silica sand d. Painting or staining the concrete surface after it has been completely cured and neutralized

Slides 7-32

O. Hardeners 1. Concrete life can be extended by: a. Liquidchemical hardener 2. Nonflammable liquid containing magnesium and zinc fluosilicates with wetting agent a. Dry-powder hardener 3. Quartz silica aggregates and alkali-fast inorganic oxides a. Finely ground iron aggregate and, if desired, inorganic oxides for color Slides 7-33

P. Grouting and Gas-Forming Agents 1. Portland cement grouts are widely used for: a. Stabilizing foundations, filling cracks in concrete walls, filling joints, and grouting tenons or anchor bolts 2. Gas-forming agents a. Added to concrete or grout to cause a slight expansion before it hardens Slides 7-34 and 7-35

VII.

Basics of Concrete A. Made up of two parts: 1. Aggregates a. Range from fine to coarse

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

2. Paste a. Portland cement and water mixture with some entrapped air that coats the particles of aggregate and hardens and binds them b. Hardens due to hydration B. Figure 7.11: A cross section of hardened concrete showing how the cement and water ratio coats each particle of aggregate and fills the voids between particles Slides 7-36

VIII. Water-Cement Ratio and Minimum Cement Content A. Water-cement ratio 1. Ratio by weight between the water and cement used to make paste 2. Should be lowest value required to meet the design considerations B. Minimum cement content 1. Ensures good finishability, good wear resistance, and good appearance

Slides 7-37

IX.

Aggregates A. Must be properly graded and of proper quality 1. Produces the most economical concrete 2. Allows use of maximum-size coarse aggregate 3. Reduces water and cement required B. Maximum size depends on size and shape and steel amount of members

Slides 7-38

X.

Entrained Air and Slump A. Entrained air 1. Should be used in all concrete paving regardless of the temperatures but especially for those exposed to freeze and thaw cycles B. Slump 1. Measure of consistency of concrete, defining the ability of fresh concrete to flow

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Slides 7-39

XI.

Concrete Design A. Normal-weight concrete depends on required strength and durability B. Lightweight insulating concrete depends on aggregate and desired compressive strength C. Lightweight structural concrete can be lighter than normal-weight concrete and have no loss in strength D. Heavyweight structural concrete is for radiation shielding in medical or nuclear applications Slides 7-40 and 7-43

XII.

Concrete Tests A. Tests with fresh concrete 1. Slump test 2. Unit weight test 3. Air-content test 4. Cement content test 5. Strength specimens B. Tests with hardened concrete 1. Compressive strength test 2. Flexural strength test 3. Abrasion test 4. Freeze-thaw test 5. Accelerated curing tests C. Nondestructive tests 1. Rebound tests 2. Penetration tests 3. Pull-out tests 4. Dynamic or vibration tests D. Figure 7.17: Compression strength testing of a capped test cylinder

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

Slides 7-44 and 7-45

XIII. Emerging Trends in Concrete A. Reactive powder concrete (RPC) 1. High-performance concrete able to achieve compressive strengths of up to 30,000 psi B. Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC) 1. Also called self-compacting concrete 2. Uses new super-plasticizers that eliminate the need for vibration and provides a smooth surface finish with no voids C. Smog Eating Concrete 1. Uses cement that has been treated with titanium dioxide D. Permeable concrete 1. Made with narrowly graded coarse aggregate, little or no fine aggregate, and a very low water/cement ratio E. Bioconcrete 1. Heals itself by using bacteria that is activated in water to create limestone like material that fills cracks F. Rammed earth 1. Historic construction classified as green building material because utilizes local material with little embodied energy

Chapter Hints 1. Instruct the students to do a Web search for a site that specializes in concrete. Have the students report on what types of additives and aggregates are sold, as well as the price, quality, and quantity of the materials they find.

2. Have the students visit a local concrete plant. If one is not available, have the students try and locate a video of concrete plant processes on the Internet.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the basic ingredients in concrete? Portland cement, coarse and fine aggregates, and water. Several admixtures are also available.

2.

How does concrete cure and harden? Concrete hardens due to a chemical reaction between the cement and water called hydration.

3.

What ingredients normally make up Portland cement? Compounds of lime, iron, silica, and alumina.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

12

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 07: Concrete

4.

What are the designations for the different types of Portland cement? Type I: Normal, Type II: Moderate, Type III: High Early Strength, Type IV: Low Heat of Hydration, Type V: Sulfate Resisting, White Portland Cement, Air-entrained, Blended, Masonry, Waterproof, Plastic, Expansive, and Regulated set.

5.

What is meant by air-entraining? Air-entrained Portland cement encapsulates millions of microscopic air bubbles in the concrete mix.

6.

How does the addition of air-entraining materials to Portland cement improve the concrete? It increases durability when exposed to moisture and freeze and thaw cycles. It also increases the concrete's resistance to surface scaling. It improves the workability, reduces segregation, bleeding, and the amount of water needed.

7.

What ingredients may be used in masonry cements? Portland cement, slag cement, hydraulic lime, hydrated lime, limestone, chalk calcareous shell, talc, slag, or clay.

8.

How does the fineness of the cement affect the concrete? The rate of hydration increases as the cement increases in fineness. This accelerates the strength development of the concrete.

9.

Explain how Portland cement should be stored. Portland cement needs to be protected from dampness. Sacked material should be stored on pallets and should not touch exterior walls. Backs should be packed tightly together and cover with tarpaulins if stored for long periods of time.

10. What natural aggregates are used in making concrete? Minerals and rocks (igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary).

11. What aggregates should be avoided when making concrete? Avoid aggregates containing shale, shaly rocks, soft or porous rocks, and some types of chert.

12. What aggregates are used in insulating concrete? Perlite, diatomite, vermiculite, pumice, and scoria.

13. What are the commonly used admixtures? Air-entraining agents, retarders, water reducers, accelerators, pozzolans, workability agents, superplasticizers, damp proofing and permeability-reducing agents, bonding agents, concrete coloring agents, hardeners, grouting agents, and gas-forming agents.

14. What is the recommended water-cement ratio? The water-cement ratio should be the lowest value required to meet the design considerations.

15. What five factors influence the quality of finished concrete exposed to the elements?

Water-cement ratio, cement context, quality of aggregates, entrained air, and slump.

16. What can be done in hot weather to help retard rapid setting times? Add retarding admixture, cover concrete, keep it wet, and spray with curing compounds.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

13

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 9

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 8-2 and 8-3

        

Discuss the processes for preparing, transporting, handling, and placing cast-in-place concrete Explain how cast-in-place concrete walls, beams, and columns are formed, reinforced, and poured Discuss the finishes used on concrete surfaces Know how concrete is cured Cite various types of formwork used for cast-in-place concrete Identify and describe types of concrete reinforcing materials Prepare sketches illustrating the various types of monolithically cast slab and beam floors and roofs Describe the procedure for casting and erecting tilt-up concrete walls Explain briefly what is meant by lift-slab construction

Introduction This chapter discusses cast-in-place concrete and its preparation, transportation, handling, and placement. Formwork and reinforcing materials are discussed and illustrations are given of this widely used and effective construction material.

Slides 8-4

Lesson Plan I.

Cast-in-Place Concrete A. Produced on the building site by 1. Setting wood, metal, or molded plastic forms in place 2. Placing reinforcing material in the forms 3. Pouring the concrete to fill the form 4. Letting it cure into a hardened material

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Slides 8-5

B. Must be designed and constructed according to the building code C. Usually are heavier than steel, wood, or precast concrete members, resulting in increased loads on the foundation D. May be difficult to complete during extreme weather conditions E. A wide range of forms, concrete pumps and power finishing machines available

Slides 8-6

II.

Building Codes A. Reinforced concrete structural members and pre-stressed concrete 1. Must be designed and constructed according to the provisions in building code B. Codes include specifications regarding: 1. Reinforcements, surface conditions, concrete placement, fire protection, resistance to frost action, and loads

Slides 8-7

III.

Preparing Concrete A. Batching 1. The amount of concrete mixed at one time B. Mixing 1. Mixed until uniform in appearance and all ingredients are evenly distributed C. Stationary mixing 1. On a large job, concrete is often mixed on-site using stationary mixer

Slides 8-8

D. Ready-mix concrete 1. May be fully mixed in a central mixing plant and delivered to the site in a truck mixer that operates at agitating speed or in special non-agitating truck E. Remixing 1. Fresh concrete in the drum tends to stiffen even before it has hydrated to initial set F. Figure 8.3 Ready-mixed concrete can be discharged directly from a truck mixer to its final location.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Slides 8-9

IV.

Transporting, Handling, and Placing Concrete A. Delays in placing the concrete can cause a loss of plasticity B. Method of moving the concrete must not result in the segregation of concrete materials C. There are many ways to move and place concrete

Slides 8-10 and 8-11

D. Moving Concrete 1. Concrete pump trucks, truck mixers, and non-agitating trucks are used most frequently to bring concrete to sites 2. Concrete is moved with cranes using concrete buckets, barrows and buggies, chutes, belt conveyors, pneumatic guns, and concrete pumps

Slides 8-12

E. Placing Concrete 1. Occurs after: a. The base for on-grade pours is ready b. The forms for walls, columns, and beams are erected and reinforcing is in place 2. Should be placed continuously and as near as possible to its final location Slides 8-13

F. Placing Concrete in Cold Weather 1. Concrete placed in cold weather gains strength slowly 2. Critical period depends on ingredients, conditions of mixing, placing, curing, and long-term drying 3. Consider heat of hydration, cements, admixtures, and concrete temperature

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Slides 8-14

G. Placing Concrete in Hot Weather 1. Maintain low concrete temperature by cooling aggregates and water a. Can involve shading and painting white the mixers, chutes, hoppers, pump lines, and other concrete handling equipment 2. Must be transported from the mixing station to point of placement ASAP

Slides 8-15

H. Pneumatic Placement 1. Placed by pneumatically forcing a dry mixture of sand, aggregate, and cement through a hose and mixing it with water at a nozzle 2. Used to form thin sections in difficult locations and to cover large areas

Slides 8-16 and 8-17

V.

Finishing Concrete A. After being placed and consolidated, it is screeded (also called strike-off) 1. Removes excess concrete with a screed to bring it flush with top of formwork B. Immediately after strike-off, surface is bull floated C. When bleed water sheen has evaporated, the surface is ready for final finishing D. Figure 8.10: A power float is used after the bleed water sheen has evaporated and the concrete will sustain foot pressure with only slight indentation

Slides 8-18

VI.

Curing Concrete A. Material reaches design strength after 28 days of curing B. Length of curing period depends on: 1. Type of cement 2. Design of the mix 3. Strength required 4. Size of the member poured 5. Weather conditions

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Slides 8-19 and 8-20

VII.

Formwork A. Temporary or permanent molds into which concrete is poured B. Variety of manufactured metal forms (steel and aluminum) are available in a range of sizes, along with assembly and bracing systems C. The responsibility for formwork design normally lies with the general contractor D. The inside of formwork is coated with a release agent that prohibits the concrete from bonding to the formwork surface E. Facilitates the easy removal of the forms F. Formwork can be made of: 1. Douglas fir, southern pine, spruce 2. Exterior grade plywood and Plyform 3. Wafer board, molded plastic, waxed cardboard G. Wood and metal forms are generally assembled in inside/outside pairs

Slides 8-21

H. Many technical manuals are available to assist in the design of formwork 1. “Formwork for Concrete” 2. “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork” a. Published by the American Concrete Institute (ACI)

Slides 8-22

VIII. Concrete Reinforcing Materials A. Concrete and steel have about the same coefficient of thermal expansion 1. Concrete bonds to steel 2. Steel is not corroded by concrete a. They work together to provide an efficient structural system.

B. Steel reinforcing bars (rebars) 1. Hot rolled steel rods that may be plain (smooth) or deformed

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Slides 8-23

C. Welded wire reinforcement (WWR) 1. Assembly of steel reinforcing wires made from rod that is either cold-drawn or cold-rolled or both D. Fiber Reinforcement 1. Added to the concrete as it is prepared in the mixer 2. Include glass fibers, polymeric, steel, asbestos, carbon, and natural fibers 3. Also used with rebar and welded wire

Slides 8-24 and 8-25

IX.

Cast-in-Place Concrete Elements A. Casting on-grade slabs 1. Require preparation of the slab that varies with the type of soil, but often a base of compacted gravel is required over the soil 2. Lightly reinforced or structurally reinforced 3. Joints are necessary to control cracking, reduce size of pour, and separate slab from surfaces where it should not bond

Slides 8-26

B. Cast-in-place reinforced concrete walls 1. When footing is poured, vertical reinforcing dowels are inserted that project above top of footing a. Vertical bars are wired to the foundation dowels b. The top of each vertical bar is wired to a horizontal bar c. Additional horizontal bars are located and wire tied to vertical bars, forming a reinforcing wall mat.

Slides 8-27

C. Reinforcing cast-in-place beams 1. Rests on end supports 2. Ties together structure from column to column

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

D. Reinforcing cast-in-place columns 1. Typically round, square, or rectangular 2. Reinforced with vertical bars E. Figure 8.34: A concrete slab with insulation and reinforcing in place

Slides 8-28

X.

Cast-in-Place Concrete Framing Systems A. Utilizes cast-in-place columns, one-way or two-way concrete slabs, and cast-inplace joists, beams, and girders B. Exterior can be finished in a number of ways 1. Including precast concrete spandrel panels

Slides 8-29

C. General construction procedures 1. Load-bearing walls and columns poured 2. Forms for the slab are built 3. Beams are formed and poured with floor 4. Slab forms are supported with temporary joists and beams of wood or metal a. Supported by adjustable length temporary shores

Slides 8-30

D. One-way flat slab floor and roof construction 1. One-way solid slab construction 2. One-way flat slab with beams and girders 3. One-way flat slab with joists and beams

Slides 8-31

E. Two-way flat slab floor and roof construction 1. Reinforcing running in two or more directions 2. Two-way flat slab construction 3. Two-way solid slab 4. Two-way flat plate 5. Two-way joist (waffle) flat slab

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Slides 8-32 and 8-33

F. Tilt-up wall construction 1. Form of site-cast concrete, cast in a horizontal position on the building site, or directly on the concrete floor slab 2. Surfaces finished in many ways a. Textured b. Washed to expose embedded aggregate c. Troweled smooth d. Painted

Slides 8-34

G. Lift-slab construction 1. Involves casting a reinforced concrete slab for each floor of a building and the roof, one on top of the other 2. Slip-forming: used to cast-in-place tall structures a. Grain elevators b. Stairwells

Chapter Hints 1. Ask the students to visit their local municipality and find building codes that relate to reinforced concrete structural members and pre-stressed concrete.

2. Have the students visit a local construction site and see if there are any current cast-in-place constructions in progress. If so, ask the students to take pictures of the site, provided the construction site manager approves.

3. Instruct the students to visit ACI’s Web site at http://www.concrete.org and have them research recent articles on proposals for change or guides about cast-in-place concrete construction. Have the students report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

How long can ready-mix concrete remain in the mixer and still be used? Deliver within 1½ hours.

2.

What devices are used on the site to move concrete to the point of placement?

Conveyors, buggies, concrete pump, crane with concrete bucket, and delivering directly from concrete mixer truck.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

3.

How is concrete consolidated? By hand, pushing rods into the mix or with a mechanical vibrator.

4.

What may happen if the temperature of the concrete mix exceeds 100°F (38°C)? It hardens too fast to allow hydration to completely occur.

5.

Why are freshly poured concrete slabs bullfloated? To lower high spots, fill low spots and embed exposed aggregate into the mix. This produces a fairly smooth surface.

6.

What is the difference between an isolation joint and a construction joint? Isolation joints separate the poured concrete slab from the foundation. Construction joints separate the end of one pour from the next that will butt it.

7.

What is meant by hydration? Hydration is a chemical reaction between the cement and water which produces heat and hardens the concrete.

8.

What are the curing methods in common use? Keep surface of concrete moist by sprinkling, spray curing compounds on the surface. Cover the concrete with a sheet (plastic) material, cover with wet material like burlap and keep it wet.

9.

What is the purpose of form liners? Form liners produce a textured surface on the pour concrete.

10. How is the tensile strength of concrete beams increased? Tensile strength is increased by adding reinforcing bars.

11. What two styles of reinforcing bars are used? Hot rolled steel bars that may be smooth or deformed.

12. What is the diameter in inches of a No. 8 bar? 1.0 in.

13. What purpose do stirrups serve when installing reinforcing bars in a form? Stirrups are used to carry reinforcing bars in the forms and hold them as the concrete is poured.

14. How can you decide how many inches of concrete are needed to give fire protection to reinforcing bars? Consult the building code.

15. What styles of wires are used to make welded wire reinforcement? Deformed and smooth.

16. What types of coatings are used on welded wire reinforcement? Hot-dipped, galvanized and an epoxy coating.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 08: Cast-in-Place Concrete

17. What types of fibers are used in the production of fiber reinforced concrete? Glass fibers, polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, acrylic, aramid, steel, carbon, and natural fibers.

18. What is the difference between lightly reinforced and structurally reinforced concrete slabs? Lightly reinforced slabs depend on the earth for support. Structurally reinforced slabs contain reinforcing bars and sometimes weld wire fabric.

19. What is the purpose of using dropped panels and capitals when casting flat concrete slabs? A dropped panel is placed on the lower side of a flat concrete slab to thicken and strengthen the areas around a column.

20. What is meant by tilt-up construction? Tilt-up wall construction refers to the process of costing a concrete wall on the ground and raising it to a vertical position after it has gained strength.

21. What is unique about the slip-forming technique? The vertical pour continues as the forms are slowly raised higher and higher.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 9-2 and 9-3

       

Describe and identify the major types of precast concrete units Explain how precast units are manufactured Cite the advantages and limitations of using precast concrete structural units Explain the differences between pre-stressed and non-pre-stressed precast concrete units Discuss the differences between pre-tensioned and post-tensioned structural concrete units Describe the various types of precast concrete slab units and their applications List standard types and typical sizes of precast concrete columns, beams, girders, and wall panels Discuss the procedure for erecting precast concrete units and the types of connections used

Introduction This chapter discusses precast concrete and its major groups, its manufacturing process, its advantages and limitations, and the differences in the various types of precast concrete in use in the construction industry today.

Slides 9-4 and 9-5

Lesson Plan I.

Precast Concrete A. Cast and cured under factory-controlled conditions 1. Transported to building site for assembly B. Precast concrete units can be classified into two major groups 1. Precast structural units 2. Precast architectural units C. Structural units include 1. Floor and roof slabs, beams, girders, columns, and wall panels

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

D. Precast architectural concrete units used for 1. Façade wall panels, cast corners, screens, louvers, fins, and other visible façade elements

Slides 9-6

II.

Advantages of Precast Concrete Units A. Casting is in automated facilities where experienced crews produce units under controlled conditions B. Control of materials, mixing, and placement of concrete is automated C. Regularly tested per ASTM standards to produce higher-quality concrete D. Finished and cured under carefully controlled environmental conditions E. Advantages of Precast Concrete Units (cont’d.)

Slides 9-7

F. Once the concrete has achieved design strength, units are removed from the casting bed, stored, and delivered to the job site 1. Large precast units can be cast by moving forms to the job and casting onsite G. Precast units can be smaller and lighter than cast-in-place units H. Members can be cast and stored until needed I. Inclement weather does not slow precast as easily as it does cast-in-place jobs

Slides 9-8

III.

Building Codes A. Extensive specifications pertaining to design and installation of precast concrete members 1. Engineering design data, codes, guidelines for reinforcing, connections, lifting devices, fabrication, shop drawings, tendon anchorage, and grouting procedures 2. Codes also specify requirements for meeting fire codes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

Slides 9-9

IV.

Pre-Stressing PreCast Concrete A. Non-pre-stressed units are cast in molds in a plant, then cured and shipped to the job site 1. Are reinforced in the same manner as cast-in-place concrete 2. Are not under tension forces

Slides 9-10 and 9-11

B. Pre-stressed concrete units have stresses introduced before they are placed under a load.

1. A beam transfers its load laterally along its length to supporting elements 2. Pre-stressing concrete provides a means to overcome the materials inherent weakness in tension C. Figure 9.4: A typical reinforcing cage for a precast non-pre-stressed concrete beam

Slides 9-12

D. Pre-Tensioned Units 1. Pre-tensioning places the steel reinforcing in tension before the wet concrete is poured 2. After the strand is stressed, the concrete is placed in the form 3. As it hardens it bonds to the strands 4. The resulting forces produced by the strands pre-stress the concrete

Slides 9-13 and 9-14

E. Post-Tensioned Units 1. Post-tensioning applies stresses to the concrete unit after it has been cast and hardened 2. Cast unit using normal reinforcement 3. Run post-tensioning strands through the unit so concrete does not bond 4. Post-tensioning strands and hydraulic jack apply tension to the strand F. Figure 9.9: A post-tensioned bed with a hydraulic jack tensioning the cables in each tendon

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

Slides 9-15

V.

Precast Concrete Elements A. Standardized precast slabs used for floor and roof construction 1. May be supported by frames of steel, site-cast or precast concrete, or bearing walls of concrete or masonry 2. Solid slabs and channel slabs are used for short spans and minimum slab depth 3. Hollow-core slabs used for spans ranging up to 40 ft (12 m) in length and 6 to 12 in. (150 to 300 mm) thick

Slides 9-16

B. Precast concrete columns 1. Can be connected with precast concrete beams, to form a post-and-beam structural framework 2. Most are reinforced conventionally 3. Columns often designed to incorporate haunches, projections used to support beams, on two or three sides

Slides 9-17

C. Precast pre-stressed concrete beams and girders 1. Efficient load-bearing members 2. Achieve long spans in small profiles a. Made in standard shapes or custom designs i. The L-shaped and inverted tee beams provide a bearing surface for precast floor units ii. Allows lower overall height than does resting floor and roof units on top of rectangular beams.

Slides 9-18

D. Precast concrete wall panels 1. Pre-stressed or conventionally reinforced a. Load-bearing or non-loadbearing b. Hollow, solid, or of an insulated sandwich construction with a flat, ribbed, or other surface configuration c. Used with a precast or cast-in-place concrete, or steel framing system

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

Slides 9-19

E. Other wall systems use a double-wall insulated precast concrete sandwich panel for both walls and floors F. Two concrete layers are poured in sequence and held together with steel truss reinforcing

Slides 9-20 through 9-23

VI.

Connecting Precast Units A. Types of connections for precast units: 1. Bolted 2. Welded 3. Post-tensioned 4. Doweled bonding B. The main connecting elements typically involve metal plates or anchor rods that are cast into the precast elements 1. Grout, mortar, and drypack 2. Used to transfer loads between members 3. Fill noncritical voids 4. Load-bearing grouts should be non-shrinking 5. Only grouts manufactured for this specific purpose should be used C. Figure 9.17: A typical column-to-column connection D. Figure 9.26: Double tees can be supported on a ledger beam that is seated on a haunch of a precast concrete column

Slides 9-24

VII.

Erecting Precast Concrete A. Planning 1. After structural design work is complete, plans are sent to manufacturer for casting 2. Work planned using standard molds when possible and custom-built molds as needed 3. A major factor is the sequencing of manufacture and delivery of members to the job site

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

Slides 9-25

4. Consider erection procedures, lifting hardware and connections before units are cast 5. Special erection plans show how the precast units are to be raised and connected a. Allow workers to install from a stable work platform b. Provision for welding, post-tensioning, grouting c. Allow for temporary bracing to maintain stability and equilibrium during construction

Slides 9-26

B. Transporting units to the site 1. Deliveries of precast members are usually made by truck 2. Considerations: a. Distance to job b. Type, size, and weight of members c. Type of vehicle required d. Weather and road conditions

Slides 9-27

C. Lifting of concrete components 1. Truck mounted or crawler-type mobile crane 2. Rigging a. Equipment, cables, slings, and other hoisting equipment to lift precast units b. Pre-stressed members should never be lifted or stored upside down; they must be kept upright

Slides 9-28 through 9-30

D. Placing precast units 1. Typically supported by cast-in-place foundations 2. Connection tolerances are tight a. Columns for the lowest floor are lifted over the foundation anchor bolts b. Leveling plates are set and aligned, bolts tightened, and the area under the column filled with grout c. After the columns are set in place, girders and beams are hoisted into place and connected by bolting or welding

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 09: Precast Concrete

d. The entire lower frame is straightened, squared and braced as required before connections are tightened and grouted e. Finally, precast floor slabs are installed and connected to the structural frame E. Figure 9.30: Precast units are lifted into place with a crane and proper cables, slings, and other hoisting devices

Chapter Hints 1. Ask the student to visit their local municipality and find building codes that relate to precast concrete construction.

2. Have the students visit a local construction site and see if there are any current precast concrete constructions ongoing. If so, ask that the student take pictures of the site, provided the construction site manager approves.

3. Instruct the students to visit ACI’s Web site at http://www.concrete.org and have them research recent articles on proposals for change or guides about precast concrete construction. Have the students report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

Give some examples of precast concrete structural units. Columns, beams, lintels, double-T’s, channels, flat slabs, and tongue and groove plank.

2.

How do non-pre-stressed structural units differ from pre-tensioned units? Prestressed concrete units have stresses introduced on them before they are placed under a load. Non-pre-stressed units are not under any tension.

3.

How does camber in a beam serve to resist loads? Camber resists loads by allowing the tensioned member to settle into a level position after having a slight arch due to tension. A non-pre-stressed member will settle with the top in compression and the bottom in tension causing concrete to crack.

4.

What are the commonly used types of precast pre-stressed floor and roof slabs?

Double tee, single tee, tongue-and-groove plank, hollow core slab, channel, and flat solid slab.

5.

Which type of precast pre-tensioned slabs span the greatest distances? Double tee pre-cast concrete slabs span the longest distances.

6.

What is the main value in pre-stressing pre-cast concrete columns? This reduces stress on the column during transportation and lifting into place.

7.

What is the difference between post-tensioning and pre-tensioning? Post-tensioning stress is placed on the pre-cast unit after it has been cast and hardened. Pretensioned units have the reinforcing placed under stress in the form before the concrete is poured.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 10-2 and 10-3

      

Describe the various materials used to produce mortar Classify the ingredients used to manufacture masonry cements Identify and cite the uses of the types of standard mortars Explain the desirable properties of plastic mortar Discuss the properties of quality hardened mortar Name the types of frequently used mortar tests Specify how to cure masonry mortar laid in cold weather

Introduction This chapter discusses mortar, which is the bonding agent used to join masonry units into an integral structure. The chapter explains how mortar is made, including the various methods and mixture involved in the process. The properties of mortar in its various forms are discussed, as well as how to work with mortar on the construction site.

Slides 10-4

Lesson Plan I.

Mortars for Masonry Walls A. The term masonry is used to describe either solid stone or man-made modular units that are formed into building blocks 1. Manufactured from ceramic materials 2. Hardened by heat or chemical reaction B. Masonry units are relatively weak 1. Rely on mortar to join them together into strong structural assemblies

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

Slides 10-5

C. Mortar is the bonding agent used to bind masonry units into an integral structure 1. Also seals the spaces between the units so they are not penetrated by air or moisture 2. Provides a place to secure steel reinforcement, ties, and anchor bolts into walls 3. Allows for adjustment due to the slight variations in size and surface that occur in masonry units

Slides 10-6

D. Historically, mortars were made of mud and clay, the materials that were readily available on a site 1. Later developments utilized a combination of lime and sand that developed strength slowly E. Modern mortar ingredients include Portland cement as the binding agent, hydrated lime to impart workability, and sand and water F. Mortar accounts for around 17 percent to 20 percent of a finished wall surface

Slides 10-7

II.

Mortar Composition A. Composed of: 1. Cementitious materials 2. Clean carefully graded mortar sand 3. Clean water 4. Sometimes a coloring agent or admixture

Slides 10-8

B. Actual composition of mortars varies according to intended use C. Cementitious Materials 1. Made according to ASTM and CSA specifications: a. Masonry cement: ASTM C91, CSA A8 b. Portland cement: ASTM C150, CSA A5 c. Blended hydraulic cement: ASTM C595 or I, CSA A362 d. Hydrated lime for masonry: ASTM C207 e. Quicklime for structural uses: ASTM C5

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

Slides 10-9

D. Masonry Cements 1. Hydraulic cements used in mortars 2. Mortar has greater plasticity and water retention than with Portland cement 3. May include: a. Portland cement, slag cement, blast-furnace slag cement, Portlandpozzolan cement, natural cement, hydraulic lime, chalk, clay, talc, calcareous shell, or limestone

Slides 10-10 and 10-11

E. Other Mortar Ingredients 1. Lime a. Stabilizes mortar volume 2. Water a. Clean, acid free, alkalies, organic materials 3. Admixtures a. Alters properties of a mortar F. Table 10.1: Aggregate Gradation for Masonry Mortar

Slides 10-12

III.

Types of Mortar A. M: high-strength mortar with a compressive strength of 2500 psi B. S: medium-high-strength mortar with a compressive strength of 1800 psi C. N: medium-strength mortar with a compressive strength of 750 psi D. O: medium-strength mortar with a compressive strength of 350 psi

Slides 10-13

E. Sources of Mortar 1. Ready-mixed a. Prepared at central batch plant, sent to site

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

2. Dry-batch a. Required ingredients blended, packaged in bags, and delivered to site and stored 3. On-site mixed mortar a. Stored dry ingredients in silo-type mixer; auger mixing device receives and blends

Slides 10-14 and 10-15

IV.

Properties of Plastic Mortar A. Workability 1. Spreads easily, clings to vertical surfaces, extrudes easily from joints but not drop off, and permits easy positioning of masonry units B. Water Retention 1. To resist rapid loss of mixing water to air or an absorptive masonry unit 2. Mortar flow test C. Figure 10.4: Mortar must be workable, adhere to vertical surfaces, and extrude from joints without falling off

Slides 10-16

V.

Properties of Hardened Mortar A. Bond strength 1. Degree of contact between mortar and masonry units and tensile bond strength for resisting forces that tend to pull masonry units apart B. Durability 1. Needed to withstand weathering forces

Slides 10-17

C. Compressive Strength 1. Increases as cement content increases 2. Decreases as air-entrainment, lime, or water content increases D. Low volume changes 1. The actual shrinkage during curing of a mortar joint is negligible

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

Slides 10-18

E. Appearance 1. Uniform color or shade 2. Each batch of mortar should have same proportions of ingredients F. Rate of hardening 1. Speed at which it develops strength to resist an applied load

Slides 10-19 and 10-20

VI.

Colored Mortar A. Architects frequently specify the color of mortar to be used.

1. White mortar: a. White masonry cement or white Portland cement, lime, and sand 2. Colored mortars: a. White masonry cement or white Portland cement and color pigments, colored sand, or colored masonry 3. Final color is result of ingredient blend B. Figure 10.5: A colored mortar being made from white masonry and colored sand

Slides 10-21

VII.

Mortar In Cold Weather A. Should be kept in range of 60°F to 80°F B. Can be laid when air temperature is above 40°F using normal procedures C. When air temperature is below 40°F, mortar water requires heating D. Temperature of the mortar should never exceed 120°F

Slides 10-22

VIII. Surface-Bonding Mortars A. Applied by trowel, brush, or spray B. Provides base to which plaster, stucco, concrete, and cement-based paints adhere C. Application of a cement mortar, reinforced with glass fibers, to both surfaces of concrete block walls laid up without mortar

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

Chapter Hints 1. Ask your students to try making mortar themselves by gathering the materials it is made up of and mixing them. They should take pictures of their progress throughout the mixing and hardening of the mortar. In addition, ask them to record the temperature of their environment in which the mortar was made.

2. Using the mortar they made, ask your students to try to conduct testing on it and record their results to share with the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the basic materials used to produce mortar? Cementitious materials, clean carefully graded mortar sand, clean water and sometimes a coloring agent or admixture.

2.

What is meant by the workability of a mortar? Workability is a term used to describe the condition of a mortar that will spread easily, cling to vertical surfaces, extrude easily from joints but not drop off and permit easy positioning of masonry units.

3.

Why are mortar water-retention properties important? Water retention is important because the mortar remains workable, allowing the mason to continue laying units.

4.

What steps are performed to make a mortar flow test? Place a cone or mortar on a mortar flow table, drop it ½ inch 25 times and measure the expanded diameter of the cone on the table.

5.

What does a flow-after-suction test reveal? Flow after suction tests is used to determine flow after loss of water to an absorbent masonry unit.

6.

What is meant by the tensile bond strength of mortar? Tensile bond strength is the strength available to resist forces that tend to pull the masonry units apart.

7.

What type of masonry surfaces produces the best mortar bond? High textured surfaces are best.

8.

How does the water content in mortar influence bond and compressive strengths? As water content increases, bond strength increases. As water content decreases, mortar compressive strength decreases.

9.

How does air-entrainment influence the compressive strength of mortar?

Compressive strength decreases as air-entrainment, lime or water content increases.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 10: Mortars for Masonry Walls

10. How does the volume change in mortar as it cures affect the mortar joint? Mortars have low volume change; therefore, the actual shrinkage during curing of a mortar joint is miniscule.

11. What things can cause a change in the shade of the mortar joint? Using white masonry cement, white Portland cement, lime and sand. Add color pigments or colored masonry cement.

12. What are the types of mortar used in the United States and Canada? Types of mortar are M, S, N and O. 13. Which type of mortar has the highest strength, and where is it used? Type M mortar is a high-strength mortar with a high compressive strength. Use on masonry below grade and in areas with severe frost action.

14. Where would you use the lowest-strength mortar? Low strength type O mortar is used for general interior purposes including non-load-bearing partitions.

15. Which type of mortar is used for general construction of exposed masonry loadbearing walls? Type N mortar is used for above grade general construction.

16. What materials can be used to produce colored mortar? White masonry cement, white Portland cement, lime, sand, and color pigments.

17. How can you keep prepared mortar from having excessive moisture loss? Cover to prevent loss of water. On large jobs, it is stored in sealed mortar tubs.

18. What should you do with mortar that has become stiff from hydration while waiting for use? Generally, the mortar must be discarded. Water may be added in some cases.

19. What is the lowest temperature in which mortar can be laid before requiring protection from freezing? Air temperature of 40°F (4.5°C).

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 11: Clay Masonry

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 11: Clay Masonry

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 6

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 11: Clay Masonry

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 11-2

Describe how clay bricks are made Identify various clay masonry products and explain how they are typically used Be aware of the grades, types, and classes of clay masonry products Use the properties of clay masonry products to select materials for various applications

   

Introduction This chapter discusses clay bricks and how they are made and used. The grades, types, and classes of clay products are reviewed. The chapter discusses the various characteristics of clay masonry products.

Slides 11-3

Lesson Plan I.

Clay Masonry A. Ancient building material B. Clay brick is made from surface or deep-mined clays C. Properly manufactured brick is fire resistant D. Clay has been termed an abundant resource

Slides 11-4

II.

Clays A. Clay is found in three forms: 1. Surface clay, shale, and fireclay B. Clays contain a variety of materials 1. Predominantly silica and alumina, with smaller amounts of metallic oxides and other ingredients C. Divided into two classes 1. Calcareous and non-calcareous

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 11: Clay Masonry

Slides 11-5 and 11-6

III.

Manufacturing Clay Bricks A. Winning and storage 1. “Winning” describes the mining of clay 2. Clays moved to plant where they are crushed and blended to produce desired chemical composition and physical properties 3. Moved to crushers where stones are removed, then to grinders where it is ground to a fine powder, passed over vibrating screens, and shifted to storage piles B. Forming the bricks 1. Three major methods for forming bricks a. Soft-mud process, stiff-mud process, and dry-press process

Slides 11-7

C. Drying 1. Once formed, bricks are placed in a low-temperature drier kiln for one to two days D. Figure 11.2: The stiff mud process forces clay through a die and produces a column of brick that is cut to size with a wire cutter

Slides 11-8

E. Glazing 1. Some bricks have ceramic glaze applied to one or more surfaces after brick has dried F. Burning and cooling 1. Burning involves raising the temperature of dried bricks to a predetermined level 2. Cooling period is 48 to 72 hours

Slides 11-9

G. Drawing and storage 1. Occurs after cooling stage is complete 2. Bricks are removed from the kiln, sorted, graded, and moved to storage 3. Stacked on wood pallets and wrapped in plastic to keep bricks dry

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 11: Clay Masonry

Slides 11-10 and 11-11

IV.

Clay Masonry Units A. Solid masonry 1. Have cores whose area does not exceed 25 percent of gross cross-sectional area B. Modular bricks 1. Actual size plus a mortar joint can be assembled on a standard unit or module

Slides 11-12

2. Brick pavers a. Solid clay units come in two thicknesses: b. 1½ in., used for pedestrian situations c. 21/4 in. for heavier traffic/load conditions 3. Fire Brick a. Made from special clays containing alumina and able to withstand high temperatures b. Used in fireplaces, chimneys and kiln construction

Slides 11-13

C. Thin Brick a. Lightweight masonry veneer used on the exterior walls of buildings to give the appearance of traditional brick with lower weights D. Hollow clay masonry 1. Net cross-sectional area in plane of bearing surface not less than 60 percent of gross cross-sectional area of that face

Slides 11-14

V.

Material Specifications for Clay Masonry A. Weathering index 1. Reflects the ability of clay masonry units to resist the effects of weathering

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 11: Clay Masonry

Slides 11-15

B. Grades, types, and classes 1. Building (common), facing, and hollow brick are available in a variety of grades based on the degree of weathering and appearance

Slides 11-16 and 11-18

VI.

Properties of Clay Brick and Tile A. Compressive strength 1. Depends on the clay, how the units are made, and the temperature and duration of firing B. Durability 1. Ability of a clay masonry unit to resist damage from freeze and thaw cycles and moisture subjection C. Absorption 1. Clay units absorb certain amount of water 2. Property affects bond strength of mortar to brick D. Color 1. Depends on the clays used, burning temperature, and the method of controlling color during the burn 2. Burned clays vary widely in color, from creams and grays through reds and purples

Slides 11-17

E. Figure 11.10: Clay masonry units are available in a wide variety of color and textures F. Texture 1. Produced by surface of die or mold used to form unit, attachments that cut, scratch, roll, or alter surface as clay unit leaves die G. Heat transmission 1. Ability of clay brick walls to facilitate or resist transmission of heat directly influences surface temperature of interior walls and rooms H. Fire resistance 1. Indication of material’s ability to prevent materials behind it from igniting

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 11: Clay Masonry

Slides 11-19

VII.

Other Clay Tile Products A. Clay tile is a vitrified clay product, such as clay pipe, used for drainage and sewer systems B. Roof tile is burnt clay used for finished roofing 1. Architectural Terra-Cotta 2. Ceramic Veneer

Chapter Hints 1. Have the students try to perform one of the discussed clay masonry tests on their own. This will be a rough test, but will nonetheless give the students an idea of what these tests are like.

2. Have the students visit a local store or farm in the area that sells different types of clay masonry products and report back about the products and the prices of each.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the forms in which clay is found? Surface clays, shales, fireclays, calcareous clays, and non-calcareous clays.

2.

How do fireclays differ from surface clays? Fireclays are found deeper in the earth than surface clays and have more uniform physical and chemical properties.

3.

How do the colors of calcareous and non-calcareous clays differ? Calcareous clays have a yellow color when burned, while non-calcareous clays take on a buff, red, or salmon color when burned.

4.

What methods are used to form bricks? Stiff-mud process, soft-mud process, and drypress process.

5.

What are some of the common surface textures used on face bricks? Glaze, antique smooth, bark, matt, sandmold, smooth, and water-struck.

6.

Why are the temperature and humidity carefully controlled when drying bricks?

Control shrinkage, color, cracks, and checking.

7.

How does the burning temperature influence the size and color of the bricks? The higher the burning temperature, the smaller the resulting brick, and the darker the color.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 11: Clay Masonry

8.

What are the classifications of structural clay masonry units? Brick, hollow brick, and structural clay tile.

9.

How can you identify solid masonry clay units? Solid units do not have core holes taking more than 25 percent of the unit.

10. What is the difference between modular and actual brick dimensions? The actual size is that of the manufactured product. The modular size is the size stated when specifying the brick, including the mortar joint.

11. What is the allowable hollow cored area for a hollow brick? Cored area from 25 to 40 percent.

12. What two factors are considered when establishing the weathering index? Freeze cycle days and the annual rainfall.

13. What is the range of compressive strength for common bricks? Compressive strength of common bricks range from 1500 psi (10.35 MN/m2) to more than 5000 psi (34.50 MN/m2).

14. What unit of suction provides conditions for the best mortar bond? Suction rate is the rate at which a unit absorbs moisture. Suction rate given in ounces of water per minute. It should not exceed 0.7 (20 grams) of water per minute.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 12: Concrete Masonry

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 12: Concrete Masonry

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 4 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 4

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 12: Concrete Masonry

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 12-2

Describe how concrete masonry units are manufactured Use information about the physical properties of concrete masonry units when making material selections Recognize the many types of concrete masonry units and be able to choose those suitable for various applications

  

Introduction This chapter discusses concrete masonry, which is one of the most widely used modern construction materials, finding use in both structural and nonstructural applications. The properties and uses of concrete are also discussed.

Slides 12-3

Lesson Plan I.

Manufacture of Concrete Masonry Units A. Made of a relatively dry mix of Portland cement, aggregates, water, and, in some cases, admixtures B. Units have greater stabilization against volume changes caused by moisture than the low-pressure units

Slides 12-4

II.

Physical Properties of Concrete Masonry Units A. Properties of the units are determined by cement paste and aggregates B. Differences between concrete and concrete masonry units are caused by 1. Different mix compositions 2. Methods of consolidation 3. Curing processes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 12: Concrete Masonry

Slides 12-5 and 12-6

C. Important properties to consider when specifying concrete masonry units 1. Weight 2. Compressive strength 3. Water absorption 4. Coefficient of thermal expansion D. Figure 12.2: The compressive strength of a wall made from concrete masonry units depends on the type of mortar and the strength of the concrete masonry units

Slides 12-7

III.

Types of Concrete Masonry Units A. Modular sizes 1. Concrete masonry units are made in modular sizes and are specified by their nominal or modular size B. Concrete brick 1. Concrete bricks are made either solid or with a depressed area called a frog

Slides 12-8

C. Slump block 1. Removed from the mold before it has set completely, causing a slightly slumped appearance D. Concrete block 1. Variety available, many for special uses 2. Produced in three major groups: a. Solid load bearing, hollow load bearing, and non-load-bearing units

Slides 12-9 through 12-11

E. Concrete retaining walls 1. Available from rectangular units for small residential walls to large, multipiece units suitable for high walls, large retaining walls F. Autoclaved aerated concrete block 1. Portland cement mixed with lime, silica sand, or recycled fly ash, water, and aluminum powder G. Figure 12.7: Split face block adds shadow and texture to a wall H. Figure 12.9: Autoclaved aerated concrete block provide excellent thermal, fire, and acoustical-resistance properties

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 12: Concrete Masonry

Slides 12-12 and 12-13

IV.

Material Specifications A. Grades 1. Load-bearing concrete masonry units are available in two grades a. S and N B. Types 1. Two types of concrete masonry units are specified by: a. ASTM C90, Type I and Type II C. Weights 1. ASTM C90 establishes three weights: a. Normal, medium, and lightweight

Chapter Hints 1. Instruct the students to travel around their city and find various examples of masonry work. Have the students take pictures and identify the examples.

2. Ask students to visit a local construction company and determine what type of masonry the company usually selects and why. Have the students report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the different ways concrete masonry units are cured? CMUs are cured either in a low-pressure steam kiln or an autoclave that uses high-pressure steam.

2.

What advantages are there to autoclaved concrete masonry units? They can be used twenty-four hours after they have been removed from the autoclave. They also have greater stabilization against volume changes caused by moisture.

3.

What two things influence the properties of concrete masonry units? Properties influenced by the cement paste and aggregates.

4.

How does the tensile strength and flexural strength of concrete masonry units compare with the compressive strength? Tensile strength is 5 to 10 percent of the compressive strength. Flexural strength is about 15 to 20 percent of the compressive strength.

5.

What affects the water absorption of concrete masonry units? Water absorption varies with the density of the concrete masonry unit. Units made with dense aggregate have lower absorption rates.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 12: Concrete Masonry

6.

How is the insulation value of concrete masonry units improved? The insulation value of concrete masonry units is improved by using a lightweight aggregate.

7.

What are the three major classifications of concrete masonry units? Concrete brick, slump brick and block and concrete block.

8.

What is the design module used when sizing concrete masonry units? The standard module for concrete masonry units is 4 in. or 100 mm.

9.

What are the grades established for load-bearing concrete masonry units? Grades for load-bearing concrete masonry units are S and N.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 13: Stone

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 13: Stone

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 4 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 5

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 13: Stone

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 13-2

    

Discuss the characteristics and uses of various stones used in building construction Identify the various types of commercially available stone Understand the processes used to quarry and work stone to make it useful for building construction Select stone for a project based on the requirements of the job Define manufactured stone

Introduction This chapter discusses stone and its characteristics and uses. The chapter introduces the types of stone, how the stones are used for building, and how to select the type of stone that should be used for a desired project.

Slides 13-3

Lesson Plan I.

Basic Classifications of Rock A. Igneous rock 1. Formed, usually deep in the earth, when a molten material changes from a liquid to a solid state a. Granite b. Serpentine c. Basalt

Slides 13-4

B. Sedimentary rock 1. Formed of materials (sediments) deposited on the bottom of bodies of water or on the surface of the earth a. Sandstone b. Shale c. Limestone

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 13: Stone

Slides 13-5 and 13-6

C. Metamorphic rock 1. Igneous or sedimentary rock altered in appearance, density, crystalline structure by high temperature, and high pressure a. Marble b. Quartzite c. Shist d. Slate 2. Figure 13.1: Stone is used as a finish material on the interior and exterior of buildings

Slides 13-7 and 13-8

II.

Types and Uses of Stone A. Rubble stone 1. Irregular fragments from a quarry that have one good face B. Rough stone 1. Sometimes called fieldstone 2. Occurs in naturally found rock masses C. Monumental stone

Slides 13-9 and 13-10

D. Figure 13.5: Dimensional sandstone used in a random ashlar pattern E. Figure 13.6: Flagstone is thin, flat stone that can be laid over a concrete, sand or loam base F. Dimension stone 1. Also referred to as cut stone 2. Cut to size at a stone mill and shipped to site G. Flagstone 1. Thin, flat stone from ½ to 4 in. (1/2 to 100 mm) in thickness 2. Figure 13.5: Dimensional sand stone used in a random ashlar pattern

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 13: Stone

Slides 13-11

H. Broken and crushed stone 1. Irregular shapes and crushed pieces of one type of stone graded for hardness and size I. Stone powder and dust 1. Used as fill-in paints and asphalt paving surfaces

Slides 13-12

III.

Quarrying and Producing Building Stones A. Quarry 1. An excavation from which stone used for building is taken via blasting or cutting B. Most stone used in building construction is: 1. Dimensional 2. Produced by cutting large blocks from a quarry, often with a channeling machine 3. Water-jet cutting technology uses high pressure water jets to execute complex shapes

Slides 13-13

IV.

Choosing Stone A. Architect must consider a variety of parameters 1. Cost, strength, durability, hardness, grain and color, texture, and porosity B. Ease with which a stone can be quarried and shaped influences economic considerations C. Stone is ordered by the percentage of colors desired to make the blend

Slides 13-14

V.

Manufactured Stone A. Architectural building unit manufactured to simulate natural cut stone B. Used in masonry applications C. Also referred to as cultured stone D. Cast of Portland cement mixed with high-quality fine aggregates and mineral coloring pigments E. Produced with low water-to-cement ration mixture F. Can be reinforced to increase structural integrity

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 13: Stone

Chapter Hints 1. Instruct the students to travel around their city and find various examples of stone work. Have the students take pictures and identify the examples.

2. Ask students to visit a local construction company and determine what type of stone the company usually selects and why. Have the students report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What is the main use for stone in buildings built today? Stone is mainly used as a veneer or wall facing material.

2.

What are the three basic categories of rock? Basic categories of rock are igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic.

3.

How is igneous rock formed? Igneous formed by a change of molten material deep in the earth to a solid.

4.

What colors of granite rock are commonly available? Colors of granite rock are black, gray, red, pink, brown, buff, and green.

5.

For what construction applications is serpentine rock used? Serpentine rock used on building exteriors.

6.

How is sedimentary rock formed? Sedimentary rock is formed from sediments deposited on the bottom of water and on the surface of the earth.

7.

Shale that has high limestone content is used to make what masonry materials? Shale with a high content of limestone is ground up and used to make cement, bricks, and tiles.

8.

What are the three types of limestone? The three types of limestone are oolitic, dolomitic, and crystalline.

9.

What are the main differences in the three types of limestone? Oolitic is calcitecemented calcareous stone formed from shells. Dolomitic is mainly magnesium carbonate. Crystalline is mainly calcium carbonate crystals.

10. What are the major types of metamorphic rock used in building construction? The major types of metamorphic rock used in construction are marble, quartzite, schist, and slate.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 13: Stone

11. In what colors is marble found? Marble is found in colors varying from white through gray and black, as well as other color variations including red, violet, pink, yellow, and green.

12. Where is marble commonly used in building construction? Marble is used for wall panels and column facings, window stools, windowsills, and floors. Some types of marble can be used on building exteriors and others are limited to interior applications.

13. In what textures is slate produced? Slate is produced in three textures: sand-rubbed, honed, and natural cleft.

14. What type of machine is used in a quarry to cut rock into manageable sizes? A channeling machine is often used to cut large blocks from a quarry.

15. What factors must a designer consider when choosing stone for a building? Factors to consider when choosing stone for a building are cost, strength, durability, hardness, grain and color, and texture and porosity.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 14-2 and 14-3

       

Name the various brick positions and bond patterns used in masonry wall construction Specify how openings are spanned in masonry walls Understand the function of expansion and control joints in masonry construction Recognize the types of brick and concrete masonry wall constructions and the properties associated with them Explain the advantages and disadvantages of the various mortar joints Describe the process used to lay brick and concrete masonry units Identify different styles of stone masonry construction Recognize proper construction of structural clay-tile walls

Introduction This chapter discusses masonry construction. The chapter explains the different types of masonry bearing walls for particular circumstances, discusses the types of bricks and concrete used in masonry construction, and explains mortar joints. It describes the bricklaying and stone laying process, and the quality of different types of stone construction. The chapter also gives an overview of structural clay-tile walls.

Slides 14-4 and 14-5

Lesson Plan I.

Masonry Construction A. Masonry construction encompasses the use of clay brick, concrete masonry units, stone, or structural tile B. Stonemasonry is one of the oldest building professions in history C. Masons are trained either by an apprenticeship program, union program, or by another masonry contractor D. Because of masonry’s high thermal mass, the material is frequently used in passive solar designs that capture and use solar radiation to help heat a building 1. Masonry’s high density and mass allow it to absorb heat slowly and retain it longer 2. Masonry floors and walls store solar heat during the day, and radiate it back into the interior when temperatures drop at night

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

Slides 14-6

II.

Masonry Walls A. Masonry Unit Positions 1. The stretcher, most common position 2. Header 3. Wythe, continuous vertical wall one unit in thickness 4. Rowlock 5. Soldier 6. Sailor 7. Shiner B. Figure 14.2: Terms used to define brick positions in a wall

Slides 14-7

III.

Masonry Bond Patterns A. Solid masonry walls without steel reinforcing have been used for thousands of years 1. Have limited applications in modern wall construction B. A bond pattern describes the arrangement of masonry units in a masonry wall

Slides 14-8

IV.

Laying Brick Masonry Walls A. Masonry walls are designed to avoid the need for cutting bricks 1. Dimensions for masonry structures are based on the actual dimensions of the units and mortar joints to be used 2. The actual size of the unit plus the thickness of a mortar joint (3/8 to 1/2 in.) are calculated to arrive at building dimensions that require no cutting of units

Slides 14-9

B. Must be placed on properly engineered foundation systems C. Story pole helps to hold a taught mason’s line 1. Closure brick is last laid in the center 2. Must be exact to ensure closure brick can be laid without cutting

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

Slides 14-10 and 14-11

V.

Mortar Joints A. After mortar has set sufficiently, tools are used to profile the joints B. Finished by either troweling or tooling C. Different joints provide different water tightness

Slides 14-12

VI.

Laying Concrete Masonry Walls A. This procedure is very similar to that described for clay masonry units 1. Blocks without mortar are spaced along a footing to establish spacing and determine if blocks need cutting a. The mason begins by laying a full mortar bed on the footing and building up each corner to several courses high b. Courses above it are usually laid without placing mortar on the webs

Slides 14-13

VII.

Openings in Masonry Walls A. Openings in masonry walls must be bridged over by some method to support the masonry above B. Beams, lintels and arches are used to span openings in masonry walls C. These elements work to transfer the loads above the opening to the wall and foundations below

Slides 14-14

VIII. Masonry Arches A. Curved structural construction has been used to span openings in masonry for centuries 1. Arches are constructed with temporary bracing called centering that supports the wet mortar until it has hardened a. Special wedge-shaped units called voussoirs are manufactured to specifically to create the curvature in arches

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

Slides 14-15

IX.

Control and Expansion Joints A. Movements can occur that produce stresses that may cause cracking 1. Expansion Joints are intentionally created slots that close to accommodate expansion of masonry materials 2. Control joints are intentionally created cracks that open to accommodate shrinkage of masonry

Slides 14-16 and 14-17

X.

Types of Masonry Walls A. Reinforced Masonry B. Masonry Composite Walls C. Masonry Cavity Walls 1. Brick/Concrete Masonry Cavity Walls 2. Brick Veneer/Reinforced Concrete 3. Brick Veneer/Steel Stud D. Insulated Masonry Cavity Walls E. Masonry Veneer F. Figure 14.22: Weep holes connected to flashing at the bottom of cavity walls allow moisture to escape from the cavity

Slides 14-18

XI.

Brick Masonry Columns A. Typically designed for applications that do not require brick cutting 1. The interior core of the column has reinforcing bars tied to the foundation, and is filled with concrete 2. Pilasters are built in the same manner as columns but become an integral part of a load-bearing wall Slides 14-19 through 14-21

XII.

Masonry Construction Details A. Brick and block bearing wall can support roof and floor structures of various types B. Figure 14.27: Common roof details for masonry bearing wall construction C. Figure 14.28: Examples of masonry roof and parapet details

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

Slides 14-22 and 14-23

XIII. Stone Masonry Construction A. Rubble masonry 1. Refers to stone found naturally in irregular shapes and sizes B. Ashlar masonry 1. Uses units cut into squared shapes C. Stone may be laid in a random or coursed pattern D. Figure 14.29: Patterns for laying ashlar and rubble stone

Slides 14-24

XIV. Structural Clay Tile Construction A. May be load-bearing or non-load-bearing B. Load-bearing units 1. May form an unfaced wall 2. May be used as backup wall, faced with another material C. Non-load-bearing tile walls 1. Used as interior partitions, fireproofing barriers, and masonry screens

Slides 14-25

XV.

Laying Structural Clay Tile Walls A. Structural clay tile walls 1. Designed to use standard-size units that avoid custom cutting B. High-strength mortars are used C. Corners can be built in several ways

Slides 14-26

XVI. Estimating Masonry Materials A. Calculate the cost of construction and determine the amount of materials needed to perform a project.

1. Methods to estimate material quantities a. Hand calculations b. Computer programs B. To determine mortar quantities, rough estimate that eight bags of masonry cement will lay around 1000 modular brick

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to visit a store in the area that sells bricks and masonry materials. They should price the materials based on type of product and dimensions and report their findings to the class for comparison.

2. Ask students to try to find examples of masonry arches in their city and take pictures of what they find to share with the class.

3. Invite students to find a house of someone they know that is made of brick.

Ask them to look around the outside of the house to find any presence of weep holes and take pictures of these areas.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the commonly used types of masonry load-bearing walls? Reinforced, or unreinforced, solid, and cavity.

2.

Why are control and expansion joints required in masonry walls? Expansion joints provide a space between parts of construction.

3.

Why are weep holes used? To allow water that penetrated the wall to drain out.

4.

What can be done to reduce moisture penetration through masonry walls? Install adequate flashing, have firm secure mortar joints.

5.

What types of metal flashing can be used with masonry wall construction? Copper or plastic sheet material is used for flashing.

6.

How are masonry units supported over openings in a wall? Openings are spanned with lintels.

7.

How can the heat and cold conduction of masonry walls be reduced? Place rigid foam insulation sheets in wall cavity. Fill cores of concrete block walls with granular insulation or foam.

8.

What are the commonly used brick patterns used in wall construction? Running, Roman, common bond, English bond, Flemish bond, and stock bond.

9.

What are the advantages and disadvantages of the various types of mortar joints?

Weathered, concave and V-joints resist leakage best. Ruled, flush, and flush and rodded joints are not as weathertight.

10. What size mortar joint is commonly used? Typical mortar joints are 3/8 to ½ in. (9.5 to 13 mm).

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 14: Masonry Construction

11. What is the difference between rubble and ashlar stone used for wall construction?

Rubble is stone found naturally. Ashlar stone is cut into squared shapes.

12. What types of structural clay tile are used for wall construction? Utility tile, glazed tile, lintel tile, bull-nose tile, bull-nose sill, and lintel tile.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 8

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 15-2

Explain the processes for mining and processing iron ore and for producing pig iron and steel Develop knowledge of the properties of ferrous metals to consider when making material selection decisions Be familiar with the various steel identification systems and the Unified Numbering System for Metals and Alloys

  

Introduction This chapter discusses ferrous metals, which are those metals in which the chief ingredient is the chemical element iron (ferrum). The chapter discusses why ferrous metals are a major construction material that architects, engineers, and contractors should be familiar with. The chapter reviews their various types, their properties, and the proper applications for each.

Slides 15-3

Lesson Plan I.

Ferrous Metals A. Steel has had tremendous influence on the evolution of construction 1. The stiffness of steel enables designers to achieve much greater spans and heights than is possible in either wood or masonry construction 2. In engineering terms, there are is almost no limit to what steel can achieve

Slides 15-4

II.

Iron A. Found in large quantities in earth’s crust B. Good magnetic properties C. Oxidizes (rusts) easily D. Does not resist attack by acids and some chemicals E. Alloying elements added to improve its characteristics

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

Slides 15-5

F. Mining And Processing 1. Iron Ore 2. Found in rock, gravel, sand, clay, mud 3. Mined in open pit and underground mines 4. If iron content less than 50 percent a. Too costly to ship any distance 5. Ores that have very high iron content a. Made into pellets and briquettes

Slides 15-6 and 15-7

G. Producing Iron from Iron Ore 1. Converted into pig iron in blast furnace a. Blast furnace b. Separates the iron from the waste materials and sinters the ore and flue dust 2. Smelting a. Ore is heated, permitting the iron to be separated from impurities 3. Reduction a. Separates the iron from oxygen with which it is chemically mixed 4. Figure 15.1: A large blast furnace is capable of producing 8000 tons of molten iron per day

Slides 15-8

H. Cast Irons 1. Wrought iron a. Contain almost no carbon b. Soft, tough, and ductile 2. Cast irons a. Carbon contents above 1.7 percent b. White, gray, and malleable types c. Malleability: property of metal allowing it to be formed mechanically

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

Slides 15-9

III.

Steelmaking A. Production starts with: 1. Controlling impurities in pig iron 2. Adding alloying elements as needed to produce required properties 3. Lowering pig iron’s carbon content 4. Combining molten pig iron, scrap metal, and fluxes in a steelmaking furnace

Slides 15-10

B. Basic Oxygen Process 1. Basic oxygen furnace a. Large pear-shaped vessel lined with refractory material b. Melts the charge c. Operates behind huge pollution control doors that remain closed during the steelmaking process

Slides 15-11 and 15-12

C. Electric Steelmaking Processes 1. The two types of electric furnaces: a. Electric arc furnace b. Produce steels in large quantities 2. Induction furnace a. Produce smaller quantities of special grades of steel that require expensive alloying elements 3. Casting the steel a. Cast into ingot molds or run through strand-casting machine 4. Figure 15.7: These steel strands are produced by a continuous-casting machine. The slabs are cut into predetermined lengths by an automatic torch machine Slides 15-13

IV.

Manufacturing Steel Products A. Manufactured by rolling, extruding, cold-drawing, forging, and casting B. Items produced by casting are referred to as cast steel products C. All others are called wrought products D. Most frequently used products produced by hot-rolling and cold finishing

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

Slides 15-14

V.

Steel Recycling A. One of the most widely recycled materials in the world B. Steel industry has been engaged in recycling for more than a century 1. Economically advantageous 2. Less costly to recycle steel than to mine iron ore and process it to form new steel C. Design for Disassembly (DFD) emerging as a subfield of sustainable construction 1. Steel frame buildings excellent candidates

Slides 15-15

VI.

Steel Identification Systems A. Administered by societies, trade associations, individual users, producers of metals and alloys 1. American Society for Testing and Materials 2. Aerospace Materials Specifications 3. American Welding Society 4. American Iron and Steel Institute 5. Society of Automotive Engineers

Slides 15-16

B. The Unified Numbering System for Metals and Alloys 1. Provides uniformity required for indexing, record keeping, data storage and retrieval, and metal cross-referencing 2. Eighteen series of designations for metals and alloys a. Seventeen are active b. Each designation has single-letter prefix followed by five digits

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

Slides 15-17

VII.

Steel and Steel Alloys A. Plain carbon steels 1. Plain carbon steels have iron as the major element (more than 95 percent) 2. Contain impurities: e.g., sulfur, nitrogen, and oxygen 3. Properties are varied by: a. Elements that are added to alter their chemical composition b. Type of mechanical and heat treatment used in producing the steel

Slides 15-18

B. Alloy steels 1. Contain one or more alloying elements other than carbon that have been added in amounts exceeding a specified minimum to produce properties not available in carbon steels 2. Elements give particular physical, mechanical, and chemical properties to the steel

Slides 15-19

C. Structural steel classifications: 1. Carbon steel 2. Heat-treated construction alloy steel 3. Heat-treated high-strength carbon steel 4. High-strength low-alloy steel

Slides 15-20

D. Stainless steels 1. Have outstanding corrosion and oxidation resistance at a wide range of temperatures E. Heat-resisting steels 1. Maintain their basic mechanical and physical properties when subjected to high temperatures

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

Slides 15-21

F. Classifying stainless and heat-resisting steels 1. Classified into three major groups based on their chemical composition and their reaction when heat treated a. Ferritic steels b. Martensitic steels c. Austenitic steels

Slides 15-22

G. Stainless and heat-resisting steel designation 1. AISI based on a system from 200 to 500 a. Type 430: most common ferritic stainless steel b. Column covers, trim, grills, and gutters c. Types 301, 302, and 304: most common austenitic stainless steels d. Storefronts, doors, windows, and railings

Slides 15-23 and 15-24

VIII. Steel Products A. Structural steel products 1. Rolled structural steel shapes are made up of standard shapes manufactured in a wide variety of sizes and cross sections 2. Three most commonly used shapes a. W (wide flange) b. S (American Standard I-beam) c. C (American Standard channel) 3. Figure 15.16: Structural steel H beams are available in a wide range of sizes.

Slides 15-25

B. Sheet steel products 1. Many products are made by rolling them to shape from flat steel sheets 2. Common products: roofing, siding, decking, and light-gauge steel framing systems 3. Thickness of steel sheets is given by gauge numbers

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

Slides 15-26 and 15-27

C. Other products 1. Welded wire fabric a. Used to reinforce concrete slabs 2. Reinforcing bars a. Placed in concrete members to improve the tensile strength of concrete 3. Many fasteners used in construction a. Including bolts, nails, rivets, and screws b. Figure 15.25: Commonly used nails

Slides 15-28

IX.

Testing Metals A. Engineers and architects must know the capabilities of potentially usable metals B. Determined by standardized testing that follows the procedures of the ASTM C. Frequently used tests include: 1. Analyses of hardness 2. Tensile strength 3. Fatigue

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to visit a store in their area that sells ferrous metals and price the materials based on type of product and dimensions. They should report their findings to the class for comparison.

2. Have students go around the city in groups and try to find examples of ferrous metals used in construction sites. They should bring pictures of what they find to share with the class.

3. Ask students to look in their house or apartment to find examples of ferrous metals. Have them share pictures of anything they found in class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What is the key element that influences the properties of iron? The chief ingredient in ferrous metals is the chemical element iron (ferrum).

2.

What process is used to remove unwanted elements from the freshly mined iron ore?

Smelting separates impurities.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

3.

What fuels and fluxes are commonly used in a blast furnace? Coal, oil, and natural gas.

4.

What uses are made of the slag removed from the blast furnace? Slag is used as an aggregate for concrete, loose fill, and road surfacing.

5.

What are the commonly produced cast irons? Wrought iron and cast iron.

6.

What are the main properties of white cast iron? White cast iron has a low silicon content and about 1.7 percent carbon.

7.

Why is malleable cast iron less brittle than white cast iron? Malleable cast irons are less brittle than white cast irons because they have a lower carbon content.

8.

How does the alloying element nickel affect the properties of steel? Nickel increases the elastic limit and internal strength.

9.

If steel has a carbon content less than 0.90 percent, how does this affect the properties of the steel? Increases ductility, hardness, resists abrasion better.

10. How do the alloying elements copper and cobalt influence the properties of steel?

Copper alloying elements increase resistance to atmospheric corrosion and increases yield strength. Cobalt hardens the ferrite and resists softening at high temperature.

11. What are the three basic steelmaking processes? Basic oxygen process and the electric steelmaking process.

12. How does carbon steel differ from alloy steel? Carbon steels have iron as the major element, usually more than 95 percent. Alloy steels contain one or more alloying elements other than carbon.

13. What are the two outstanding properties of stainless steel? Stainless steels resist corrosion and oxidation and maintain their basic mechanical and physical properties when subjected to high heat.

14. Explain the purpose of each part of the AISI steel designation code. AISI steel designation code. The first two digits indicate the type of steel (carbon or alloy) and the last two digits indicate the carbon content.

15. Why does stainless steel resist corrosion? Stainless steels resist corrosion because they have a chromium alloying element.

16. What are the three groups of stainless and heat-resisting steels? Ferritic steels, martensitic steels, and austenitic steels.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 15: Ferrous Metals

17. Identify the following structural steel shapes: W, S, HP, ST, HSS, C, M. W—wide flange beam, S—standard beam, HP—bearing pile, ST—structural tee, HSS—hollow structural section, C—channel, M—miscellaneous beam.

18. How is welded wire fabric used in building construction? Welded wire fabric is used to reinforce concrete slabs.

19. What tests are used on metal to determine its hardness? Metal tests include hardness testing, tensile testing, and fatigue testing 20. What does a tensile test show? Tensile tests show the mechanical properties of a metal when forces tend to pull it apart.

21. What does a fatigue test show? Fatigue tests show the stress level a metal can withstand without failure when subjected to repeated alternating stresses such as repeated bending.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 14 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 15

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 16-2

Select nonferrous metals for a wide range of applications Know the properties of nonferrous metals and how these will influence a material’s performance Understand the effects of galvanic corrosion and how to design to eliminate it

  

Introduction This chapter discusses nonferrous metals, which are metals containing little or no iron. The chapter discusses the role nonferrous metals play in construction. It then reviews their various types, their properties, and the proper applications for nonferrous metals.

Slides 16-3

Lesson Plan I.

Nonferrous Metals A. Metals containing little or no iron B. Non-ferrous metals commonly found in construction include aluminum, copper, lead, tin, and zinc.

1. Nickel is used mainly as an alloying element.

2. Titanium, once used in aircraft, aerospace, and military applications, is now employed as a building cladding material.

Slides 16-4

II.

Aluminum A. Basic characteristics 1. Versatile, lightweight material 2. Good conductor of electricity

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

B. Mining aluminum 1. Found in rocks and clays 2. Concentrations of aluminum oxide content must be about 45 percent to be viable for extraction

Slides 16-5

C. Refining Bauxite Ore 1. Aluminum refined using two-step process a. Bayer process 2. Produces a very pure alumina, an oxide of aluminum in crystal form a. HallHéroult process 3. Reduces alumina to a metallic aluminum, about 99 percent pure 4. Figure 16.1: The first step in producing aluminum, the Bayer process, separates the alumina from the bauxite ore in large rotary kilns

Slides 16-6 and 16-7

D. Aluminum Alloys 1. Two classifications: a. Wrought alloys 2. Mechanically worked by processes, such as forging, drawing, extruding, or rolling forming sheet material a. Cast alloys 3. Used to produce molten metal in a finished shape a. Classified by UNS designations

Slides 16-8

E. Temper Designations 1. Temper a. Degree of hardness and strength imparted to a metal by a process b. Some temper specifications may apply to cast or wrought only 2. Tempering a. Process rendering proper degree of hardness and elasticity to metal for intended use b. Designated by letters and numbers after alloy number and separated by dash

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-9

i. ii. iii. iv. v.

F (as fabricated) Q (annealed) H (strain hardened) W (solution heat-treated) T (thermally treated)

Slides 16-10

F. Aluminum Castings and Finishes 1. Aluminum cast in permanent molds is stronger than sand-cast products 2. Figure 16.3: Molten aluminum is cast in steel molds that can be reused repeatedly 3. Heat-treated alloys typically stronger with greater ductility than non-heattreatable alloys 4. Three categories of aluminum finishes: a. Mechanical, chemical, and coatings

Slides 16-11

G. Natural Finishes 1. Natural finishes: a. Uncontrolled i. Imparted to wrought and cast products by the surface conditions of the rollers, molds, or extruding dies b. Controlled finishes ii. Result from varying the smoothness of rollers or mold surfaces

Slides 16-12

H. Mechanical Finishes 1. Used to alter surface appearances of aluminum products a. May be buffed with a coarse abrasive b. May receive a high luster polish via a fine abrasive 2. Usually produced before surfaces are cleaned to receive other finishing processes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-13

I.

Chemical Finishes 1. Produced by the reaction of an aluminum surface to various chemicals a. Conversion coatings i. Prepare surfaces for the bonding of paints, organic coatings, and laminates b. Zincating ii. Aluminum plating process that produces thin zinc coating

Slides 16-14

J.

Anodic Finishes 1. Anodized electrolytic oxide layer a. Very important and widely used finish b. Can be used as finishes on surfaces to be painted c. Classified into four groups:

Slides 16-15

i. ii. iii. iv.

General Protective and Decorative Architectural I Architectural II

Slides 16-16

K. Coatings 1. Painted to provide additional protection or for surface decoration a. Porcelain enamel coatings b. Electroplated with chromium, copper, and other materials c. Laminated finishes d. Electro-polished finishes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-17

L. Protecting a Finished Aluminum Product 1. Protection from damage during delivery, storage, and installation a. Paper or plastic sheet material bonded to the product with easily removable adhesive b. Masking tape c. Coat of clear lacquer d. Automobile wax or a polish M. Routine Maintenance of Aluminum Surfaces 1. Unless surface is stained, abrasive cleaners should be avoided 2. Simplest cleaner is clear water 3. If discoloration needs removing, mild polish is acceptable 4. Liquid non-scratch cleaners are safe

Slides 16-18

N. Joining Aluminum Members 1. Joined by any standard fastening techniques 2. Can be attached by welding, brazing, and soldering 3. Variety of adhesives can be used a. Depends on materials and design considerations

Slides 16-19

O. Aluminum Products 1. Production of metal doors and windows 2. Residential and commercial siding and roofing 3. Panels for siding and roofing commercial buildings 4. Large-diameter electrical conductors 5. Sheet metal applications

Slides 16-20

IV.

Copper A. Properties of copper: 1. Nonmagnetic reddish-brown metal 2. Ductile, malleable, and easily worked 3. One of the first metals humans used

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

4. Excellent electrical and thermal conductivity 5. Resistance to corrosion and wear 6. High temperature performance

Slides 16-21 through 16-23

B. Most copper mined in the United States is low-grade sulfate ore C. Converting process like Bessemer process used to produce steel D. Purest copper produced by electrolytic processes E. Fire-refined or purified and formed into sheets, bars, tubes, and wires F. Figure 16.10: A variety of copper fittings are produced from copper alloys G. Classifying Copper and Copper Alloys 1. Classified by UNS designations a. Numerical designations indicate the type of copper or copper alloy and the alloying elements and impurities

Slides 16-24

2. Trade names a. Don’t indicate composition of material b. May be used to describe similar materials with slightly different element amounts

Slides 16-25

H. Copper Alloys 1. Major copper alloying elements a. High copper alloys b. Brasses c. Bronzes d. Miscellaneous copperzinc alloys e. Coppernickel alloys f. Coppernickelzinc alloys

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-26

I.

J.

Copper Alloy Finishes 1. Available with a variety of finishes 2. Supplied by: a. Manufacturing mill b. Copper fabricating company 3. Three classifications a. Mechanical b. Chemical c. Coatings Care and Use of Copper 1. Care of copper a. Protective coating needed to maintain color b. Washed with liquid soap and water

Slides 16-27

2. Uses of copper a. Siding, roofing, flashing, guttering, and screen wire b. Plumbing pipe c. Electrical wire

Slides 16-28

V.

Brass A. Properties of brass: 1. Copper alloys with zinc as principal alloying element 2. Hardened by cold-working 3. Three general classes a. White, alpha, and alpha-beta 4. Romans first used it to manufacture coins and jewelry Slides 16-29 and 16-30

B. Plain Brasses (CopperZinc Alloys) 1. Several are used in products related to construction a. Red brass b. Commercial bronze c. Cartridge brass d. Muntz Metal

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-31

C. Leaded Brasses (CopperZincLead Alloys) 1. Lead added to brass to make it easier to machine 2. Used in a variety of construction products a. Architectural bronze b. Forging brass c. Medium-leaded brass D. Tin Brasses (CopperZincTin Alloys) 1. Has additional properties not present in plain brasses 2. Types of tin brasses a. Admiralty b. Naval Slides 16-32

VI.

Bronze A. Properties of bronze: 1. Refers to copper alloys having elements of silicon, aluminum, manganese, and others 2. May or may not have zinc

Slides 16-33

3. Bronze types: a. Commercial bronze b. Architectural bronze c. Muntz Metal

Slides 16-34

VII.

Lead A. Properties of lead: 1. Soft, heavy metal 2. Good corrosion resistance 3. Easily worked 4. Resists penetration from radiation 5. Used as early as 5000 to 6000 BC. 6. High density and weight 7. Low melting point

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

B. Production of lead 1. Major source of lead is mineral galena 2. Lead oxide is smelted in blast furnace 3. Processed to separate gold and silver

Slides 16-35 and 16-36

C. Grades of lead 1. Chemical 2. Desilverized 3. Corroding D. Lead alloys 1. Alloyed with antimony and other elements E. Designated by the UNS system F. Uses of lead 1. Lead pipes and tank liners 2. Chemical manufacturing 3. Roofing, flashing, and spandrels

Slides 16-37

VIII. Solders A. Joins metals in waterproof joint and makes secure electrical connections B. Properties of solders 1. Low melting temperatures 2. Little shear, tensile, or impact strength 3. Used: a. Where there is no load on a joint b. Where joints that have other fasteners C. Four major classifications: 1. Tin-lead 2. General purpose alloys used for joining metals 3. Tin-lead-antimony 4. Silver-lead a. Used for soldering copper and brass using a torch heating method Slides 16-38

D. Variety of special alloys a. Figure 16.15: Solders are non-ferrous metals with a low melting point that can join metals without melting them

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-39

E. Fluxes 1. Materials used to remove oxides a. Three general types: i.

Neutral: mild and used on easily soldered metals ii.

Corrosive: more effective for cleaning surfaces iii.

Non-corrosive: used only on easily soldered metals and electrical connections Slides 16-40

IX.

Tin A. Properties of tin: 1. Produced from ore containing mineral cassiterite 2. Soft, blue-white, malleable, and ductile metal 3. Corrosion resistant when exposed to air and moisture 4. Low melting point

Slides 16-41

B. Production of tin: 1. Series of mechanical and chemical processes for crushing and cleaning ore 2. All involve smelting ore 3. Crude tin is separated from slag in furnace C. Designated in the UNS system D. Tin used extensively to provide protective coatings on other metals

Slides 16-42

X.

Terneplate A. Properties of terneplate: 1. Mixture of lead and tin applied to copper-bearing steel sheet or stainless steel sheet to produce corrosion-resistant coating B. Uses of terneplate 1. Short terne (roofing terne) used for finished roofing, gutters, downspouts, and flashing 2. Long terne used for fireproof doors and frames

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-43

C. Production of terne sheets 1. Chemically cleaned by passing through dilute solution of sulfuric or hydrochloric acid 2. Fluxed by a heated solution of zinc chloride 3. Passed through a molten solution of lead and tin 4. Cooled and cleaned to ready for priming

Slides 16-44

XI.

Titanium A. Properties of titanium: 1. Found in large quantities in earth’s surface 2. Very light, strong, ductile, and silvery metal 3. Low electrical conductivity and coefficient of thermal expansion 4. Paramagnetic 5. High strength-to-weight ratio 6. Resists corrosion by salt water and atmosphere

Slides 16-45

B. Working characteristics 1. Pure titanium is easier to use than titanium alloys 2. All types can be fabricated using standard manufacturing processes a. Machining, welding, riveting, drilling, punching, hot- and cold-rolling, extruding, forging, and drawing C. Production of titanium 1. Chemically-driven Kroll process

Slides 16-46

D. Titanium alloys 1. Strength depends on purity of metal 2. Higher the purity the weaker the metal E. Designated in the UNS system F. Mostly used in aircraft and aerospace industries and the military

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

12

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-47

XII.

Nickel A. Properties of nickel 1. Silver-colored, strong, and tough metal 2. Provides increased resistance to atmospheric and chemical corrosion 3. Increases an alloy’s strength 4. Alloyed forms used by prehistoric man 5. Fabricated by hot- and cold-rolling, extruding, bending, forging, and spinning

Slides 16-48

B. Production of nickel 1. Several processes used to produce nickel from ore 2. Most recent is Hybinette process C. Nickel alloys 1. Provides increased ductility, corrosion resistance, strength, hardness, and toughness D. Nickel and nickel alloys designated in UNS system

Slides 16-49

E. Uses of nickel 1. Alloying element in ferrous and nonferrous metals 2. Excellent material for electroplating and electrolysis plating 3. Electric heating, elements, lamp filaments, plumbing fittings, and hardware

Slides 16-50

XIII. Zinc A. Properties of zinc: 1. Bluish-white metal 2. Brittle and has low strength 3. Resists corrosion by water 4. Forms protective oxide when exposed to air 5. Can be hot- and cold-rolled, drawn, extruded, cast, machined, welded, and soldered

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

13

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Slides 16-51

B. Production of zinc 1. Extracted from zinc blende (sphalerite) ore 2. Mined ore crushed, ground, and separated 3. Electrolytic process and vertical furnace method can be used C. Zinc alloys are used for die casting D. Zinc and zinc alloys are designated in the UNS system

Slides 16-52

E. Uses of zinc 1. Major use is forming protective coating over steel to prevent rust (galvanizing) 2. Hardware and plumbing items 3. Anchors, flashing, screws, and nails F. Zinc galvanizing processes 1. Includes electro-galvanizing, hot-dip galvanizing, metallic spraying, and sherardizing XIV. Galvanic Corrosion A. Presence of electrolyte causes dissimilar metals to corrode more rapidly than similar metals in contact B. Metal higher on table of electrolytic corrosion potential will corrode more C. Can be coated or caulked to avoid galvanization

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to visit a store in their area that sells nonferrous metals and price the materials based on type of product and dimensions. They should report their findings to the class for comparison.

2. Have students go around the city in groups and try to find examples of nonferrous metals used in construction sites. They should bring pictures of what they find to share with the class.

3. Ask students to look in their house or apartment to find examples of nonferrous metals. Have them share photos in class.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

14

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

How does the specific gravity of aluminum compare with that of steel? Aluminum specific gravity 1/3 that of steel.

2.

How does aluminum compare with copper as a conductor of electricity? Aluminum’s conductivity 65 percent that of copper.

3.

How is alumina produced from processed aluminum hydrate? Bauxite is ground and mixed in a digester with soda ash, crushed lime, sodium hydroxide and hot water.

Live steam and mechanical agitators stir the mixture. This is pumped into a digester under pressure and injected with steam. This flows through a pressure-reducing tank into a settling tank where the waste is removed. The mix moves through a filter in a cooling tower to a precipitator where aluminum hydrate is added. Cooling continues and aluminum hydrate is precipitated. This is pumped into filter tanks separating the aluminum hydrate. This is calcined in a rotary kiln producing alumina which is used to produce metallic aluminum.

4.

What is the purity of newly produced aluminum? Newly produced aluminum is 99.5 to 99.9 percent pure.

5.

What do the aluminum temper designations F, O, and H mean? F means no special control over thermal or work-hardening conditions is used. O means wrought products have been heated to effect recrystallization, which produces the lowest strength. H means it is a wrought product, which is strain-hardened through cold working.

6.

What does solution heat-treating mean? Castings are subjected to a high temperature and quenched in cold or hot oil or water and left to age at room temperature.

7.

When galvanic corrosion occurs, what forms the electrolyte? The electrolyte is moisture in the atmosphere.

8.

How can galvanic corrosion be reduced or eliminated? Coat metal with zinc, unleaded paint, and separate different joining metals with plastic.

9.

What types of finishes are used on aluminum products? Natural finishes, mechanical finishes, chemical finishes, anodic finishes, and various coatings.

10. What is a natural, controlled finish? Natural controlled finishes are produced by varying the smoothness of the surface by running the sheet between rollers.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

15

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 16: Nonferrous Metals

11. What is an anodized finish? An anodized finish is a thin coating of anodic film built on the surface by passing an electric current through an acid bath in which the aluminum is immersed.

12. What are the types of anodic coatings used in industrial and architectural applications? General, Protective and Decorative, Architectural I and Architectural II. 13. How are aluminum surfaces painted in a factory? The paint is electrostatically sprayed or roller applied with an organic paint that is then baked hard.

14. What is a porcelain enamel coating? Porcelain enamel coatings are produced by bonding a vitreous organic material to the metal at a high temperature.

15. What is laminated finish? A laminated finish involves bonding another material, as vinyl films, to the surface with an adhesive.

16. How can aluminum members be joined? Mechanical fasteners, stitching, welding, brazing, soldering, and adhesive bonding.

17. What are the major properties of wrought copper alloys? Major allowing elements are tin, aluminum, zinc, nickel, silicon, manganese, lead, phosphorus, and beryllium.

18. What are the two most widely used copper alloys? Brasses and bronzes.

19. What is copper patina? Patina is a green color that develops on copper surfaces exposed to the weather.

20. What type of ore contains lead sulfide? The mineral galena.

21. What are the major properties of lead? Properties of lead are high density, high weight, softness, malleability, low melting point, and good electrical conductivity.

22. What are the major properties of tin? Properties of tin are malleability, ductile, corrosion resistant, low melting point, can be cast.

23. What are the major properties of zinc? Properties of zinc include the following: low strength, brittle, resists corrosion by weather, forms a protective oxide when exposed to air, subject to creep, damaged by alkalis and acids.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

16

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 17: Steel Frame Construction

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 17: Steel Frame Construction

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 6

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 17: Steel Frame Construction

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 17-2 and 17-3

    

Define the types of drawings required for structural steel buildings.Describe the procedure for fabricating and erecting the structural steel frame of a building Be familiar with the fastening techniques used to join structural steel members Describe fire-protection procedures for structural steel members required by building codes Discuss steel framing systems using manufactured components

Introduction This chapter discusses steel frame construction, which consists of utilizing a skeleton frame construction where the walls, floors, and roof are supported by a structural framework of steel beams, columns, girders, and related structural elements. The chapter details how to prepare drawings, how to erect, how to fasten, and how to maintain steel frame construction.

Slides 17-4 and 17-5

Lesson Plan I.

Steel Frame Construction A. Utilize skeleton frame construction in which walls, floors, and roof are supported by a structural framework of steel beams, columns, girders, and related structural elements 1. Steel frames are strong, lightweight, and durable structures B. Conducted according to the Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 17: Steel Frame Construction

Slides 17-6

II.

Structural Steel Drawings A. Engineering design drawings 1. Indicate the type of construction B. Shop drawings 1. Contain necessary information for fabrication of each member C. Erection plans 1. Assembly drawings used on-site to direct placement of each member in its desired location

Slides 17-7 and 17-8

III.

The Steel Frame A. The members making up a steel frame are joined with metal connections and riveted, bolted, or welded 1. Connections transmit vertical (shear) forces and bending moments (rotational forces) from one member to the other B. Frame Stability C. Steel Frame Connections 1. Simple Connections 2. Moment Connections 3. Riveted Connections 4. Bolted Connections 5. Welded Connections

Slides 17-9

D. The Erection Process 1. Steel erection is considered one of the most dangerous of all construction activities a. Necessary to ensure safety during steel erection 2. Finished members are delivered on-site in the order in which they are needed during the erection

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 17: Steel Frame Construction

Slides 17-10 and 17-11

E. Decking 1. Metal Decking a. Composite decking 2. Concrete Decking F. Figure 17.34: Composite decking uses a concrete topping poured onto metal decking to provide a strong structural floor system

Slides 17-12

G. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Systems 1. Complete building system that has been engineered and fabricated to specifications 2. Common types of pre-engineered buildings available include: a. welded rigid frame b. truss type c. post-and-beam d. sloped roof

Slides 17-13

H. Other Steel Construction Systems 1. Pre-fabricated steel truss components used for: a. Roof trusses b. Open-web joists c. Space frames 2. Coplanar (forces operating in the same plane) assembly of structural members joined at their ends

Slides 17-14

IV.

Tensile Structures A. Framed using high-strength cables of cold drawn steel suspended between supporting members and secured with cable stays B. Span large distances in an almost unlimited number of shapes and curvatures

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 17: Steel Frame Construction

Slides 17-15

V.

Light-Gauge Steel Framing A. Formed from flat cold-rolled pieces of carbon steel B. Gauge thicknesses from No. 12 to No. 20 C. Shape form 1. Single steel sheet 2. Several forms shape-welded

Slides 17-16

VI.

Fire Protection of the Steel Frame A. Structural steel is an incombustible material that will not melt even during a building fire 1. However, when subjected to sustained extreme heat its properties, including strength, are affected 2. This can lead to steel column and beam failure during a prolonged fire

Slides 17-17 and 17-18

B. To protect a building’s occupants and structural integrity, codes require coating certain steel frames with a fire-resistant material 1. Materials used include concrete, tile, brick, stone, gypsum board, gypsum blocks, fire-resistant plasters, sprayed-on mineral fibers, intumescent fireretarding coatings, liquids, and flame shields C. Figure 17.47: Cementitious materials are sprayed on steel frames to provide fire protection

Chapter Hints 1. Have students go around the city in groups and try to find examples of steel frame construction. They should bring pictures of what they find to share with the class.

2. If possible, have the students find a construction site in their area that is at present constructing a steel frame building. Have the students observe and write down what they observe.

3. Have the students contact a local construction company and see if they can obtain drawings for a steel frame construction project and have the students bring what they obtain to class to share with the other students.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 17: Steel Frame Construction

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the purposes of the various types of drawings used for the design and erection of steel-framed buildings? Type of connections, data on shears, loads, moments, axial forces, sizes of members, fabrication data, and erection plans.

2.

How are structural steel members lifted for installation as the erection process proceeds? Begin the erection with ground-mounted cranes and move to tower cranes as the height gets beyond the reach of ground cranes.

3.

What are the commonly used fastening methods for joining structural steel members?

Rivets, bolts, and welding.

4.

How can the specified tension values be ensured when bolting structural steel members? Tension values for bolts set with calibrated torque wrenches.

5.

What techniques can be used to provide for the stability of the structural steel frame?

Add shear walls on the exterior and interior, use diagonal steel bracing, structural bracing surface cladding and connections designed to control shear stresses and bending moments.

6.

What are the two types of beam connections? Framed connections, seated connections, which include simple connections, rigid connections, semi-rigid connections, welded connections, riveted and bolted bearing-type, and friction-type.

7.

What is the difference between bearing-type and friction-type riveted connections?

Bearing type connections have the fastener bear against the sides of the holes in the connections. The fastener bears the stress. Friction type connections are those in which the fastener can be tightened enough to clamp the connected parts together under high pressure.

8.

What techniques are used to provide fire protection for structural steel framing? Fire protection is provided by surrounding the steel members with insulating concrete, masonry units, metal lath with lightweight plastic, fire-resistant sheet products, sprayed cementitious materials, mineral fiber slabs, and intumescent coatings.

9.

What types of decking are used with structural steel framing? Metal decking, concrete decking, both pre-cast and cast-in-place concrete.

10. What is a truss? A truss is an assembly of structural members joined to form a rigid framework, and is usually connected to form triangles.

11. What type of structural system is used to support tensile structures? Tensile structures are supported with high-strength steel cables.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 11 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 11

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 18-2 and 18-3

       

Understand the structural composition of trees and identify species used in construction Make decisions pertaining to the influence of defects in lumber on various applications Identify standard inch and metric lumber sizes Use information about lumber grades to secure products that serve an intended purpose Use data from the In-Grade Testing Program Use information about properties of wood when selecting species Apply the structural properties of wood when designing structural members Take action to protect wooden structures from damage by insects and moisture

Introduction This chapter discusses wood, plastics, and composites. The chapter begins with talking about trees, their species, and how the trees are made into lumber. Then the chapter reviews lumber’s standard sizes and grades. The chapter goes on to discuss the properties of wood species and how to protect the wood from damage.

Slides 18-4

Lesson Plan I.

Wood A. Wood, a natural organic material, is unique among construction materials in that it is a renewable resource B. In the form of lumber and timbers, it is one of the most familiar construction materials 1. Also used to produce plywood, particleboard, and hardboard

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Slides 18-5 and 18-6

II.

Tree Species A. Two classes 1. Softwoods a. Used for structural framing, sheathing, roofing, subflooring, siding, trim, and millwork b. Coniferous trees that bear cones c. Needle-like leaves that stay green all year long 2. Hardwoods a. Deciduous, broad-leaved; shed leaves b. Cabinetry, furniture making, paneling, interior trim, and flooring B. Figure 18.1: Woods are divided into two classes, deciduous (hardwoods) and coniferous (softwoods)

Slides 18-7

III.

The Structure of Wood A. Wood structure from inside to out: 1. Pith 2. Heartwood 3. Sapwood 4. Cambium layer 5. Phloem cells 6. Bark 7. Figure 18.3: A cross-section of a tree illustrating its structure. (Courtesy of Western Wood Products Association)

Slides 18-8

IV.

Wood Defects A. Natural defects 1. Occur while a tree grows 2. Knots, shake, wane, insect holes, and pitch pockets B. Seasoning defects 1. Produced as wood is dried for use 2. Warp, checks, stain, honey combing, and case-hardening

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Slides 18-9

V.

Lumber Manufacturing A. The production of lumber begins in the forest where trees are felled 1. Branches are cut away 2. The log is moved to a loading site 3. Loaded on trucks 4. At the mill, logs are stacked into large piles and sprayed with water to keep them from drying out and splitting

Slides 18-10

B. A mechanical peeler grinds off the bark C. After peeling, a log is ready to be cut into lumber of various types 1. Band saw machine 2. Trim saw D. Lumber grader E. Air drying area F. Kiln for final moisture reduction

Slides 18-11

VI.

Seasoning Lumber A. Process of converting wood from a green lumber to a finished lumber state through drying B. Results in a recommended and desired moisture content C. Lumber-seasoning methods 1. Air drying, kiln drying, dehumidification, and solar drying

Slides 18-12 and 18-13

VII.

Lumber Sizes A. Softwood lumber 1. Produced in standard sizes 2. Dressed/finished size is actual size of the board after drying and surfacing

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Slides 18-14

B. Hardwood lumber 1. Dressed to thickness but not to any specific width or length 2. Cutting to standard widths and lengths would cause great waste C. Table 18.3: Standard Sizes of Surfaced Timbers D. Buying lumber 1. Most lumber in the United States is sold by board foot 2. Equal to a piece of lumber with an actual size of 1 in. thick, 1/2 in. wide, and 1 ft long 3. Metric lumber sold by cubic meter 4. Molding and trim sold by linear foot 5. Posts and pilings are sold by the piece 6. Wood shingles are sold by the square

Slides 18-15

VIII. Lumber Grading and Testing A. Softwood lumber grade based on American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20–70 B. Canadian lumber grades are identical with those used in the United States C. Softwood lumber grading standards 1. Nomenclature and bending strength ratios a. Structural light framing, light framing, structural joists and planks, appearance framing, and stud grades

Slides 18-16 and 18-17

D. Examples of lumber types 1. Rough lumber a. Not dressed; shows saw marks 2. Re-sawn lumber a. Produced by re-sawing any thickness of lumber into thinner lumber 3. Dressed lumber a. One or more surfaces smoothed in any combination of surfaces and edges

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Slides 18-18

E. Table 18.10: Classifications, Sizes, and Grades of Softwood Lumber F. Stress-rated lumber 1. Graded by stress-rating equipment a. Measures bending stress and modulus of elasticity 2. Stress grade electronically calculated a. Includes effects of grain slope, knots, growth rate, moisture content, and density 3. Grade stamp place by machine on a piece

Slides 18-19

G. In-grade testing program 1. Verify softwood lumber design values for visually graded lumber 2. Provide a scientific basis for wood engineering H. Design data presented in Base Values 1. Adjusted for various Conditions of Use 2. Adjustment value found mathematically

Slides 18-20

IX.

Physical and Chemical Composition of Wood A. Porosity of wood 1. Softwood cellular structure a. Large longitudinal cells called tracheids b. Smaller radial cells called rays B. Hardwood cellular structure 1. Two different types of longitudinal cells a. Small-diameter fibers b. Larger diameter vessels or pores Slides 18-21

C. Composition of wood 1. Cells made of mainly cellulose and hemicellulose fibers a. Bonded together with an organic substance called lignin b. Complex glucose compounds 2. Elements give wood strength, susceptibility to decay, and hygroscopic properties

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Slides 18-22

X.

Hygroscopic Properties of Wood A. Hygroscopic 1. Property of wood that permits it to absorb and retain moisture

Slides 18-23

B. Moisture content 1. Weight of water in wood divided by the weight of the wood, when oven dry, expressed as a percentage C. Fiber saturation point 1. Once all free water in cell cavities is gone and cell fibers making up cell walls contain any remaining water

Slides 18-24

D. Equilibrium moisture content 1. When green lumber has the same moisture content as the surrounding air E. Moisture affects wood properties 1. Size, dimensional stability, strength, stiffness, decay resistance, glue bonding, and paintability

Slides 18-25

F. Specific gravity 1. Ratio of weight of a certain volume of a material to the weight of an equal volume of water at 39.2°F G. Figure 18.21: Typical shrinkage and distortion of various wood shapes in relation to the direction of growth rings

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Slides 18-26

XI.

Structural Properties of Wood A. Wood is an orthotropic material 1. Mode of growth that is more or less vertical

Slides 18-27

B. Three mutually perpendicular axes: 1. Longitudinal, radial, and tangential C. Wood is a fibrous material D. Property tests include bending, shear, stiffness, tension, and compression E. Bending 1. Wood beams under load deflect, producing bending stresses in the fibers

Slides 18-28 and 18-29

F. Shear 1. Subject to vertical and horizontal shear G. Modulus of elasticity 1. Measure of a beam’s resistance to deflection, or its stiffness H. Tension 1. Allowable unit stress in tension parallel to grain applied to the entire crosssection of a wood member I. Compression 1. Unit of stress in compression parallel to the grain is several times greater than that perpendicular to the grain J. Gluing properties 1. Glue bonding is improved as moisture content decreases, with 10 to 12 percent moisture effective for exterior products

Slides 18-30

XII.

Other Properties of Wood A. Thermal properties 1. Softwoods have a thermal conductivity of approximately 1 Btu/in. of thickness 2. Fairly good insulator

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Slides 18-31

B. Decorative features 1. Unique decorative features that make it a prized material 2. Unique colors and density by species C. Decay resistance 1. Some have natural decay-resistant substances in cell structures that enable heartwood to resist attack D. Insect damage 1. Holes bored in living trees and cut lumber 2. Small holes called pinholes and larger ones called grub holes

Slides 18-32

XIII. Pressure Treated Wood and Plywood A. Process that forces preservatives deep into the wood cellular structure

Slides 18-33 and 18-34

B. Safety information 1. Workers should be aware of certain hazards when working with pressuretreated wood C. Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA) 1. Not approved as a primary wood preservative in residential, recreational, and general consumer construction

Slides 18-35

D. Alkaline Copper Quat (ACQ) 1. EPA-approved, non-arsenic, non-chromium, and water-based 2. Used when protection from decay and insects is required 3. Figure 18.29: Alkaline Copper Quat–treated wood is widely used for posts and decks E. Bardac-treated wood 1. Applied to framing lumber and plywood using a pressure treatment process

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Slides 18-36

F. Copper Azole (CA) 1. Water-based wood preservative 2. Prevents decay from fungi and insects G. Pentachlorophenol 1. Used for many years as a wood preservative 2. Not EPA-registered for residential uses

Slides 18-37

H. Methyl Isothiocyanate 1. Wood preservative pesticide to control wood rot and decay-causing fungi I. Applying preservatives 1. Pressure treatment a. Impregnate wood with the desired preservative by placing wood in a closed vessel and raising the pressure above atmospheric pressure 2. Non-pressure processes a. Wide range used b. Differ widely in penetration and retention

Slides 18-38

J.

Effect of treatment on strength 1. Chemicals in water-borne salt preservatives are reactive with wood K. Quality certification 1. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) is a professional society responsible for establishing consensus standards for the wood preserving industry

Slides 18-39

XIV. Fire-Retardant Treatments A. In certain applications, wood must be treated with fire-retardant chemicals B. The two general methods for applying 1. Pressure-impregnating the wood with water-borne or organic solvent-borne chemicals 2. Applying fire-retardant chemical coatings to the wood’s surface

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to visit a nearby wooded area and try to find examples of different species of trees. Have them report their findings.

2. Have the students contact a local exterminator to inquire as to the most common form of damage to wood products in the area. Ask the students to report their findings to the class.

3. Have the students visit a local store that sells lumber. Have them price the various items they find and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

How can you tell a coniferous tree from a deciduous tree? Coniferous trees have cones and needles. Deciduous trees have leaves.

2.

What natural defects are found in wood? Knots, shake, wane, insect hole, warp, checks, stain, and honeycombing.

3.

What are the two ways wood is seasoned? Air drying and kiln drying.

4.

What is the recommended moisture content for lumber used for framing?

Recommended moisture content for framing wood is 19 percent.

5.

Why is surfaced green softwood lumber produced more than softwood lumber that is surfaced when dry? When software lumber dries, it shrinks. After it dries it should be a standard size for framing lumber.

6.

What standard is followed in the production of softwood lumber? American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20–70 and Canadian National Lumber Grades Authority Standard CSA0141.

7.

How many board feet are in a 2 × 10 × 12 ft piece of stock? 20 board feet.

8.

What is the volume of 250 pieces 38 mm × 140 mm × 3.66 m? 19471.2 m3.

9.

How does a contractor know the lumber received on a job has been dried to a 15 percent moisture content? It will have the grade stamp S-Dry on it.

10. How can you differentiate between dimension lumber and timbers? Dressed lumber will have one or more sides surfaced smooth. Timbers are 5 in. or more in their least dimension.

11. What is stress-rated lumber? Stress-rated lumber is tested at the mill by mechanical stress-rating equipment that subjects each piece to bending stresses.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 18: Wood, Plastics, and Composites

12. What is meant by the equilibrium moisture content? Equilibrium moisture content is the point at which the moisture content of the wood reaches that in the surrounding air.

13. In what ways does moisture affect wood? Moisture affects its size, dimensional stability, stiffness, decay resistance, glue bonding and paintability.

14. What will be the size of a 5 in. × 8 in. rough cut timber after it dries? 4¾ x 7¾ in. to 4 11/16 x 7 11/16 in.

15. What is the recommended moisture content for wood to be painted? Painted wood should have a moisture content of 15 to 20 percent.

16. Explain why wood floats even though the wood fibers have a specific gravity of 1.5.

While wood has a specific gravity greater than water, it is made up of air-filled cells so it will float.

17. What is a good moisture content for producing a satisfactory glue bond? A good glue bond requires wood to have a moisture content of 5 to 6 percent.

18. Which species of wood have a natural resistance to decay? Cedars, redwood, cypress, black walnut, black locust.

19. What types of preservatives are used on wood? Alkaline Copper Quat (ACQ), Copper Azole (CA), and Bardac 22C50 are most common. Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA) is approved for a variety of commercial and industrial applications. Methyl isothiocyanate is also a preservative used.

20. What are the two processes used to apply fire retardant chemicals to wood? Fire retardant processes are pressure impregnating and chemical coatings.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

12

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 8

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 19-2 and 19-3

Apply technical information on industrial plywood to make construction product decisions Select the appropriate reconstituted wood-panel products for various applications Categorize and select hardwood plywood for construction applications Identify and choose manufactured wood structural components used for building construction Be aware of the types of many products manufactured from wood

    

Introduction This chapter discusses products manufactured from wood. It begins by describing plywood and its variations and construction. The chapter then discusses manufacturing of wood components for construction and the types, sizes and properties of that wood.

Slides 19-4

Lesson Plan I.

Products Manufactured from Wood A. A new generation of engineered wood building products is expanding the structural capabilities of the material 1. Engineered wood products are manufactured by bonding together wood strands, veneers, lumber or other forms of wood fiber with glue to form larger, more efficient composite structural units Slides 19-5

II.

Plywood and Other Panel Products A. Veneered and manufactured panels made from wood 1. Plywood 2. Waferboard 3. Oriented strand board 4. Particleboard 5. Hardboard

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

Slides 19-6 and 19-7

B. Plywood Panel Construction 1. Bonded thin layers, or plies, of wood 2. Panels always have an odd number of plys 3. Single thickness veneer ply or two veneers glued together 4. Plys most popular in construction: a. Veneer core, lumber core, particleboard core, and medium-density fiberboard core 5. Figure 19.2: Veneer core panel plywood has from three to nine plies that are positioned with their grain perpendicular to each other

Slides 19-8

C. Specifications for Plywood Panels 1. Some veneered plywood panels are manufactured under specifications or performance testing standards: a. U.S. Product Standard PS 1-95, Construction and Industrial Plywood 2. Developed by the plywood industry and the National Institute of Standards and Technology

Slides 19-9

D. Construction and Industrial Plywood 1. Grades classified into five appearance groups: a. N, A, B, C, and D 2. Species construction and industrial plywood a. Made using about seventy species of wood

Slides 19-10

3. Sizes of panels a. Sanded construction and industrial plywood panels i. Thickness: 1/8 through 1 ¼ in., in 1/8 in. increments

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

b. Unsanded panels i. Thickness: 5/6 to 1 ¼ in. ii. Width: 36, 48, and 60 in. iii. Length: 60 to 144 in., in 12 in. increments

Slides 19-11

E. APA Performance-Rated Panels 1. Four panels specified by APA: a. Plywood b. Oriented strand board c. Rapidly replacing plywood as the most common sheathing material for walls, roofs and floors d. Composite panels (Com-Ply®) e. APA Rated Siding

Slides 19-12

2. Figure 19.4: APA Performance rated panels 3. Four exposure durability classifications: a. Exterior, Exposure 1, Exposure 2, and Interior 4. Product Identification a. APA trademarks plywood

Slides 19-13

F. Specialty Plywood 1. Overlaid plywood a. High-grade exterior-type panel with resin-impregnated fiber ply bonded to side(s) 2. Siding panels a. Used as finished exterior siding b. Available in a variety of surface finishes 3. Interior paneling a. Used on interior walls as a finish material

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

Slides 19-14

G. Hardwood Plywood 1. Four categories reflecting stiffness a. Category A (highest) through D (lowest) 2. Six grades of veneers a. A grade, B grade, Sound grade 2, Industrial-grade 3, Backing grade 4, and Specialty grade

Slides 19-15

3. Construction described by identifying core a. Veneer, lumber, particleboard, fiberboard, hardboard, and special core 4. Panels vary by size and thickness 5. Backstamp certified by Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association on back of decorative panels

Slides 19-16

H. Reconstituted Wood Products 1. Available in five classes: a. Class 1: Tempered b. Class 2: Standard c. Class 3: Service-tempered d. Class 4: Service Grade e. Class 5: Industrialite

Slides 19-17

III.

Structural Building Components A. Structural composite lumber (SCL) 1. Manufactured by parallel orientation of wood fibers of various geometries, bonded with a structural adhesive a. Available in lengths that span large distances with excellent load carrying capabilities

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

Slides 19-18

B. Trusses 1. Used for floor and roof construction C. Glue laminated wood members (Glulams) 1. Solid sawn lumber finger-jointed end to end and then face bonded in laminations D. Laminated veneer lumber (LVL) 1. Bonded thin wood veneers together into a large billet with the grain parallel to the long direction

Slides 19-19 and 19-20

E. Laminated strand lumber (LSL) 1. Uses 12 in. long strands immersed in resin and aligned parallel to each other before being pressed into solid billets. Not used as a primary structural member F. Cross-laminated timber (CLT) 1. Engineered wood technology from Europe, formed in a similar fashion to glulams G. Figure 19.17: Cross Laminated Timber is formed by bonding layers of thick planks in a perpendicular arrangement into large panels

Slides 19-21

H. Structural insulated panels (SIPS) 1. Composite consisting of an insulating layer of foam sandwiched between two layers of structural board I. Wood I joist (T-JI) 1. Softwood veneer-bonded top and bottom flanges connected by a thin composite panel web

Slides 19-22

J.

Parallel strand lumber (PSL) 1. Registered name Parallam® 2. Made from Douglas fir or southern pine 3. Includes beams, headers, posts, and columns

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

Slides 19-23

IV.

Other Products Manufactured from Wood A. Wood shingles and shakes 1. Popular as finished roof covering and as exterior siding on wood-framed buildings B. Wood windows 1. Available in a wide range of sizes, styles, and quality 2. Some covered vinyl or aluminum to eliminate painting 3. New models more energy-efficient and easy to operate C. Wood doors 1. Variety of types and styles a. Solid and hollow core wood construction b. Solid wood and with wood veneer, hardboard, and plastic laminate faces c. Wood stiles and rails covered with fiberglass skin d. Glass or louvered openings

Slides 19-24

D. Cabinets 1. Made from wood, wood products, or steel 2. Wide variety of styles a. Colonial, contemporary, and provincial 3. Wide range of woods a. Birch, cherry, and walnut 4. Some covered with a plastic laminate over particleboard substrate

Slides 19-25

E. Wood flooring 1. Commonly used hardwoods a. Oak, beech, birch, pecan, and maple 2. Commonly used softwoods a. Southern pine, western larch, bald cypress, eastern Englemann, eastern spruce, red pine, ponderosa pine, eastern hemlock, and Douglas fir 3. Available quarter-sawed and plain-sawed

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to drive through their neighborhoods and find different types of window and door designs. Have them report their findings.

2. Have the students contact a local contractor to inquire as to the most common form of wood products used for construction in the area. Ask the students to report their findings to the class.

3. Have the students visit a local store that sells hardwood floors. Have them price the various items they find and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the differences between plywood, oriented-strand board, and composite panels? Plywood is made by bending together thin layers of wood. Oriented strand board is made by bonding compressed strand-like particles of wood arranged in layers. Composite panels have a core of reconstituted wood bonded between layers of solid wood veneers.

2.

What are the plywood exposure durability classifications? Give an example of where each could be used. Plywood exposure durability classifications: Exterior is used where exposed to the weather. Exposure 1 is used when they will be exposed to the weather a long time before being covered. Exposure 2 is used where it is briefly exposed to the weather. Interior is used only on building interiors.

3.

What are the differences between laminated-veneer lumber and glued-laminated members? Glued laminated lumber is made by bonding 1½ in. thick wood strips while laminated veneer lumber is made by bonding wood veneers with an exterior adhesive.

4.

What appearance groups are established for the outer veneers of construction plywood? Outer veneers of construction plywood veneer grades are N, A, B, C, and D.

5.

How is the strength of the woods used in plywood indicated? Strength is indicated by the group symbol. Group I is the strongest. Groups 2, 3 and 4 have reduced strength while Group 5 is the weakest.

6.

What is a performance-rated wood panel? Performance-rated wood panels are made specifically to meet the performance standards of APA—The Engineered Wood Association.

7.

What are the grades of outer veneers for hardwood plywood? Grades of outer veneers of hardwood plywood are A Grade (Best), B Grade, Sound Grade, Industrial Grade, Backing Grade, and Specialty Grade.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 19: Products Manufactured from Wood

8.

What are the classes of hardboard? Classes of hardboard are Class 1: Tempered, Class 2: Standard, Class 3: Service-tempered, Class 4: Service, and Class 5: Industrialite.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 8

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 20-2

  

Develop an understanding of the methods used to construct light frame buildings Understand the differences in framing when using the various materials and products available Be aware of the influence codes and ordinances have on the design of light frame buildings

Introduction This chapter discusses wood and metal light frame construction. It begins with a discussion of wood and metal light frame construction and its various methods. Then, it explains framing methods and products to use when framing. The chapter also reviews codes and ordinances with regard to such type of construction.

Slides 20-3 and 20-4

Lesson Plan I.

Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction A. Light wood frames provide an almost unlimited range of building forms and designs 1. Classic or contemporary 2. Simple or complex 3. Low cost or expensive B. Can be fitted with almost any electrical, heating, air conditioning, plumbing, and security system 1. Wood frame structures are insulated, sealed, and waterproofed to facilitate long life and low maintenance 2. The system can be used in almost any climate and on any site that will accept an adequate foundation

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

Slides 20-5

II.

Wood Framing and the Building Codes A. International Building Code (IBC) 1. Play important role in design and construction of wood and metal light frame construction 2. Provides increased opportunities for wood-frame construction as compared with that allowed under previous codes 3. Contain extensive requirements for foundations, walls, and roofs 4. Specify fire-resistance ratings

Slides 20-6 and 20-7

III.

Preparing the Site A. Unwanted brush and trees removed B. Surveyor stakes foundation corners C. Builder sets up batter boards D. Excavation for footings and basements accomplished with a bulldozer or backhoe E. Footings are dug F. Figure 20.5: The basement excavation and footing channels are dug to the specified depth. Footing forms are used if the sides of the footing excavation crumble.

Slides 20-8

IV.

Foundations for Light Wood Frame Construction A. Basements 1. Usually used in colder climate regions 2. Provide considerable space for a small cost B. Crawl space 1. Anything below 2 ft high is claustrophobic and difficult to work in when servicing 2. Important to keep ground dry

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

Slides 20-9 through 20-11

C. Wood foundations 1. Sometimes used for buildings with basements or crawl spaces 2. Stress graded and AWPA stamped 3. Often shop-built and shipped to site 4. Carefully assembled using bronze, copper, silicon, or stainless steel nails D. Interior piers and columns 1. Support beams that carry floor joists and other point loads 2. Size of pier depends upon loads to be carried 3. In buildings with basements, steel columns and beams support floor loads at the interior E. Figure 20.10: In buildings with basements, steel columns and beams can support floor loads at the building interior

Slides 20-12

V.

Evolution of Wood Light Construction Frame A. Early wood frame 1. Structural frame of heavy timbers fitted together with mortise and tenon joints B. Balloon frame 1. Developed in the early 1800s 2. Used smaller vertical members to carry roof and second floor 3. Eliminated the heavy timber frame Slides 20-13 and 20-14

VI.

Platform Framing A. Platform Framing 1. First floor deck on top of foundation 2. Walls for the first floors are assembled, erected, and braced on top of the floor deck 3. Joists for the second floor laid on top of a double plate of exterior first-floor walls 4. Second floor joists covered with subflooring forming second floor platform 5. Walls for the second floor are assembled, erected, and braced 6. Ceiling joists laid on a double plate of second-floor exterior walls

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

7. Rafters erected on a double plate of second-floor walls 8. Walls and roof are sheathed 9. Figure 20.21: Platform framing uses a platform at each floor level upon which stud wall is built

Slides 20-15

B. Floor Framing 1. Floor joists a. Horizontal members of a frame that transfer loads to sills and girders b. May require beam for midspan support i. Beam may be built of steel, wood, or a manufactured wood product ii. Supported at intervals by piers or columns

Slides 20-16

C. Wall Framing 1. Studs a. Typically 2  4 stock b. 2  6 provide space for additional insulation c. Generally spaced 16 in. on center 2. Load-carrying capacity of a wall and size of its studs determine the spacing used 3. On-center spacings are always set in four-foot modules 4. Figure 20.13: The completed walls are lifted into position, nailed to the floor framing, plumbed, and temporarily braced.

Slides 20-17 and 20-18

D. Ceiling Framing 1. Ceiling joists a. Supported on exterior walls and loadbearing interior partitions b. Carry finish ceiling materials and insulation c. If subject to other loads, the architect will size them accordingly d. May be trimmed to follow rafter shape

Slides 20-19

E. Figure 20.30: Ceiling joists commonly span from the exterior wall to a loadbearing interior partition

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

F. Framing the Roof 1. Flat, gable, shed, and hip roofs roof forms are frequently used for wood construction 2. Roof framing is one of the most difficult parts of wood light frame construction 3. Rafters rest on top of the wall’s double plate and nailed 4. Overhangs on gable end a. Can be built using lookouts supported on the gable end wall and nailed to the nearest rafter

Slides 20-20

VII.

Wood Trusses A. Wood roof trusses 1. Used for framing light frame buildings 2. Triangulated structural unit made by assembling wood members into a rigid frame

Slides 20-21

B. Wood floor trusses 1. Frequently used instead of solid or engineered wood joists 2. Provide long spans and can eliminate the need for beams to support a longspanned floor

Slides 20-22 and 20-23

VIII. Panelized Wood Construction A. Uses series of standard factory-assembled wall, floor, and roof units constructed on the job B. Include provisions for doors and windows C. Actual length of units depends on the manufacturer 1. Typically 16, 32, 64, 80, 96, and 144 in.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

Slides 20-24 through 20-26

IX.

Fasteners for Wood Frame Construction A. A variety of fasteners are used for specific applications and carpenters must be familiar with the selection of appropriate fastening devices 1. Nails, screws, bolts, and metal connectors are used to connect the members of wood frame construction B. Nails 1. Made of steel, aluminum, brass, and other metals. a. Coated and uncoated steel nails i. Galvanized nails are coated in zinc to prevent rusting 2. Wood Connectors a. Metal connectors are widely used in wood construction to connect wood to wood, wood to concrete, or wood to masonry

X.

Light-Gauge Steel Framing A. Manufacturers offer a complete lightweight steel framing system for walls, floors, and roofs B. Finding increased use due to quality solid wood framing getting more expensive C. Perforated to lighten them and permit the passage of utility lines D. Noncombustible E. Various types of exterior sheathing and siding can be applied F. Easy to insulate G. Gypsum and other interior finish materials can be secured H. Preassembled into wall panels to speed erection I. Figure 20.44: Light-gauge steel studs are assembled in the top and bottom track

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to drive through their neighborhoods and find different types of wood and light-frame metal construction examples. Have them report their findings.

2. Have the students contact a local contractor to inquire as to the most common method of framing construction today. Ask the students to report their findings to the class.

3. Have the students visit a local store that sells products used for various types of framing. Have them price the various items they find and report their findings to the class.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 20: Wood and Metal Light Frame Construction

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the commonly used framing members used in light frame construction?

Wood, reconstituted wood products, and lightweight steel

2.

What is box-sill construction? Box sill construction has the floor joists resting on a wood sill that is bolted to the foundation. A wood header is nailed across the ends of the joists.

3.

When is a beam required under the floor joists? A beam is required when the span the joist must span is greater than the joist is qualified to reach.

4.

How do the studs in balloon framing differ from those in platform framing? Studs in platform framing are one story high, while in balloon framing they are two stories high.

5.

How are second-floor joists supported when using balloon-frame construction?

Second floor joists are supported by wood members called ribbons let into the studs.

6.

What components make up an assembled truss unit used for truss-framed construction? Parts of a truss are top chord, ridge gusset, web gusset, heel gusset, webs, and bottom chord.

7.

What is meant by panelized construction? Panelized construction uses factory assembled wall, roof and floor panels, which are then erected on the job.

8.

What are the advantages of using wood floor and roof joists? Lightweight, easily cut to size, and readily available.

9.

What are the members used to construct a wall with lightweight steel members?

Members of a lightweight steel wall include base track, studs, top track, and headers.

10. How are posts built using lightweight steel members? Posts are made by assembling metal studs and setting them inside the base and top track.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 21: Heavy Timber Construction

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 21: Heavy Timber Construction

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 6

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 21: Heavy Timber Construction

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides:

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slide 21-2

 

Understand the requirements of the building code as it pertains to heavy timber construction Become familiar with the materials and methods for framing heavy timber buildings and the types of connections used

Introduction This chapter discusses heavy timber construction. The chapter begins with a discussion of the codes that pertain to heavy timber construction. It then discusses the methods and materials need to construct heavy timber buildings.

Lesson Plan Slides 21-3 and 21-4

I.

Heavy Timber Construction A. Framed structures using large exposed timbers, joined together with wood joinery, pegs, or metal connectors 1. Wood products include: solid timbers, glue-laminated members, parallelstrand lumber, and laminated-veneer lumber a. Diagonal bracing or panelized sheathing strengthen the frame against racking b. Aesthetic of strength and craftsmanship B. Figure 21.1: The wall of a historic building illustrating the use of various timber frame infill materials such as clay tile and wattle and daub (woven wood lattice infilled with wet clay and straw).

Slide 21-5

II.

Building Codes A. Typically specify:

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 21: Heavy Timber Construction

A. Minimum size and type of approved structural members for columns, floor framing, roof framing, floors, and roof decks B. Approved types of connections C. Fire resistance rating of the structural elements D. Seismic analysis and design in earthquake-prone areas

Slide 21-6

III.

Fire Resistance A. Heavy timbers are able to: 1. Absorb heat and flames much longer than other structural materials by producing char 2. Maintain their structural capacity longer than would structural steel 3. Produce a layer of fire protection that shields wood from sustained fire damage and prevents strength loss

Slide 21-7

IV.

Timber Frame Construction A. Solid timber construction is used for residential, commercial, educational and religious buildings among others 1. Commonly used species of wood: a. Douglas fir, pine, spruce, oak and hemlock 2. Differs from light wood-framed buildings: a. Uses fewer, larger members b. Fastening method of complex joints that are usually fastened using only wooden pegs

Slide 21-8

V.

Timber Joinery A. Traditional method of connecting heavy timber structural members A. Uses interlocking wood joints cut into wood members B. Finished joint demonstrates hand craftsmanship and the natural beauty of wood

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 21: Heavy Timber Construction

B. Structural engineer work A. Critical when designing structural systems C. Figure 21.8: This connection has angled wood members tied to overhead beams with metal connectors

Slides 21-9 and 21-10

VI.

Engineered Timber Frame Construction A. Engineered wood or glued laminate construction B. Use for columns, beams, joists, rigid frames, arches, domes, and decking C. Members are engineered, stress-rated A. Made by laminating soft wood members with adhesives and resins B. Formed using adjustable presses

Slide 21-11

D. Arches and Domes A. Two-hinged, with hinges at each base B. Three-hinged, with an additional hinge at the crown C. Laminated arches span long distances D. Glued laminated wood domes a. Designed as radial arch or triangulated system

Slide 21-12

E. Columns, Beams, and Trusses A. Several ways to secure solid and glued laminated beams b. Heavy steel clips and bolts c. Steel connectors secure beams and girders to columns B. Heavy timber trusses d. Span the width of the building e. Support purlins that carry the roof decking

Slides 21-13 and 21-14

C. Figure 21.16: Typical glued laminated connections used to secure a beam to the foundation

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 21: Heavy Timber Construction

F. Connection Details A. Split ring connectors a. Ring-shaped metal inserts b. Placed in grooves cut into mating wood pieces that are secured with bolts c. Used on wood-to-wood connections

Slide 21-15

B. Shear plates a. Used for metal-to-wood connections b. Used in heavy timber construction G. Decking A. Laminated decking, solid wood decking, stressed skin panels, and plywood panels a. Installed in random lengths b. Joints centered on supporting timbers c. Joints staggered for better structural strength d. Figure 21.24: Examples of available types of glued laminated and solid timber decking

Slide 21-16 and 17

H. Sheathing A. Solid wood similar to roof decking B. Structural insulated panels a. Two rigid wood panel materials b. Foamed insulating material between panels c. Decreased dependency on bracing and auxiliary members d. Efficient heat insulation properties

Slides 21-18

II.

Mass Timber Construction A. Term generally applied to thick panel products of cross-laminated timbers (CLT) B. Increased interest in the system due to its strength, light weight, fire-resistant properties, cost competitiveness and superior environmental properties

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 21: Heavy Timber Construction

C. Used as floors, walls and roofs D. Can be incorporated with other engineered wood products, as well as concrete, steel and masonry a. Figure 21.27: Connection between cross laminated timber panel elements is achieved by steel bracket connectors and self-tapping screws.

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to drive through their neighborhoods and find different types of heavy timber construction examples. Have them report their findings.

2. Have the students contact a local contractor to inquire as to the most common method of heavy timber construction today. Ask the students to report their findings to the class.

3. Have the students visit a local store that sells products used for various types of heavy timber construction. Have them price the various items they find and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What types of wood products are used to frame heavy timber buildings? Heavy timber framing uses heavy timbers, dimension lumber, glulams, parallel strand lumber, laminated veneer lumber and pre-fabricated wood I-joists.

2.

What is the difference in reaction to fire between timber structural systems and steel systems? Heavy timber framing chars and absorbs heat during a fire and retains its strength quite a while. Metal framing loses its strength rather rapidly when exposed to fire.

3.

What is meant by a hinged arch? A hinged arch has joints that permit some action similar to a hinge but allow no appreciable separation of adjacent members.

4.

What two types of design are used for glued-laminated dome construction? Radial arch domes and triangulated domes.

5.

Why do codes require steel hold-downs? Steel hold-downs are used to meet code tilt over and tie-down requirements.

6.

What are the types of span details used with glued-laminated wood decking? The sizes of the laminated decking vary depending upon the species of wood used.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 21: Heavy Timber Construction

7.

Why are split-ring connectors used? Split ring connectors add additional strength to a bolted joint.

8.

When are shear plates used? Shear plate connectors are used for wood-to-metal connections.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 22: Finishing the Exterior and Interior of Light Wood Frame Buildings

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 22: Finishing the Exterior and Interior of Light Wood Frame Buildings

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 22: Finishing the Exterior and Interior of Light Wood Frame Buildings

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides:

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to: Slide 22-2

 

Have an understanding of the many materials and design possibilities available for finishing the exterior of light wood frame buildings Be familiar with the many materials and processes and some of the installation procedures required to finish light wood frame building interiors

Introduction This chapter discusses the process of finishing the exterior and interior of light wood frame buildings. It reviews a multitude of materials and designs that may be used in finishing light wood frame buildings. The chapter then discusses the methods used for these finishes and provides many illustrations of such methods.

Slides 22-3 and 22-4

Lesson Plan I.

Finishing the Exterior A. Framing the eaves and rake B. Doing the exterior painting or staining 1. Done after the roof is sheathed 2. Designed to protect walls from excessive wear, provide shade, and complement the architectural style of the house 3. Common details include flush rakes and overhangs Slides 22-5

C. Ventilating the attic 1. Allows for drying and improved air quality 2. Building envelope must control unwanted air leakage and ventilate unwanted moisture 3. Reduces energy costs 4. Removes hot air in the summer 5. Prevents accumulation of moisture in both summer and winter D. Figure 22.2: This wide-boxed cornice incorporates a continuous attic vent strip

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 22: Finishing the Exterior and Interior of Light Wood Frame Buildings

Slides 22-6

E. Finished roof materials 1. Include asphalt and wood shingles, clay, concrete, slate tiles, and sheet metal 2. Gutters installed after shingles F. Installing weather shield 1. Typar or Tyvec 2. Covers corners, window and door openings, plates, and sills 3. Survives prolonged exposure to weather

Slides 22-7

G. Installing windows 1. Wood, steel, aluminum, and aluminum- and vinyl-clad wood windows are common 2. Most have metal or plastic nailing flange secured to the unit 3. Two installation methods a. Placed in the opening, checked for plumb, and nailed to studs and header through flange b. Nailed to studs and header through the casing c. Figure 22.11: The installation of a manufactured window unit

Slides 22-8

H. Exterior door installation 1. Frame set in opening and checked for plumb and level 2. Housewrapped and caulked 3. Wedge-shaped shims between studs and door jamb position door in the rough opening 4. Nailed through shims to the framing 5. Exterior casings are installed

Slides 22-9

I.

Installing the exterior finish 1. Wood, plywood, wood shingles, hardboard, plastic, vinyl, stucco, metal, brick, or stone 2. Usually face nailed through the sheathing into the studs 3. Pieced to expand and contract independently of the other

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 22: Finishing the Exterior and Interior of Light Wood Frame Buildings

Slides 22-10 and 22-11

II.

Finishing the Interior A. Rough-in work begun by: 1. Electricians, plumbers, heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) contractors B. Installing insulation 1. Creates space between the exterior and interior environments, breaking contact 2. Prevents heat loss 3. Placed wherever interior is exposed to exterior temperatures C. Figure 22.29: The insulation properties of a wall can be improved by using rigid plastic foam insulation at the exterior of the sheathing D. Interior wall and ceiling finishes 1. Generally covered with gypsum board after

Slides 22-12

2. Other finishes include: a. Plaster, wood, and hardboard paneling 3. Done after the insulation has been installed 4. Ceilings typically finished with gypsum board, plaster, some form of composition tile, or panels set in a suspended metal frame III.

Interior Finish Carpentry A. Sometimes referred to as millwork B. Application of:

Slides 22-13

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Trim around doors and windows Intersection of walls Floors and ceilings Other interior moldings Figure 22.31: Interior window openings are trimmed on both sides with a casing after the finish wall materials are installed

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 22: Finishing the Exterior and Interior of Light Wood Frame Buildings

Slides 22-14

C. Installing interior doors 1. Most arrive pre-hung on the solid wood door jamb 2. Place jamb into the opening and plumb sides 3. Nail through side jamb and wedged into a stud 4. Long level used to check for plumb 5. Spacing checked for uniformity

Slides 22-15

D. Split door jambs 1. Made with casing attached to each half of split jambs 2. Frames slide into the rough opening from opposite sides 3. Nailed to the studs

Slides 22-16

E. Installing casings and molding 1. Casings a. Moldings used to trim around doors, windows b. Available in a wide range of sizes and patterns 2. Baseboard and molding a. Used where a wall meets the floor b. Outside corners mitered and inside corners coped

Slides 22-17

F. Installing cabinets 1. Base cabinets a. Placed on subfloor; leveled by shimming them at the floor b. Screwed through the back rail to the wall studs 2. Wall cabinets a. Installed specified distance above base cabinets b. Often supported on base cabinets c. Screwed through back rails into the studs

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 22: Finishing the Exterior and Interior of Light Wood Frame Buildings

Slides 22-18

G. Countertop materials 1. Plastic laminate, solid plastics, granite and other stones, sheet metal, and ceramic tile H. Installing stairs 2. Most built by carpenters on-site a. Stringers: solid or engineered wood b. Railings/finish materials: may be pre-manufactured 3. Must observe local building codes

Slides 22-19 and 22-20

I.

J.

Other finish items 1. Hardware, door stops, bath accessories, and fireplace mantels 2. Mirrors and closet shelving 3. Building thoroughly cleaned; subfloor scraped clean and sanded if necessary 4. Carpet, composition floor covering, tile, marble, or slate floor covering Figure 22.42: The interior is finished after painting and the installation of the finished flooring material

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to find a construction project that is in the process of finishing a light wood frame building. Have them report their observations. If there are none in progress, have them visit an old building and assess whether the construction is sound.

2. Have the students contact a local contractor to inquire as to the most common method of finishing a light wood frame building. Ask the students to report their findings to the class.

3. Have the students visit a local store that sells products used for various types of finishing light wood frame construction projects. Have them price the various items they find and report their findings to the class.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 22: Finishing the Exterior and Interior of Light Wood Frame Buildings

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What materials can be used for the finished soffit and fascia? The soffit can be plywood, hardboard, other approved reconstituted wood panels, vinyl, aluminum, and gypsum soffit panels.

2.

Why is attic ventilation important? Attic ventilation lowers the temperature of the air, reducing summer air conditioning costs and removes moisture that accumulates in the air, causing mold and wetting the rafters, insulation and ceiling material.

3.

What are some of the ways a roof can be vented? The best way to vent a roof is with soffit and ridge vents. Gable end vents can be used; a cupola or metal roof vents mounted on the roof are also used.

4.

What types of exterior siding are in common use? Solid wood, wood shingles, vinyl, aluminum, cement board, stucco, synthetic stucco, brick, stone, and plywood siding panels.

5.

What does millwork refer to? Interior finish carpentry, involving the application of trim around doors and windows; the intersection of walls, floors, and ceilings; and other interior moldings.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 9

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides:

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:  

Learn the properties and characteristics of plastic materials used in construction Select the proper plastic material for various construction applications

Slide 23-2

Introduction This chapter discusses plastics. It reviews plastics in general and their properties, and then describes those types of plastics used in the construction industry and their purpose. The chapter stresses the need to be able to identify which plastic should be used for a particular project endeavor.

Lesson Plan Slide 23-3

I.

Plastics A. Manmade polymers of carbon atoms covalently bonded with other elements B. Obtained by breaking down materials found in nature C. Synthetic materials from chemical manipulations of natural materials D. Composed of organic materials 1. Manmade and not found in nature

Slide 23-4

II.

Molecular Structure of Plastics A. Covalent bonding 1. Process in which small numbers of atoms are bound into molecules B. Plastic polymers 2. Called macromolecules because they are composed of many smaller molecules 3. Moldable materials sold in the form of granules, powder, flakes, liquids, or pellets

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Slide 23-5

III.

Classifications A. Thermoplastics 1. Can be softened or re-melted by the application of heat and reformed a. Allows for the recycling and reuse of products made with thermoplastics b. Some may experience contamination and chemical degradation if reheated frequently 2. Composed of long chain-like molecules that are unattached to each other

Slide 23-6

B. Thermosetting plastics 1. Cannot be reheated and reformed once they have been softened, constituted, and cured 2. Formed with a chemical process that produces a strong bond between molecules and prevents their sliding by each other 3. Final form of the material is irreversible

Slide 23-7

C. Bioplastics 1. Also known as organic plastics 2. Form derived from renewable biomass sources a. Vegetable oil or corn starch rather than from petroleum 3. More sustainable than petroplastics a. Relies less on fossil fuel carbon sources b. Fewer greenhouse emissions

Slide 23-8

IV.

Additives A. Plasticizers 1. Added to plastic resin to: a. Reduce brittleness b. Increase flexibility, resiliency, and moldability c. In some cases, to improve impact resistance B. Fillers 2. Used to reduce a plastic’s cost by providing bulk or to improve a specific property

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Slide 23-9

C. Stabilizers 1. Stabilize plastic by helping it to: a. Resist heat, loss of strength, and effects of radiation on bonds between chains D. Colorants 1. Include organic dyes and inorganic pigments 2. Some have a stabilizing influence

Slides 23-10 and 23-11

V.

Properties of Plastics A. Mechanical properties 1. Tensile strength 2. Stiffness 3. Toughness (or impact strength) 4. Hardness 5. Creep B. Electrical properties 1. Excellent electrical insulating properties 2. Enabled development of greatly improved electrical equipment 3. Good heat resistance 4. Excellent dielectric strength 5. Arc resistance a. Total seconds an electric current must arc to cause a part to fail

Slides 23-12 and 23-13

C. Thermal properties 1. Influence of temperature on strength 2. Expansion and contraction of material 3. Many plastics: a. Lose strength at comparatively low temperatures b. Are poor heat conductors c. Can produce toxic fumes: more likely than flames to cause death in a fire d. Table 23.3: A Comparison of the Service Temperatures of Plastics with Other Commonly Used Construction Materials

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Slides 23-14

D. Chemical properties 1. Do not corrode like metals 2. Deteriorate and are damaged by chemicals a. Gain weight because attacking chemicals combine with the plastic resin b. Causes swelling, crazing, and discoloration 3. Weatherability a. Moisture, ultraviolet light, heat, and chemicals found in the air as ozone and hydrochloric acid

Slides 23-15

E. Density 1. Generally lower than other commonly used construction materials F. Specific gravity 1. Ratio of mass of a volume of material to mass of an equal volume of water at standard temperature 2. Varies considerably from 0.06 for foams to 2.0 for fluorocarbons

Slides 23-16

G. Optical properties 1. Some equal to that of glass 2. Acrylics a. Are as transparent as fine optical glass b. Have a light transmission of 92 percent 3. Polystyrene, polypropylene, and polycarbonates a. Exhibit transmission qualities of 90 percent or better

Slides 23-17

VI.

Manufacturing Processes A. Plastic resins (liquid, powder, or beads) are combined with additives, then processed to produce products 1. Common manufacturing processes include blow molding, calendaring, compression molding, casting, extrusion, expandable bead molding, form molding, injection molding, laminating, rotational casting, transfer molding, and thermoforming

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Slides 23-18

B. Blow molding 1. Place heated, preformed plastic tube called a parison in a forming die; air pressure is raised inside the plastic tube, forcing it to conform to the shape of the die. The die is opened and the part is removed a. Most bottles are formed this way

Slides 23-19

C. Calendaring 1. Move a plastic material in a liquid state through a series of rollers: creates a thin plastic film as the material solidifies. Vapor barrier and floor coverings are calendared products D. Compression molding 1. Place plastic resin in powder form in a heated mold; apply heat and pressure.

The resin melts and fills the mold

Slides 23-20

E. Casting 1. Pour plastic in a liquid state into a cavity in a mold to fill the cavity and harden F. Expandable bead molding 1. Small granules of resin mixed with expanding agent and placed in the steamheated rolling drum. Granules expand, cool and are transferred to a mold in which they are heated until they fuse together

Slides 23-21 and 23-22

G. Form molding 1. Expanding agent is mixed with plastic granules or powder and injected into a mold, heated and melts the resin, forming a gas that expands the resin to fill the mold cavity H. Injection molding 1. Granules or powder resin fed into a heated cylinder then forced by a ram into a cold mold where it solidifies I. Laminating 1. Materials to be laminated are impregnated with plastic resin, placed together, and bonded by application of heat and pressure

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Slides 23-23

J.

Rotational molding 1. Forms hollow one-piece items from polyethylene powders 2. Resin placed in a mold, which is heated while rotating K. Transfer molding 1. A combination of compression and injection molding: resin is made liquid in the transfer chamber outside the mold, then injected into the mold, where it fills the cavity and solidifies

Slides 23-24

L. Thermoforming 1. Involves two commonly used procedures: a. Vacuum forming: involves placing a heated sheet of plastic over a mold cavity and pulling a vacuum below it. Atmospheric pressure forces the sheet to the shape of the mold b. Pressure forming: involves placing a heated sheet of plastic over a mold cavity and increasing the pressure behind the sheet, forcing it into the cavity of the mold

Slides 23-25

VII.

Recycled Plastic Products A. Plastic products identification codes have enhanced the recovery and sorting of plastics in the waste stream 1. Six polymer codes identified numerically as: (1) Polyethyleneterephthalate (PET); (2) High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE); (3) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC); (4) Low-Density Polyethylene (LDPE); (5) Polypropylene (PP); and (6) Polystyrene (PS)

Slides 23-26

B. Post-consumer resins (PCRs) are used as a substitute for raw materials in products made traditionally from other materials 1. An example of this reuse is recycled-plastic lumber (RPL) a. RPL products are resistant to insects, rot, moisture, and many chemicals; are benign to the environment; and require no chemical treatments to achieve or maintain their properties.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Slides 23-27

2. Another example of PCR’s in construction is polyester/PET or Polyethylene Terephthalate carpet a. The carpet is made by grinding soft drink bottles into chips that are heattreated and forced through a die to produce thin fibers b. PET carpet is non-allergenic, more stain-resistant than other carpet materials, and highly resistant to mold and mildew

Slides 23-28 and 23-29

VIII. Plastic Construction Materials A. Thermoplastics 1. Acrylonitrile–Butadiene–Styrene 2. Acrylics 3. Cellulosics 4. Fluorocarbons 5. Nylons 6. Polycarbonates 7. Polyethylene 8. Polypropylene 9. Polystyrene 10. Vinyls B. Figure 23.8: The Alliance Arena is one of the world's largest structures made of ETFE laminate

Slides 23-30 and 23-31

C. Thermosets 1. Epoxies 2. Formaldehyde 3. Polyesters 4. Polyurethanes 5. Silicones D. Figure 23.12: Silicone sealants and caulks are in common use to seal gaps, joints, and crevices in buildings

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look through their homes and find different types of plastics.

Ask the students to identify the types they find.

2. Have the students visit a local store that sells plastic products used for construction purposes. Have them price the various items they find and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What two atoms form the nucleus for the derivation of the material plastics? Carbon atom and silicon atom.

2.

What is the process called that enables carbon atoms to bond with other atoms?

Covalent bonding.

3.

What is a single molecule called? A single molecule is called a monomer.

4.

What is formed when several monomers link together? Combining monomers forms a polymer.

5.

What is the valence of the carbon atom? Carbon atom has a valance of four.

6.

What are the two major classifications of plastics? Thermoplastics and thermosets.

7.

Why is it possible to heat and reform thermoplastic materials? When heat is applied the bonding between molecules weakens and the material expands and becomes soft.

8.

Why is it that thermoset plastics cannot be reheated and reformed into new shapes?

Thermosetting plastics are formed by a chemical process and the molecules cannot slide by each other when heated.

9.

What are the major groups of additives used in formulating plastics? Plastic additives are plasticizers, fillers, stabilizers and colorants.

10. How do plasticizers change the properties of plastic? Plasticizers lessen the bond between the chainlike molecules.

11. What is a common way to reduce the cost of plastics? Cost of plastics reduced by adding fillers.

12. What is added to plastic to increase its strength? Stabilizers increase the strength of plastics.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

13. What colorants are used to produce desired colors? Colorants include organic dyes and inorganic pigments.

14. What are the most important mechanical properties of plastics used in construction?

Mechanical properties include tensile strength, stiffness, impact strength, hardness, and creep.

15. What are the two major considerations when considering the thermal properties of plastics? Major considerations of thermal properties are service temperature and flammability.

16. Which plastics have the lowest thermal conductivity? Foam plastics have the lowest thermal conductivity.

17. What is the major danger produced by burning plastics? Burning plastics produce dangerous toxic fumes.

18. When plastics deteriorate due to chemical action, what type of damage occurs? When plastics deteriorate due to chemical action they gain weight and swell, craze and discolor. They have a loss of impact, flexural and tensile strengths.

19. Which plastics have good optical properties? Acrylics, polystyrene, polypropylene and polycarbonates have good optical properties.

20. Identify the following plastics by their standard abbreviation: ABS, PMMA, PA, PE, PVC.

ABS – Acrylonitrile–Butadiene–Styrene PMMA – Polymethyl Methacrylate PA – Polyamides PE – Polyethylene PVC – Polyvinyl Chloride 21. What is the major use for ABS plastics? ABS plastics are used for water pipe and pipe fittings, gas supply lines, waste, drain and sewage disposal vent systems.

22. What type of plastic would you choose for door and window glazing? Acrylic is used for door and window glazing.

23. What type of plastic is used in the manufacture of latex paints? Acrylics are used to make latex used in making latex paints.

24. The vapor barriers used in walls and floors most likely are made from what type of plastic? Vapor barriers are made from polyethylene.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 23: Plastics

25. What type of plastic weathers well and is used for exterior purposes, such as siding, gutters, and window frames? Polyvinyl chloride is used for exterior products as siding and gutters.

26. What thermoset plastic is known for its use as a strong adhesive? Epoxies form strong adhesives.

27. What plastics are used in the manufacture of high-pressure plastic laminates?

Melamine-formaldehyde is used to produce plastic laminates.

28. What type of plastic is used in the manufacture of showers and bathtubs?

Unsaturated polyesters are used to make molded bathtubs and showers.

29. What thermoset plastic is widely used to produce foamed insulation commonly sprayed on roofs and in wall cavities? Polyurethane foams are used to fill in wall, ceiling and floor cavities.

30. What uses are made of silicones in building construction? Silicones are used to make water-resistant coatings.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides:

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slide 24-2

  

Select appropriate types of insulation for various applications in the design of a building Understand how insulation is used to control heat transfer Be aware of the problems caused by moisture penetrating the insulation and learn how to design an assembly of materials to reduce moisture transmission

Introduction This chapter discusses thermal insulation and vapor barriers. It reviews various types of insulation and goes over the basic principles of heat transfer. The chapter stresses the importance of being knowledgeable about the types of materials used as insulators and barriers for specific projects.

Lesson Plan Slides 24-3 and 24-4

I.

Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers A. Structures are exposed to a variety of weather extremes including temperature swings, driving rain and wind, and below ground water 1. Thermal insulation in buildings is an important factor in achieving both energy efficiency and interior thermal comfort B. Moisture related problems are among the largest set of problems buildings experience within the United States 1. Moisture management in building construction entails preventing water, vapor and air transport, while promoting drying and ventilation

Slides 24-5

C. Thermal Envelope 1. The building envelope, its walls, windows and roof, constitutes this interface between the controlled indoor environment and outdoor climate 2. Figure 24.1: Any building surface that separates conditioned interior air from outside air is insulated to form the thermal envelope

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

Slides 24-6

II.

Heat Transfer A. Heat transfer is the movement of thermal energy from a hotter material to a cooler one 1. Heat is transferred by radiation, convection, or conduction, or a combination of these 2. Heat quantity is measured in British thermal units B. Figure 24.7: Loose fill insulation is machine blown into the areas to be insulated

Slides 24-7

III.

Conduction A. Conduction is the transfer of thermal energy through direct molecular movement within a material or between materials in direct physical contact 1. Thermal conductance (C) a. A measure used to indicate the amount of heat that will pass through a specified thickness of the material

Slides 24-8

2. Thermal resistance (R) a. A measure used to indicate the ability of a material to resist the flow of heat through it 3. Thermal transmittance (U) a. A measure of the amount of heat that would pass through an assembly of various materials 4. Thermal bridge a. When a material or assembly is un-insulated from exterior to interior, it allows for conductive heat transfer from the warm side to the cold

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

Slides 24-9

5. Continuous insulation (ci) a. Insulation that is continuous across all exterior surfaces of an assembly without thermal bridges other than fasteners and mechanical openings. b. It can be installed on the interior or exterior c. It must be integral to any translucent surface (glazing) of the building

Slides 24-10

B. Convection 1. Heat transfer by convection involves the transfer of heat by the movement of heated liquids or gases a. Heat travels by natural or forced (mechanical) currents of air that absorb the heat brought to a space i. As warm air passes over a cool surface, it transfers some of its heat to the cool material

Slides 24-11

C. Radiation 1. Involves the transmission of heat by electromagnetic waves a. Heat is transferred by radiation when surfaces exchange electromagnetic waves

Slides 24-12

2. Light, infrared radiation or UV radiation a. Radiation exchange occurs between two surfaces when one is warmer than the other and they are in “view” of each other 3. Mean radiant temperature (MRT) a. The average temperature experienced from the combination of all the surface temperatures in a room: i. Walls ii. Floors iii. Ceilings iv. Furniture v. People

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

Slides 24-13 and 24-14

IV.

Insulation Materials A. A variety of materials are used to manufacture thermal insulation 1. Organic fibrous insulation materials include: a. cotton, wood, cellulose, wool, and synthetic fibers 2. Organic cellular materials include: a. polyurethane, polystyrene, cork, cotton, recycled materials, and foamed rubber 3. Mineral fibrous materials include: a. rock, glass, slag, and asbestos melted and spun into fibers

Slides 24-15

4. The type and amount of insulation for a building are determined by: a. Building function, local climate conditions, building code requirements, effectiveness in resisting heat transfer, and cost relative to expected savings

Slides 24-16

B. Batts and Blankets 1. Flexible insulation mats made from a variety of materials including: a. Fiberglass b. Mineral wool c. Cotton and wood fibers d. Wool e. Loose-Fill Insulation f. Cellulose

Slides 24-17

C. Rigid Insulation 1. Rigid insulation board is made using organic fibers, such as wood; mineral wool; glass; corkboard; and several forms of expanded plastics such as: a. Expanded polystyrene b. Extruded polystyrene c. Polyisocyanurate foam d. Wood fiber

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

Slides 24-18 and 24-19

D. Blown Insulation 1. Blown insulations utilize polyurethane or phenol-based compounds that combine for high insulation levels a. Most, including polyurethane and isocyanine insulation, contain hazardous chemicals such as benzene and toluene i. Environmental concerns exist during raw material production, transport, manufacture, and installation 2. Open Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam 3. Closed Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam 4. Figure 24.11: Blown insulations generally utilize polyurethane or phenolbased compounds that combine for high insulation levels.

5. Icynene

Slides 24-20

E. Aerogel and Other Innovations 1. Aerogel a. A low-density material derived from gel in which the liquid component of the gel has been replaced with gas

Slides 24-21

2. Gas-Filled Panels (GFP) a. Gas-filled panel insulation materials consist of pockets of low-conductivity gas in a honeycomb foil substrate 3. Structural Insulating Panels (SIP) a. Consist of two rigid wood panel materials with foamed insulating material secured between them, either by gluing billets, as in EPS (Expanded Polystyrene), or with polyurethane foamed and formed in place

Slides 24-22 and 24-23

F. Reflective Barriers 1. Radiant, or reflective, barriers inhibit heat transfer by thermal radiation a. Usually made from aluminum or copper foil in sheets or rolls b. Since thermal energy may also be transferred via conduction or convection, radiant barriers are typically used in addition to other insulation

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

1. Figure 24.14: Radiant barriers are placed directly underneath the roofing material to reflect heat radiated from the hot roof

Slides 24-24 and 24-26

V.

Water and Vapor Considerations A. All buildings during their lifetime will have some form of water or moisture intrusion.

B. Appropriate management of water problems is crucial 1. Protects a building’s structural integrity 2. Ensures the health of the building and occupants C. Rainwater protection D. Water vapor transfer E. Vapor retarders F. Control of air leakage

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look in their attic to find out what type of insulation is used.

Ask the students to identify these types.

2. Have the students visit a local store that sells insulating products used for construction purposes. Have them price the various items they find and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What types of organic fibers are used for insulation? Organic fibers used for insulation include cane, cotton, wood, cellulose, and synthetic fibers.

2.

What kinds of organic cellular materials are used for insulation? Organic cellular materials used for insulation include polyurethane, polystyrene, cork, foamed rubber.

3.

What kinds of mineral cellular materials are used for insulation? Mineral cellular fibers used for insulation include perlite, vermiculite, and foamed glass.

4.

What kinds of mineral fibrous materials are used for insulation? Mineral fibrous materials used for insulation include rock, glass, slag, and asbestos.

5.

In what forms is thermal insulation available? Thermal insulation is available as granular and fibrous loose fill, flexible wool-like blankets and batts, rigid sheets, liquid spray, coast-in-place insulating concrete, and foamed-in-place material.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 24: Thermal Insulation and Vapor Barriers

6.

In what three ways can heat be transferred? Heat can be transferred by radiation, convection, and conduction.

7.

What are the four terms used to describe thermal properties of a material? The thermal properties of a material are thermal conductivity, thermal resistance, and thermal transmittance.

8.

How are insulation materials rated on their ability to resist heat flow? Insulation is rated for its ability to resist heat flow by its R-value. The larger the R-value the greater the resistance to heat flow.

9.

What materials are used for vapor barriers? Vapor barriers are made from coated Kraft paper, aluminum foil, and polyethylene film.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slide 25-2

    

Select the proper bonding agents for various construction assemblies Understand how the various bonding agents cause adherence Select appropriate sealers for use on exterior applications Decide the best way to protect joints in exterior construction Select waterproofing materials best suited for various applications

Introduction This chapter discusses bonding agents, sealers, and sealants. It reviews the various types of each and how to select them based on the project being undertaken. Both interior and exterior applications are reviewed, as well as waterproofing materials.

Lesson Plan Slide 25-3

I.

Bonding Agents A. Compound that joins materials together 1. Bonds to contacting surfaces 2. Joins by mechanical action or specific adhesion 3. Some are a combination of types B. Available as: 1. Powders, solids, liquids, and pastes a. Some require catalyst addition Slide 25-4

C. Curing of Bonding Agents 1. Accomplished by: a. Loss of solvents b. Anaerobic environments c. Catalysts in two-part mixtures d. Cooling of hot melts

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

Slides 25-5 and 25-6

D. Types of Bonding Agents 1. Adhesives a. Made from synthetic materials i. Thermoplastic and thermosetting 2. Glues a. Made from animal and vegetable products 3. Cements a. Made from synthetic rubber suspended in liquid E. Figure 25.3: Epoxies are two-part bonding agents with the resin and catalyst in separate tubes

Slides 25-7

II.

Sealers for Exterior Materials A. Applied to surface of material 1. Protects against water and moisture 2. Bonds surfaces 3. Forms unbroken film over them 4. Fills minute pores, cracks, or openings B. Types: 1. Acrylic, asphalt driveway, silicone, epoxies, and polyurethane

Slides 25-8

C. Wood Sealers 1. Keeps layers of finish from bleeding through final topcoat 2. Provides a base for the finished topcoat 3. For exterior and interior paints: a. Manufacturers give sealer recommendations i. Drywall sealer—latex primer ii. Plaster sealer—wall and wood primer

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

Slides 25-9

III.

Sealants A. Seals joints between construction members 1. Protects against moisture, air, corrosive substances, and foreign objects B. Examples: 1. Expansion joints in large masonry walls 2. Spacers between glass and frames 3. Exterior siding, door, and window openings

Slides 25-10

C. Sealant Performance Considerations 1. Key factor: a. Percent of elongation sealant can stretch and give protection 2. Properties needed: a. Excellent adhesion to material b. Flexible with minimum internal shrinkage c. Resist staining material around it d. Tough non-tacky elastic surface skin

Slides 25-11

D. Types of Sealants 1. Basic types: a. Flexible, moldable adhesive compound i. Low, intermediate, and high-performance levels ii. Available in pourable form, knife grade, gunable form, and preformed tapes b. Solid, flexible preformed shape 2. Variety of materials and shapes

Slides 25-12 and 25-13

E. Sealants and Joint Design 1. Width of a joint between two members a. Determined according to anticipated structural and thermal movement

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

b. Example: i. Sealant tolerates joint movement of 1100 to 250 percent ii. Manufacturer requires joint width two times expected joint movement and at least 1/4 in. (6 mm) wide

Slides 25-14

F. Figure 25.9: A backup rod is used to control the depth of the sealant G. Backup Materials 1. Proper installation a. Depends proper backup materials installed to control sealant depth 2. Backup materials a. Limit sealant depth b. Serves as a bond breaker i. Keeps sealant from bonding to back of joint c. Varies depending on location and use

Slides 25-15

H. Caulking and Glazing 1. Caulking a. Sealing small openings with compound i. Resilient mastic material 2. Glazing a. Sets frame glass in place 3. Commonly made from: a. Silicone, acrylic, butyl, polysulfide, or polyurethane b. Figure 25.12: Caulking compound is a resilient mastic material used to seal joints, cracks, and other small openings

Slides 25-16

IV.

Waterproofing Membranes and Coatings A. Applying material on assembly surface 1. Makes it impervious to water a. Required for foundation walls, roofs, exterior wood or masonry walls, and exposed structural components b. Must resist forces that may force water through the assembly of materials 2. Light-duty coating, heavy-duty membrane, or synthetic membrane

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

Slides 25-17

B. Bituminous Coatings 1. Coating types: a. Hot-mopped coal tar pitch b. Asphalt c. Cold-mopped emulsified asphalt d. Bituminous binder with asbestos fibers e. Solvent-based asphalt damp-proofing compounds

Slides 25-18 and 25-19

C. Liquid Coatings 1. Coating types: a. Acrylic copolymer waterproof coating i. Obtained with fillers and texturing aggregates b. Clear silicone damp-proof liquids i. Penetrate a material c. Liquid waterproofing material i. Self-curing d. Silicate liquid gel i. Reacts with soluble calciums in concrete D. Figure 25.13: Self-curing polyurethane rubber forms a seamless waterproof membrane

Slides 25-20

E. Synthetic Sheet Membranes 1. Made from neoprene, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, butyl, and ethylene propylene a. Bond to foundation walls using manufacturer recommended adhesives 2. Types: a. Composite membranes b. Sheet membranes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

Slides 25-21

F. Cement-Based Waterproofing 3. Carefully graded aggregates a. Produce high-density and high-strength waterproof coating i. Applied with a trowel or by special procedure ii. Used on concrete masonry and stone iii. Employed on water reservoirs, swimming pools, basements, parapet walls, and heavily exposed surfaces

Slides 25-22

G. Lead Waterproofing 4. Used when waterproofing must be of uncompromised security a. Areas of grass, fountains, and reflecting pools built over underground facilities b. Must be at least six pound lead thick to allow for burning necessary to join sheets

Slides 25-23

H. Bentonite Clay Waterproofing 5. Decomposed volcanic ash a. High content of montmorillonite i. Absorbs large amounts of water, causing it to swell many times its original volume ii. Forms waterproof barrier 6. Types: a. Bentonite panels b. Sprayed bentonite c. Bentonite–sand mixture

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look around their city at various buildings to locate the expansion joints and try to ascertain what type of product was used on the joints. Ask them to report their findings, including anything that seems amiss.

2. Ask students to visit a local store that sells bonding agents used for construction purposes. Have them price various items and report their findings to the class.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the two ways bonding agents hold materials together? Materials are bonded by mechanical action or specific adhesion.

2.

In what ways do various bonding agents cure? Bonding agents cure by loss-of-solvent, anaerobic environments, catalysts in two-part mixtures and cooling of hot melts.

3.

What are the three major classifications of bonding agents? The classifications of bonding agents are adhesives, glues, and cements.

4.

What are the two classes of adhesives? The two classes of adhesives are thermoplastic and thermoset.

5.

What is the source of materials for making glues? Glues are made from animals and vegetable products such as bones, hides, fish, and milk.

6.

From what materials are cements made? Cements are made from synthetic rubber such as neoprene, nitrile, and polysulfide.

7.

What is the difference between a sealer and a sealant? A sealer has adhesive properties and is closely related to bonding agents. They form a film over a surface.

Sealants are materials used to seal joints between members in construction.

8.

What is a working joint? Working joints are joints in exterior walls that allow for expansion and contraction of the materials in the wall.

9.

What are the two basic methods of protecting exterior joints? Joints can be protected with sealants and pre-fabricated covers.

10. What the two types of sealants? Two types of sealants are deformable or elastic/elastomeric.

11. What are the performance levels of sealants? Performance levels of sealants are the percentage of elongation, adhesiveness, flexibility, resist staining and have a nontacky elastic skin.

12. What purpose does a sealant backup rod serve? Back-up rods control the depth of the opening into which the sealant will be placed.

13. Why are tapes sometimes used with sealants in joints? Tapes are another form of backup material. They are used to keep the sealant from adhering to joint surfaces where bonding is not wanted.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 25: Bonding Agents, Sealers, and Sealants

14. What forces tend to force water through an assembly of materials? Forces that tend to move water through materials are gravity, hydrostatic pressure, a difference in air pressure on one side of an assembly.

15. What is bentonite? Bentonite is a clay formed from decomposed volcanic ash.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

Table of Contents Learning Objectives.......................................................................................................................... 2 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 6 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 26-2

• • •

Describe the properties of bitumen and how these properties influence decisions as to how bituminous materials might be used Interpret the results of laboratory tests and use these for decision making Be aware of the array of bituminous products available and their applications

Introduction This chapter discusses bituminous materials and their properties. It reviews how properties of various bituminous materials relate to specific uses in the construction industry. In addition, the chapter examines various tests performed with regard to bituminous materials and how to choose the best material for a specific project.

Lesson Plan Slides 26-3

I.

Bitumens A. A mixture of organic liquids made of complex hydrocarbons 1. Occur naturally or are heat-produced from materials like coal and wood 2. Highly viscous, black, and sticky 3. Gaseous, liquid, semisolid, or solid states 4. Asphalt, tar, and coal tar pitch are the most commonly used bituminous materials in construction

Slides 26-4

II.

Properties of Bitumens A. Excellent water resistance B. Flammable and will ignite when heated to flashpoint C. Softening point is crucial and varies D. Exhibit cold-flow properties E. Good viscosity properties F. High in ductility

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

Slides 26-5

III.

Asphalt A. Dark brown to black cementitious material 1. Semisolid or solid form 2. Consists of bitumen found in deposits of natural asphalt a. Used in roofing, siding, and paving material b. Used in paints, adhesives, acid- and alkali-resistant coatings, dampproofing, and waterproofing solutions 3. Grade 0 (thinnest) to grade 5 (thickest)

Slides 26-6 and 26-7

B. Roofing asphalt types: 1. Type I --- Dead level 2. Type II --- Flat 3. Type III --- Steep 4. Type IV --- Special steep C. Asphalt cements 1. Graded from softest (AR 1000) to hardest (AR 16000) 2. Figure 26.3: Aggregates, about 90 percent of a paving mix’s weight, give the mix strength with the asphalt acting as a binder

Slides 26-8

D. Residual asphalt blended with various solvents 1. Produces cutback asphalt in three classifications: a. Rapid curing (RC) b. Medium curing (MC) c. Slow curing (SC) E. Emulsified asphalts 1. Anionic or cationic

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

Slides 26-9

F. Asphalt Paving 1. Properties: a. Cementitious substance that binds with ingredients b. Withstands exposure to hot and cold c. Resistant to salt, acids, and alkalis d. Experiences little cracking due to flexible, plastic, and ductile nature

Slides 26-10

G. Laboratory Tests of Asphalt 1. Viscosity test a. Determines flow properties of asphalts at application and service temperatures 2. Flashpoint test a. Determines temperature to which asphalt may be heated without instantaneous flash danger when exposed to open flame 3. Ductility test a. Determines how much asphalt will stretch at various temperatures below its softening point

Slides 26-11 and 26-12

4. Solubility test a. Ascertains purity of asphalt cement 5. Specific gravity test a. Ratio of weight of a given volume of material to the weight of an equal volume of water b. Figure 26.5: A Pavement Quality Indicator is used to measure the specific gravity of asphalt pavement 6. Softening point test a. Tests how various grades of asphalt soften at different temperatures 7. Distillation test a. Finds proportions of asphalt and diluent present in sample b. Finds how much diluent distills off sample at various temperatures

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

Slides 26-13 and 26-14

IV.

Other Products Made With Bituminous Materials A. Coal tar pitch 1. Dark brown to black hydrocarbon obtained through distillation of coke-oven tar B. Felts 1. Sheet material made from cellulose fibers of organic materials a. Wood, paper, rags, glass fibers, and asbestos C. Ice and water shield 1. Roofing membrane composed of two waterproofing materials bonded into one layer D. Figure 26.6: Tar paper is used as an underlayment for shingles, sheathing paper, and as laminations in built-up roof construction

Slides 26-15

E. Fiberglass sheet material 1. Fiberglass mats impregnated with asphalt a. Not ‘‘saturated’’ because glass fibers will not absorb asphalt F. Fireproofing paper 1. Made using asbestos fibers a. Pressed mat-like felt or woven sheets G. Waterproof coatings 1. Asphalt waterproofing used on masonry walls above and below grade

Slides 26-16

V.

Bituminous Roof Coverings A. Roll roofing 1. Organic felt or fiberglass mats as base a. Viscous bituminous coating is applied to the base 2. Made in four types: a. Smooth-surfaced b. Mineral-surfaced c. Mineral-surfaced selvage-edged d. Pattern-edged

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

Slides 26-17 and 26-18

B. Hot built-up roof membranes 1. Alternate plies of organic or fiberglass roofing felt a. Hot bitumen coating mopped over each layer b. Generally three or more layers 2. Aggregate surface forming the top of the roof a. Typically derived from gravel, marble chips, or slag C. Figure 26.7 Bituminous waterproofing coatings are applied in one or more hot or cold mopped coats.

Slides 26-19 and 26-20

D. Modified Asphalt Roofing Systems 1. Composed of polymer-modified bitumen 2. Reinforced with one or more plies of fabric a. Polyester glass fiber 3. Variety of modifiers and types of reinforcing plies a. Designed for use on almost every type of construction assembly E. Cold-applied asphalt roofing systems 1. Use coated base sheet, fabric, or the like 2. Liquid waterproofing agent is applied at ambient temperatures on base 3. Selection depends on: a. Levels of maintenance, repair, and service expected b. Compatibility between cold-applied materials and existing substrate

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look at their roof, road, city roads, town center roads, and buildings in the downtown area of their city. Ask them to report the types of bituminous materials used to form each.

2. Have students visit a local store that sells bituminous materials used for construction purposes. Have them price various items they find and report their findings to the class.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What will prevent bitumen from adhering to a concrete wall? Bitumen will not bond to wet and dirty surfaces.

2.

What is the point at which bitumen will burn? Bitumen is flammable and will ignite when heated to its flashpoint.

3.

What property of bitumen allows it to spread after it is in place? Bitumens exhibit flow characteristics which means they tend to flow and spread because of their makeup.

This increases as the temperatures increase.

4.

What binder is used with aggregate to produce quality asphalt pavements? The binder in asphalt pavements are aggregates such as crushed stone, gravel and sand.

5.

From what source are most asphalts obtained? Asphalt is found in deposits of natural asphalt. It is also made from the residue of the distillation of petroleum.

6.

How do cutback asphalts differ from asphalt emulsions? Cutback asphalts are those left after the petroleum has been processed into gasoline and other products.

Asphalt emulsions are emulsified asphalt cement mixed with water.

7.

What are the two major uses for cutback asphalts? Cutback asphalts are used to stabilize the granular soil of a roadbed before it is paved and serves as a binder for a finished road surface for light traffic.

8.

What can happen that will cause asphalt emulsions on a roadbed not to harden?

Asphalt may not harden if the weather conditions are such so water evaporation will not occur such as a rainy season.

9.

What asphalt product is used to make roof repairs? Roof repairs are made with plastic asphalt cements and quick-setting asphalt cement.

10. What are the big differences between saturated felts and fiberglass felts? Saturated felts are made with an organic mat saturated with coal tar pitch and coated with a surface layer of thin asphalt. Fiberglass felts have fiberglass mats impregnated with asphalt.

11. Why are fiberglass felt mats not saturated with asphalt? Fiberglass mats are not saturated with asphalt because the glass fibers will not absorb the asphalt.

12. What types of fiber are used in making fireproofing paper? Fireproofing paper is made using asbestos fibers.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 26: Bituminous Materials

13. What are the fire rating classes used to rate asphalt roofing materials?

Class A: highest rating Class B: moderate protection Class C: minimal protection 14. Which fire rating class indicates the highest fire protection? Class A is the highest fire rating.

15. How does a built-up roof differ from one covered with roll roofing? Built-up roof consists of alternate plies of organic or fiberglass roofing felt with a hot bitumen coating mopped over each layer. Roll roofing is a single layer of organic or fiberglass mat installed over the roof decking. Sometimes a second layer is nailed over the first layer.

16. What are the various materials used to make fiberglass shingles? Fiberglass shingles are made using a fiberglass mat covered with an asphalt top coating into which mineral aggregates are rolled.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 27: Roofing Systems

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 27: Roofing Systems

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 6

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 27: Roofing Systems

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 27-2

  

Recognize the vast array of roofing systems available Select the proper roofing system for various applications Understand the proper installation of roofing systems

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction and overview of the process of roofing. It describes the various types of roofing systems available, products and materials used, and reasons for choosing a particular type of roofing system. The chapter also describes how to properly install each type of roofing system.

Lesson Plan Slides 27-3 and 27-4

I.

Roofing Systems A. Proper roof design and construction is critical to a building’s ability to provide a safe and comfortable enclosure 1. First line of defense against rain, snow and sun 2. Roofing materials tabulated by the square a. New building design b. Replacement or re-cover of an existing system B. Roof systems are generally divided into two categories: 1. Low-slope and steep-slope a. Nearly flat and provide slow rainwater runoff 2. Steep-slope a. Permit rapid runoff of rain, reducing the likelihood of penetration through their water-resistant surfaces

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 27: Roofing Systems

Slides 27-5

II.

Building Codes A. Building codes govern the materials, design, construction, and quality of a roof structure and covering. Includes: 1. Ability to resist rain and wind 2. Durability specifications 3. Compatibility of materials 4. Physical characteristics 5. Fire protection

Slides 27-6 and 27-7

B. Because of its large surface area, roofing plays an important role in fire protection 1. Roofing systems are rated as entire systems, including roof deck, method of attachment to the deck (fasteners, hot bitumen, cold adhesives), vapor retarder, thermal insulation, roof membrane, and surfacing C. ASTM Standard E108 specifies four classifications of roof covering: 1. Class A roof coverings are effective against severe fire exposure 2. Class B roof coverings are effective against moderate fire exposure 3. Class C roof coverings are effective against light fire exposure

Slides 27-8

D. Local weather conditions are also addressed in the building codes as strong winds can damage or dislodge shingles and sheet materials 1. Underwriters Laboratories lists wind rated systems in their Roofing Materials and Systems Directory as Class 30, 60 or 90

Slides 27-9 and 27-10

III.

Roofing Components A. Principal design considerations in the design and detailing of a roof system 1. Roof Decks 2. Vapor Retarders 3. Insulation 4. Flashing 5. Finished Roofing B. Figure 27.3: Vapor retarders are placed on the warm side of the roof assembly

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 27: Roofing Systems

Slides 27-11

IV.

Low Slope Roof Assemblies A. Defined as a roof having a pitch of less than 3:12. Nearly flat and water drains slowly 1. Built-up roofing 2. Modified Bitumen Membranes 3. Single Ply Membranes 4. Spray and Liquid Applied Membranes 5. Low Slope Metal Roofing 6. Low Slope Roof Flashing 7. Low Slope Roof Drainage

Slides 27-12

V.

Steep Slope Roof Assemblies A. Defined as a roof with a slope of 3:12 or greater. Have sufficient slope to permit water to drain quickly from its surface 1. Shingle Roofing a. Asphalt Shingles b. Wood Shingles and Shakes c. Slate Shingles d. Clay and Concrete Roof Tiles 2. Photovoltaic Roofing

Slides 27-13

VI.

Steep Slope Metal Roof Assemblies A. Consists of cold-formed, corrugated, fluted, or ribbed metal sheets 1. Installed in sheets that are fastened together to maintain water tightness 2. Steep slope metal roofs accelerate the rate of water run-off due to their smooth surface characteristics 3. Reduce the likelihood of debris build-up, and formation of mold and mildew

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 27: Roofing Systems

Slides 27-14

B. Metal Roofing Materials 1. Aluminum panels, copper, steel, zinc C. Standing Seam Roofing 1. Seams raised above the level of the roofing panel 2. Panels run from the ridge of the roof all the way down to the eaves 3. No horizontal seams and fewer total seams

Slides 27-15 and 27-16

D. Flat and Batten Seam Roofing 1. A flat seam metal roof consists of a series of metal roofing panels installed with a series of flat rather than standing seams 2. The roof panels create a single, smooth surface across a roof E. Exposed Fastener Metal Roofing 1. Typically use a lighter gauge metal 2. Popular choice for agricultural building F. Figure 27.39: A flat seam metal roof consists of a series of metal roofing panels installed with a series of flat rather than standing seams

Slides 27-17

G. Steep Roof Flashing and Drainage 1. Preformed flashings, drip edges, rake moldings, and ridge caps colormatched to products a. Color-matched coil stock for fabricating custom components on site is available b. For plumbing vents and other roof penetrations, most manufacturers supply a moldable base flashing that conforms to the rib profile of their roofing

Slides 27-18

VII.

Cool Roofing A. ASHRAE Standard 90.1 defines a cool roof as having a minimum solar reflectance of 0.70 and min. thermal emittance of 0.75 1. The standard allows for a reduction in roof insulation if a cool roof is used 2. Reflective roofs should be used to complement insulation rather than a substitute for it

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 27: Roofing Systems

Slides 27-19 and 27-20

B. Cool roofing systems utilize reflective white membranes and ballast, white metal, or paints and coatings to both reflect and emit heat 1. Coatings include organic and complex inorganic pigments (CICPs) that are either rolled or sprayed on the roof surface 2. For membrane roof systems, light-colored aggregate or mineral granule cap sheets will substantially reduce maximum surface temperatures over black membranes

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look at their roof, road, city roads, town center roads, and buildings in their downtown. Have them report the types of roofing systems used to form roofs on several different buildings.

2. Have the students visit a local store that sells roofing materials used for construction purposes, price various items, and report their findings to the class. Have the students ask someone in the store what the most popular type of roof in the area is and why.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

List the four fire classifications for roof coverings. Class A, Class B, Class C, and nonclassified.

2.

What types of roof decking are used for low-slope roofs? Wood, plywood, structural wood fiber panels, lightweight insulating concrete, pre-cast, and poured gypsum.

3.

Why are vapor retarders an important part of a roof assembly? Vapor retarders block the penetration of water vapor.

4.

What materials are used for vapor retarders? Vapor retarders used include sheathing paper, bituminous materials as asphalt roofing felt, polyethylene, and aluminum foil.

5.

Describe the process for installing a built-up roof covering. Cover deck with vapor retarder. Apply 3 to 5 layers of asphalt-coated base felt bonded with coatings of hot mopped bitumen. Cover top coating with a layer of roofing asphalt and then embed gravel.

6.

What is a modified bitumen? Modified bitumen membranes combine polymermodifier asphalt and a polyester or fiberglass mat.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 27: Roofing Systems

7.

How are single-ply roofing membranes secured to a roof deck? Single-ply roofing membranes with ballast, mechanically fastened with batten bars and screws.

Thermoset materials can be bonded with an adhesive.

8.

What types of single-ply roofing membranes are available? Chlorosulfonated polyethylene, ethylene propylene diene monomer, polyvinyl chloride, styrenebutadiene–styrene.

9.

Describe the makeup of a spray-applied roof coating. Spray applied roof coating consists of a polyurethane foam insulation layer over the deck which is topped with a protective coating. Mineral aggregates may be applied over the coating.

10. How are standing-seam metal roof panels joined to form a watertight joint? Standing seams on metal roofing are formed with a seaming machine.

11. How are standing-seam metal roof panels secured to a deck? Metal roof panels are secured to the deck with a manufactured supplied clip.

12. Why are rooftop walkways needed? Rooftop walkways are used to protect the finished roofing materials as workers walk on the roof to reach mechanical devices needing their service.

13. List several locations where flashing is required. Flashing is used where a roof meets a wall, at expansion joints around objects penetrating the roof.

14. What roof covering materials are used on steep-slope roofs? Asphalt shingles, wood shingles and shakes, slate shingles, cement-fiber shingles, clay and concrete tile, and metal roofing.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 1-2 and 1-3

 

Identify the various types of glass products used in building construction Select appropriate glass products for various applications

Introduction This chapter discusses glass. It reviews the types of glass products used most often in building construction. In addition to the explanations of various glass products, the chapter discusses when and why particular types are used.

Lesson Plan I.

Glass A. An inorganic mixture that has been fused at a high temperature and cooled without crystallization 1. Unusual internal structure: a. mechanically it is rigid and has the characteristics of a solid b. atoms in glass are arranged in a random order similar to those of a liquid B. Glass is technically a super-cooled liquid

II.

Types of Glass A. Glass consists of three basic ingredients: 1. Silica oxide makes up 75 percent of the mix 2. Fluxes that help silica oxide to melt at lower, more practical temperatures include soda ash, potash, and lithium carbonate 3. Additional lime and alumina stabilizers provide water resistance and stability B. Six basic types of glass classified by their ability to resist heat 1. Soda-lime-silica 2. Lead-alkali-silica 3. Fused silica 4. Ninety-six percent silica 5. Borosilicate (Pyrex) 6. Aluminosilicate

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

III.

The Manufacture of Glass A. Float glass 1. Producing molten glass in furnace a. Conveyed to float bath B. Available as regular or heavy float glass C. Three forms with specific qualities: 1. Silvering 2. Mirror glazing 3. Door and window glazing D. Figure 28.2: The float glass manufacturing process E. Sheet glass 1. More economical than float glass 2. More distortion than float glass a. Not as widely used 3. Available in three grades: a. AA (best) b. A (good) c. B (general glazed)

IV.

Properties of Soda-Lime-Silica Glass A. Mechanical properties 1. Brittle 2. Remains elastic a. Up to ultimate tensile strength B. No clearly defined tensile strength 1. Depends on the glass surface condition 2. Increased by chemical and heat treatments C. Thermal properties 1. High thermal conductivity 2. Thermal expansion must be considered D. Chemical properties 1. Durable and resistant to corrosion 2. Does not absorb moisture or chemical elements in the ground or atmosphere a. Few exceptions E. Electrical properties 1. Good electrical insulator a. Widely used for applications where this and other properties make it useful

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

F. Optical properties 1. Not completely transparent to radiant energy a. Fraction of solar radiation is reflected, another absorbed, and third transmitted V.

Heat Treating Glass A. Annealing 1. Temperature raised to relieve strains developed and lowered to cool glass uniformly B. Tempering 1. Increases strength by raising the temperature of glass shy of its softening point and blowing jets of cold air on it C. Heat strengthening 1. Heated and cooled like tempered glass D. Chemical strengthening 1. Chemically strengthened via immersion in a molten salt bath

VI.

Finishes A. Etching 1. Produces surface that can range from almost opaque to smooth but translucent B. Sandblasting 1. Blasting surface with coarse-grained sand particles blown by compressed air C. Patterned finish 1. Texture or pattern rolled on as glass is drawn through furnace D. Figure 28.5: Finishes available for glass include etched (a), patterned (b), fritted (c), and tinted (d) among others E. Silvering 1. Spraying silver nitrate and tin chloride surface as it moves on a conveyor F. Ceramic Frit 1. Coated with ceramic frit fired at high temperatures G. Tinting 1. Glass infused with color

VII.

Physical Properties of Glazing Systems A. Solar heat gain factor (SHGF) 2. The energy entering the interior through a glazing unit directly B. U-Value (U) 1. Measure of overall heat transfer a. Rate of conductive, convective, and radiative heat due to temperature difference between inside and outside C. Visible light transmittance (Tv) 1. Portion of incoming solar radiation in visible wavelengths

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

D. Shading coefficient (Sc) 1. Ratio of solar heat gain of glazing unit to solar heat gain of clear float glass E. Emissivity (e) 1. Ability of object to radiate energy VIII. Glass Products A. Tempered glass 1. Used when strength beyond that of standard annealed glass is required B. Laminated glass 1. Used when glazing is subject to possible breakage or security is required C. Reflective Glass 1. Has one surface covered with thin, transparent layers of the metallic film.

Several metals and mineral oxides produce a variety of colors and heat reflection ratings 2. Figure 28.7: Compared to clear glass, reflective glass reduces the amount of solar energy transmitted through a glazed opening D. Low-E glass 1. Coatings applied to glass panes to reduce window unit’s heat transfer 2. Three types available: a. High solar gain b. Moderate solar gain c. Low solar gain E. Insulating glass 1. Two layers of glass with an airtight, dehydrated air space between them a. A better rating of thermal resistance can be achieved through the introduction of materials, such as argon or krypton, to replace the air inside the glazing cavity 2. Edge seals are made of metal spacers with a thermal break, fiberglass, plastic, butyl and foam F. Wired glass 1. Safety glass with a mesh of small diameter wires rolled into sheets of molten glass a. Wires hold glass shards together when broken G. Spandrel glass 1. Ceramic-coated to clad exterior walls a. Eliminates corrosion

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

H. Bent glass 1. Provides components with unique and dramatic looks a. Available in clear float, tinted float, obscure, wire, Pyrex, patterned, and others I. Ceramic Glass 1. Ceramic glass is the standard for many fire-rated glazing applications a. Can offer fire-ratings for up to 90 min.

J. Figure 28.13: Bent laminated glass is used in a variety of architectural applications K. Architectural beveled glass 1. Unique transition from outside to inside a. Outstanding architectural detail L. Channel glass 1. Consists of self-supporting cast glass channels in a U shape 2. Referred to under the trade name Profilit M. Glass blocks 1. Made as solid and cavity units laid in mortar bed similar to masonry units 2. Permit light to be diffused, reduced, or reflected N. Figure 28.17: Photovoltaic glazing provides enclosure and partially shaded light for a building while simultaneously generating electricity O. Smart glazing 1. Changes optical properties in response to fluctuations a. Solar radiation intensity, changes in temperature, or introduction of electric charges P. Photovoltaic glazing 1. Enables glazing to provide enclosure and lighting a. Simultaneously generates electricity Q. Self-cleaning glass 1. Manufactured with the same advanced pyrolytic technology used to produce glass panels for electronic and photovoltaic solar cell applications a. The glass uses outdoor daylight to clean windows in a two-step process: i. The surface uses energy from the sun to break down, loosen and destroy dirt and organic matter ii. The water sheets off the surface when it rains so windows dry without spots and streaks

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

Chapter Hints 1. Have students look around their home to find different types of glass materials. Ask them to report their findings to the class.

2. Have the students visit a local store that sells glass materials used for construction purposes. Ask them to price the various items they find and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What are the basic types of glass? Lean-alkali-silica, fused silica, 96 percent silica, borosilicate, aluminosilicate, soda-lime-silica.

2.

What type of glass is used in most construction applications? Soda-lime-silica is widely used in building construction.

3.

What are the two types of float glass? Two types of float glass are regular float and heavy float.

4.

What are the grades of sheet glass? Grades of sheet glass: AA: Best, A: Good, B: General.

5.

How does a small scratch or nick in glass reduce the tensile strength of a sheet? A small scratch causes tensile stresses to concentrate at that weakened point.

6.

How does the thermal conductivity of glass compare with that of metal? Thermal conductivity of glass is high but lower than most metals.

7.

Why is glass resistant to corrosion? Glass resists corrosion because it is not porous, will not absorb moisture or chemical elements in the ground or atmosphere.

8.

How does glass rate on optical clarity? Clear sheet glass permits passage of 86 to 89 percent of visible light. With coatings it often transmits below 50 percent of visible light.

9.

What types of soda-lime-silica glass are annealed? Moist types are annealed.

10. List the types of heat-treated glass from the weakest to the strongest. Annealed, tempered, and heat strengthened.

11. In addition to heat-treating glass, how can it be strengthened? Glass can be strengthened by tempering, heat strengthening, and chemical strengthening.

12. List the types of surface finishes commonly used on glass. Surface finishes include fire, etching, sandblasting, patterned, silvering, ceramic frit, and tinting.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 28: Glass

13. What type of glass helps reduce heat transfer into a building in the summer and heat loss to the outside during the winter? Low-E glass retards heat loss in winter and heat gain in summer.

14. How does tinting affect the performance of glass? Tinting reduces transmittance of light, reduces glare, heat reduction, and transmits diffused light.

15. What are the main reasons for using laminated glass? Laminated glass is used where security is important or other possible places where breakage might occur.

16. How does insulating glass differ in construction from laminated glass? Insulating glass has two layers of glass with an airtight, dehydrated air space between them.

Laminated glass consists of several layers of glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayers between them.

17. What three things occur to produce solar heat gain when solar energy strikes a glass surface? Solar energy striking the glass can transmit the energy through the glass, reflect it, or absorb it in the glass.

18. How much visible light is transmitted through reflective glass? Reflective glass will transmit from 8 to 45 percent of the visible light.

19. What are the two most important features of wired glass? Wire glass holds the shards when broken and maintains its integrity as a fire barrier.

20. What type of finish is used on spandrel glass? Spandrel glass is ceramic-coated with an opaque ceramic frit which is fired on the surface.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 8

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 29-2

  

Identify the types of doors, windows, entrances, and storefronts available Apply this information to the decision-making processes as these units are selected for a building Understand the properties of various units as they relate to fire, security, privacy, and operation

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction and overview of doors, windows, entrances, and storefronts. It describes many variations of these products. The chapter reviews each product’s properties, including best use, fire safety, security, privacy, and basic operation. A basic overview of how to properly choose the best door, window, entrance, or storefront is provided.

Lesson Plan Slides 29-3

I.

Doors A. Doors are one of the most essential parts of any building. They provide: 1. Access between interior and exterior 2. Passage and privacy between interior spaces 3. Security, privacy, thermal, and fire protection B. Choice of door depends on: 1. Volume of traffic, security requirements, and desired appearance

Slides 29-4

C. Three basic operating types: 1. Swinging, sliding, and folding D. Specialty doors used in commercial construction include: 1. Overhead and revolving doors E. Manufactured from: 1. Wood, hardboard, plastic, metal, and glass F. Figure 29.10: A typical insulated core metal door in a wood jamb, frequently used in residential applications.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

Slides 29-5

II.

Door Operating and Material Types A. The frame that holds a door in place is called the jamb B. The bottom member of the door jamb is referred to as the sill or threshold C. A lintel or header at the top of the rough opening transfers any structural loads to the adjacent wall D. Sides of door are named according to their location: hinge stile and lock stile E. The top and bottom pieces that make up the horizontal frame members are called rails

Slides 29-6

III.

Swinging Doors A. Most commonly used operating type B. Hinged along one side to allow the door to swing away from the doorframe in one direction only.

C. The axis of rotation is usually vertical D. In hinged overhead doors, the axis may be horizontal above the door frame

Slides 29-7 and 29-8

IV.

Bypass and Folding Doors A. A sliding or bypass door is a door unit that has two or more sections 2. Doors slide in either direction past each other along one axis on parallel overhead tracks.

Slides 29-9

3. Will overlap slightly when closed a. Provide complete enclosure b. No visible gap between them B. A pocket door is a sliding door that disappears into a compartment, or pocket, in the adjacent wall when fully open C. A folding door uses multiple hinged leaves that open by folding back in sections 4. Accordion doors use multiple smaller leaves of wood or fabric that are suspended from an overhead track

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

Slides 29-10

V.

Revolving Doors A. Used frequently to provide access to larger commercial buildings B. Comprises three or four doors that connect to a central shaft and rotate on a vertical axis within a circular enclosure 1. Efficient entryways 2. Can be as large as 10 ft wide 3. More energy efficient than swinging or sliding doors

Slides 29-11

VI.

Specialty Doors A. Additional doors types are manufactured to meet special needs other than providing occupant access within a building 1. Rolling doors a. Aircraft hangers, openings in manufacturing plants, rolling grille security doors at mall stores 2. Overhead doors a. Garage, loading docks, commercial storefront

Slides 29-12

VII.

Wood and Plastic Doors A. Made from both solid and hollow core wood construction 1. Typically used only for residential and interior commercial applications B. PVC doors and frames are 1. impact resistant, durable, easily cleaned, and rust, rot and moisture proof a. food processing facilities, agricultural buildings, clean rooms, water treatment facilities, and retail Slides 29-13

VIII. Fiberglass Doors A. Advantages over wood doors: 1. Durability, resisting denting, splitting, cracking, and warping 2. Manufactured with an insulating foam core, offering superior insulating properties over solid wood doors 3. Available in smooth and textured wood-grain finish and can be painted or stained

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

Slides 29-14

IX.

Hollow-Core Metal Doors A. Available in steel and aluminum

Slides 29-15

1. Interior and exterior openings 2. Wide range of designs 3. Flush or panelized 4. Integrate windows or louvers 5. Finished with a baked enamel finish on a smooth or textured surface B. Hollow Metal Door Frames 1. Available in steel or aluminum C. Metal Fire Doors and Frames 1. Assembly of a door and frame manufactured and installed to give protection against the passage of fire through a wall opening

Slides 29-16

X.

Glass Doors A. Used in applications that benefit from having a clear view of the interior function B. Glass must meet building code safety requirements 1. Typically require that safety glass be used

Slides 29-17

XI.

Door Hardware A. Hinges 1. Full Mortise Hinges 2. Half Mortise Hinges 3. Swing Clear Hinges 4. Spring Hinges 5. Template Hinges 6. Continuous Hinges 7. Pivot Hinges

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

Slides 29-18

XII.

Locking Mechanisms A. Four basic types of lock functions: entry, storeroom, privacy and passage B. There are two basic types of locks: 1. Bored: installed into a hole drilled through the face of a door 2. Mortise: uses a rectangular-shaped lock body installed in an opening that is mortised out of the edge of the door

Slides 29-19

XIII.

Windows A. Various windows manufactured primarily for use in commercial buildings 1. Made from solid wood, wood clad with plastic or aluminum, solid plastic, steel, stainless steel, aluminum, bronze, and composite materials 2. Energy efficient window glazings: a. low-E glass, double glazing, and glass with louver blinds set between the panes of glass

Slides 29-20 and 29-21

B. Figure 29.27: Typical steel window operating types C. Energy performance is rated by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) 1. Combines U-value, solar heat gain factors, optical properties, air infiltration, condensation resistance, and other characteristics into a uniform rating system to reflect the annual energy performance

Slides 29-22

D. Wide range of locking and operating devices available E. Local fire codes control: 1. Sizes of windows, height of sills above floors, and the ability to open a window from the inside without the necessity of special equipment 2. Windows used in fire walls must be fire-rated to restrict the spread of fire and smoke 3. Security windows meet standards required to provide resistance to forced entry 4. Material and finish must be able to withstand corrosive elements to which it will be exposed

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

Slides 29-23 and 29-25

XIV.

Window Terms and Types A. Common operating types: 1. Fixed window 2. Double hung 3. Single hung 4. Casement window 5. Awning window 6. Hopper window 7. Wood windows 8. Plastic windows 9. Steel windows 10. Aluminum windows 11. Composite materials 12. Special windows B. Figure 29.30: Commercial and public buildings make extensive use of roof windows

Slides 29-26 and 29-7

XV.

Entrances and Storefronts A. A non-residential system of entrance doors and fixed windows mulled as a composite structure 1. Designed for high use/abuse and strength 2. Field-assembled and field-glazed 3. Installed between floor and ceiling 4. Tempered glass doors with door closers, top and bottom pivots, locks, and push/pulls B. Figure 29.31: A storefront is a non-residential system of entrance doors and fixed windows that is field-assembled and field-glazed

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look at their home, school and the general community to observe and report the types of doors, windows, entrances, and storefronts used.

2. Have students visit a local store that sells window and door materials used for construction purposes and price various items. Ask them to report their findings, detailing the most popular types of doors and windows bought in the area and why.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

Describe the construction of various types of hollow-core metal doors. Doors may be flush or paneled, have windows or louvers, be finished with a baked enamel smooth or textured surface, or be covered with plastic veneers. One type uses a tabular framework over which the face panels are welded. Another type uses some type of core material over which the metal-faced panels are bonded.

2.

Explain how hollow metal doorframes are secured to walls and floors. Frames are anchored to masonry walls with some type of strap or wire loop.

3.

Identify each of the letter designations used on metal fire doors.

Class A: Openings in fire walls Class B: Openings in enclosures needing 2 hour fire rating Class C: Openings in walls between rooms needing 1 hour fire rating Class D: Openings in exterior wall subject to severe fire exposure from outside the building Class E: Openings in exterior walls subject to moderate fire exposure from outside 4.

List some of the specialty doors available. Wood core, hollow metal, metal clad, sheet metal, tin clad, composite, rolling steel, and curtain type.

5.

What are some of the types of energy-efficient glazing available? Energy efficient glazing available includes energy-efficient glass, double glazing, and glass with louver blinds between the panes.

6.

What association has established energy performance ratings for fenestration products? National Fenestration Rating Council.

7.

What two methods are commonly used to secure wood windows to the wall framing?

Wood windows installed by nailing through a metal or plastic flange or through a wood brick molding around the window.

8.

What are the grades of steel windows? Grades of steel windows: Intermediate grade, heavy-duty intermediate grade.

9.

How do windows made of composite materials compare with solid wood windows?

Composite windows look like wood but will not split, warp, or rot.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 29: Doors, Windows, Entrances, and Storefronts

10. What are the classes of security windows?

Class 1: minimal Class 2: moderate Class 3: medium Class 4: relatively high 11. What are typical building code requirements placed upon entrances and storefronts?

Entrances and storefronts have building code requirements such as fire resistance, wind and snow loads, hazards such as human impact loads, means for supporting doors and related glazing, hardware, locking arrangements, requirements for poweroperated doors and the size and number of doors required.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 30: Cladding Systems

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 30: Cladding Systems

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 5

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 30: Cladding Systems

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 30-2

  

Understand the forces that must be considered when designing cladding systems Know the building code requirements pertaining to cladding design and installation Distinguish between various types of cladding systems

Introduction This chapter discusses cladding systems. It reviews external forces that must be considered when designing and constructing cladding systems. A discussion of building code requirements pertaining to design and installation is included. Finally, various types of cladding systems available in the construction industry are reviewed.

Lesson Plan Slides 30-3

I.

Cladding Systems A. Cladding is defined as the non-load-bearing exterior facing that encloses a building 1. Constructed of wood, stone, brick, a variety of metals, plastic, glass, or other suitable materials

Slides 30-4 and 30-5

II.

Cladding Design Considerations A. Exposed to the full gamut of exterior weather conditions 1. Must resist the forces generated by wind, water, and movement due to temperature changes or seismic events.

B. Design and construction details require careful engineering analysis and the consideration of a wide range of factors

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 30: Cladding Systems

Slides 30-6 and 30-7

C. Figure 30.2: Both wind and earthquakes put stress on the curtain wall panels, windows, and connections D. Critical factors to be considered when selecting and designing cladding systems: 1. Structural Performance 2. Control of Movement 3. Control of Wind Forces 4. Connections 5. Solar Control 6. Fire, Noise and Pollution Control 7. Maintenance concerns

Slides 30-8 and 30-9

III.

Water Management for Cladding Systems A. A typical cladding system is an assembly of similar and dissimilar materials that are connected with a diversity of joints designed to withstand the forces acting upon them.

1. A variety of cladding assemblies have been developed that can effectively prevent moisture degradation B. Methods of Water Penetration 1. Covering joints with some type of batten or internal baffle can mitigate the penetration of kinetic energy-driven water C. The Rainscreen Principle 1. A pressure equalization method for cladding systems 2. Figure 30.11: A typical detail for using the rainscreen principle with glazed units

Slides 30-10

IV.

Metal and Glass Curtain Wall Systems A. Glass curtain wall systems typically use aluminum frames that contain in-fill panels of varying types of glass 1. Widely used because they provide a. A lightweight exterior wall system b. Exceptional transparency c. Can be rapidly erected

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 30: Cladding Systems

Slides 30-11

B. Stick system 1. Most common a. Vertical mullions installed, followed by horizontal rails into which glazing and spandrel panels are placed C. Relatively economical in material costs

Slides 30-12 and 30-13

D. Minimum requirements for assembly facilities and shipping E. More labor intensive than other systems F. Unitized system 1. Uses large preassembled wall panels a. Vertical edges of units are joined, serving as a mullion, and the bottom of one panel is joined with the top of the one below it, forming a horizontal rail

Slides 30-14

2. Significant fabrication and shipping requirements 3. More shop labor dependent with less fieldwork required than the stick system 4. Figure 30.16: A preassembled curtain wall panel is hoisted into place Slides 30-15

G. Unit-and-mullion system 1. A combination of the stick and unitized methods a. Uses mullions secured to a building structure with preassembled wall panels installed between them b. The mullions are installed first with the panels lowered in place behind the mullions from the interior of the building Slides 30-16

H. Column Cover and Spandrel System 1. Uses long spandrel panels that span column covers 2. Glazing may be installed above the spandrel 3. Columns are enclosed with a hollow cover

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 30: Cladding Systems

V.

Glass Fixing Methods A. Glazing is the system (process) used to support the glass in the frame and seal the dissimilar mating surfaces from the elements 1. Wet glazing 2. Dry glazing

Slides 30-17 and 30-18

3. Point supporting glazing 4. Structural glazing systems 5. Figure 30.24: Structural standoff systems use stainless-steel standoffs or spiders fixed to the building frame VI.

Masonry, Stone, EIFs, and Metal Cladding Systems A. In addition to glass, curtain walls can be faced at the exterior with any construction material that is non-combustible and can withstand exterior weather conditions B. There are countless types and combinations of cladding materials used C. Figure 30.6: One example of firestopping a curtain wall at the spandrel beam D. Masonry Curtain Walls

Slides 30-19

E. Stone Curtain Walls F. Precast Concrete Cladding G. Modified Stucco Curtain Walls H. Metal Cladding Systems

Slides 30-20 and 30-21

VII.

Sealing Joints for Cladding Systems A. Detailing of joints and proper installation of seals and flashings is a key factor in controlling water penetration B. Sealing materials must bond to joint surfaces, repel rain, air infiltration, and resist the stresses caused by movement C. Sealant Joints 1. Depends on the materials to be sealed, the function of the joint, possible changes that may occur after sealant has been installed

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 30: Cladding Systems

D. Types of Sealant Materials 1. Liquid sealants 2. Solid sealants E. Figure 30.39: Silicone sealants derive from the same chemical family as glass, which explains their excellent adherence to it

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look at buildings around their city and downtown, fully constructed or in the process of construction, to find examples of different cladding systems. Ask them to report their findings.

2. Have the students contact a local construction company to inquire about the most popular cladding systems used in their area. Have them ask why they think these systems are the most popular and inquire about specific building codes for the area which may influence their use.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What types of cladding are typically used for multistory buildings? Types of cladding include brick, aluminum, steel, bronze, plastic, glass, and stone.

2.

What are the major considerations when designing a cladding system? Considerations when planning cladding design: structural performance, stiffness, weight, connections, wind forces, movement, air infiltration, and water penetration.

3.

What problems do wind forces cause for cladding systems? Wind force problems include structural strength, negative pressure, more severe on upper floors of highrise winds, shape of the building, and topography of surrounding area.

4.

What forces can cause movement within a cladding system? Movement of cladding system can be caused by wind, earthquakes, gravity, thermal expansion and contraction, moisture penetration, condensation, weight of construction materials, movement of foundation, beams and columns deflecting, and creep in panels.

5.

What is the rainscreen principle? The rainscreen principle is a pressure equalization method that permits the air pressure on the face of the panel to equalize with the air pressure inside the panel.

6.

What forces may cause water to penetrate the joints in cladding? Water can penetrate the joints in cladding by wind-driven rain, gravity, surface tension of the water, capillary action, difference in air pressure from inside the wall and outside the wall.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 30: Cladding Systems

7.

What materials are used as firestopping? Firestopping materials include masonry set in mortar, concrete, mortar or plaster on metal lath, plasterboard, sheet metal of approved gauge, asbestos-cement board, mineral slag, and rock wool solidly compacted.

8.

Define a curtain wall. A curtain wall is a non-load bearing exterior building wall supported by a building framework.

9.

Describe each of the systems used for metal and glass curtain wall design. Glass and metal curtain wall systems are lightweight and rapidly erected. The metal framing used is usually aluminum. The glass or metal panels are mounted on the metal framing. Rigid insulation or some other backing material is on the back of the glass spandrel panel.

10. Define the different ways that glass can be affixed to framing systems. a. Wet glazing uses preformed tape or gunable liquid sealant to set the glass in the frame. b. Dry glazing utilizes a manufactured compression gasket of rubber or vinyl that supports the glass. c. Continuously fixed linear support systems use adhesion and/or compressed based on fixing mechanisms. d. Pressure-plate systems use linear plates that are bolted to the frame to compress the glass along its edges. e. Structural sealant systems use structural adhesives like silicone to affix glass panels on either two or four glass sides. f. Combined plate-and-sealant systems use both a pressure plate and structural sealants.

11. What is the difference between working joints and nonworking joints? A working joint in exterior walls allow for expansion and contraction of materials in the wall.

Nonworking joints are joined with fasteners that do not allow movement.

12. Describe the classes of flowable sealants. Classes of flowable sealants are medium performance and high performance.

13. Describe the types of solid sealant materials used in curtain wall construction. Solid sealants used in curtain wall construction are preformed solid tapes, preformed cellular tapes, and gaskets.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 5

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 31-2

   

Understand the integration of various interior finishing processes and other aspects of a building’s construction Select interior finish materials based on knowledge of interior finish processes Recognize the range of protective and decorative coatings available and the properties of each Select appropriate protective and decorative coatings for interior and exterior work

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to the interior finishing process, painting and coatings. It reviews aspects of a building’s construction with regard to finishing choices. An overview of how to select the proper interior finish material, based on the properties of the finish and circumstances of the desired project outcome, is also included. It also describes various compositions of coatings, as well as factors that affect them. The chapter reviews clear coatings, opaque coatings, special purpose coatings, and stains. Characteristics and recommended usage of all of the pre-mentioned products are discussed.

Lesson Plan Slides 31-3 and 31-4

I.

Introduction A. Interior finishes 1. Refer to: a. Wall, ceiling, and floor finishes b. Materials applied to finishes c. Acoustical treatments and decorations 2. Depend on: a. Cost, appearance, durability, health issues, acoustical considerations, and fire requirements B. Figure 31.1: Interior finishes refer to a wide range of surface materials that are applied to walls, ceilings, and floors

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

Slides 31-5

II.

Performance Criteria of Interior Finishes A. Finish materials selected based on: 1. Expected occupancy and types of operations in a building 2. Interrelationship of people and functions 3. Any special equipment or functional needs a. Performance criteria range from appearance, cost, durability and maintenance characteristics, to code requirements and environmental concerns

Slides 31-6

B. Environmental Concerns 1. Products using volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and other toxins that reduce indoor air quality should be avoided C. Appearance 1. Finish systems generally hide the structural, mechanical, and electrical systems and provide quality interior surfaces

Slides 31-7

D. Cost 1. Selection involves consideration of material costs, labor, overhead and profit, expected life cycle, maintenance, minor repairs, and increased replacement costs E. Code Requirements 1. Fire codes and local regulations must be consulted

Slides 31-8

F. Durability and Maintenance 1. Ability of exposed material to resist damage from abrasion or dirt G. Acoustical Considerations 1. The type of material, the texture of a surface, and any coatings influence the acoustical properties

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

Slides 31-9

III.

Electrical and Mechanical Systems Integration A. Must facilitate system installations B. Horizontal runs of electrical, plumbing, and ventilation ducts: 1. Placed below the floor 2. Concealed with a suspended ceiling 3. Cellular floor construction 4. Raised floor system

Slides 31-10

C. Basement or subbasement of multistory buildings: 1. Major electrical service entrance, sewer connections, potable water, elevator operating equipment, heating, cooling, and ventilation units 2. Systems run to each floor through a vertical service core D. Figure 31.6: Electrical and mechanical systems may be run horizontally below structural decks or through cellular metal decking or hollow-core concrete slabs

Slides 31-11

IV.

Paints and Coatings A. Coatings play a crucial role in protecting materials from dirt, solar radiation, moisture, chemicals and corrosion B. Federal Regulations 1. Lead in Coatings 2. Air Quality Regulations a. National Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions Standards for Architectural Coatings, citation i40CFE 59.400

Slides 31-12

C. Factors Affecting Coatings 1. Water resistance 2. Water vapor 3. Solar radiation 4. Effects of dust and dirt 5. Chemical fumes, solutions, and reactions 6. Absorption characteristics 7. Compatibility of new coatings applied over existing ones

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

Slides 31-13

D. Clear Coatings 1. Natural Resin Varnishes 2. Synthetic Resin Varnishes E. Lacquer 1. Made from synthetic materials

Slides 31-14 and 31-15

F. Opaque Coatings 1. Primer for Opaque Coatings 2. Types of Opaque Coatings a. Alkyd coatings b. Alkyd emulsions c. Alkyd resins d. Chlorinated rubber e. Enamel coatings f. Baked enamels g. Epoxy h. Epoxy resins i. Latex coatings j. Acrylic coatings k. Two-part epoxy modified acrylic coating l. Styrene–butadiene coatings m. Vinyl coatings n. Oil-based coatings

Slides 31-16 and 31-17

G. Figure 31.13: Opaque coatings obscure the natural color of a surface, provide protection, and add a decorative feature through a wide range of colors H. Phenolic Coatings 1. Made by polymerization of phenol and a formaldehyde reactant 2. Solvent-based and dry by the evaporation of the solvent 3. Leave a strong, flexible coating a. Urethane or polyurethane coatings

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

Slides 31-18

I.

Special Purpose Coatings 1. Reflective Coatings 2. Pigmented Fire-Retardant Coatings 3. Intumescent Fire-Retardant Coatings J. Stains 1. Exterior Stains 2. Interior Stains K. Fillers

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look at their roof, road, city roads, town center roads, and buildings in their downtown area. Have them report the types of bituminous materials used to form each, including anything findings that seem amiss.

2. Ask students visit a local store that sells bituminous materials used for construction purposes. Have them price various items and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What materials are included in Division 9 of the MasterFormat? Plaster, gypsum board, tile, ceilings, flooring, wall finishes, acoustic treatment, painting, and coating.

2.

What factors are considered as the interior finish is planned? Cost, appearance, durability, coatings, acoustical considerations, and fire requirements.

3.

How are electrical and mechanical services distributed in multistory buildings?

Electric, plumbing and ducts often horizontal below a floor or above a ceiling. Some buildings use cellular metal decking or pre-cast hollow-core concrete decking through which these can be run. A raised finished floor allows space below for these utilities. Vertical service cores carry utilities to floors from first to roof. Major utility and other services, as elevators, can have space in a basement or subbasement mechanical rooms. Mechanical rooms can be located on floors higher up in multistory buildings.

4.

How do flame-spread, smoke-developed, and fuel-contributed considerations influence interior finish? Flame spread is the rate at which combust will spread across the surface of a material. Smoke developed ratings classify materials by the amount of smoke they will give off as they burn. Fuel contributed rating measures the amount of combustible substances in a given material. These all are examined

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

when a finish material is chosen. The ratings must meet maximum allowances set by the building code.

5.

What acoustical measurements are considered when selecting interior finish materials? Acoustical considerations include the type of material, texture of the surface and any coating. Impact noise ratings are considered because they influence noise transmitted between floors. The sound transmission class indicates the ability of a material to reduce the transmission of airborne noises. The noise reduction coefficient indicates the amount of airborne absorbed by a material.

6.

What purpose do coatings serve on interior finishes? Coatings are applied to a surface to decorate, preserve, protect, seal, or smooth it.

7.

What is the purpose of regulations related to volatile organic compounds in coatings?

Volatile organic compounds produced by paints and other coatings are a major source of air pollution. The Clean Air Act mandates the maximum amount of these compounds a finishing material can release into the air.

8.

What are the VOC limits for architectural and industrial maintenance coatings?

Architectural volatile organic compound limits are not more than 250g/l (2.09 lb./gal.) Industrial maintenance primers and top coats are limited to 420 g/l (3.5 lb./gal.)

9.

What are the major components of a coating? Coatings are made up of a binder, a solvent and pigments. Clear coatings contain no pigment.

10. What are the two types of coating bases? Two types of coating bases are water-based and solvent-based.

11. What do MWF and MDF mean when used in coating specifications? MWF means minimum wet film thickness. MDF means minimum dry film thickness.

12. What are the major elements that affect the life of coatings? Factors affecting the life of coatings include water, water vapor, the substrate, solar radiation, temperature, dust and dirt, abrasion, chemical fumes, solutions and reactions, effervescence, absorption, old coatings.

13. What are major natural-resin varnishes? Major natural resin varnishes are linseed oil varnishes, tung oil varnishes, and spirit varnishes.

14. What are major synthetic-resin varnishes? Synthetic resin varnishes are acrylic resin varnishes, alky resin varnishes, phenolic resin varnishes, epoxy varnishes, polyurethane resin varnishes, silicone varnishes.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 31: Interior Finishes, Paints and Coatings

15. What is a primer? A primer is a coating applied to a surface to seal it and prepare it to receive the finish topcoat.

16. What methods are used to clean metal surfaces for painting? Metal surfaces can be cleaned with a detergent or solvent, wire brush, sandpaper or sandblasting.

Galvanized metal is cleaned with a dilute acetic acid and steel can be cleaned with phosphoric acid. Aluminum is wiped with mineral spirits. Copper, bronze and their alloys cleaned with mineral spirits or a dilute solution of hydrochloric or acetic acid.

An etching primer can clean ferrous and nonferrous metals.

17. What is the recommended moisture content for wood to be painted? Recommended moisture content for exterior wood to be painted is 12 to 15 percent.

18. What are the major types of opaque coatings? Major opaque coatings are alkyd, chlorinated rubber, enamel, epoxy latex, acrylic, styrene-butadiene, and vinyl.

19. What are some special-purpose coatings? Some special-purpose coatings are bituminous, asphalt, reflective, pigmented fire-retardant, and intumescent fireretardant.

20. What is meant by a flame-spread rating? Flame spread rating is the speed at which flames spread over a surface.

21. What are the flame-spread classifications? Flame spread classifications are class 1 (0– 25), class II (26–75), class III (76–200).

22. What does a smoke-developed rating indicate? A smoke developed rating classifies the coating by the amount of smoke produced as it burns.

23. What does a fuel-contributed rating indicate? A fuel contributed rating indicates the amount of combustible material in the coating.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 32: Acoustical Materials

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 32: Acoustical Materials

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 6

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 32: Acoustical Materials

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Slides 32-2

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:  

Understand the factors involved when considering the specifications and recommendations for the acoustical treatment of a building.

Select appropriate materials to provide acoustical control of various interior spaces.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to acoustical materials. It describes the various factors that should be considered when deciding on the type of acoustical material to use for a specific project. How to choose the appropriate material that match the acoustical setting desired is discussed.

Lesson Plan Slides 32-3

I.

Sound A. Sound 1. Sensation produced by human organs hearing vibrations transmitted through air a. Movement of air molecules traveling in wavelike motion B. Sound waves 1. Move in spherical direction from a source in all three dimensions a. Delay between time sound is created and heard

Slides 32-4

C. Frequency of sound waves 1. Number of cycles of like waveforms per second a. Travels in sine waves D. Wavelength 1. Velocity of sound (1130 ft./sec. in air) divided by frequency E. Sound frequency 1. Determines pitch

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 32: Acoustical Materials

Slides 32-5

F. Sound intensity 1. Depends on strength of force that sets off sound vibrations 2. Measured in decibels a. Decibel scale for normal applications ranges from 0 dB to 120 dB 3. Varies in same way described for frequency

Slides 32-6

II.

Sound Control A. Sound transmission can be airborne and caused by structure borne vibration.

1. Airborne sound: a. Travels through air b. Moves through materials, assemblies, and partitions c. Can pass under doorways, through ventilation shafts, and around obstructions 1. Sound transmission can cause noise control, confidentiality, and privacy issues.

Slides 32-7 and 32-8

B. Controlled by: 1. Acoustical materials with sound-absorbing properties 2. Materials that reduce sound transmission through assemblies of materials C. Sound-absorbing materials: 1. Soak up sound waves that strike them 2. Reflect sound waves into an area D. Figure 32.3: Sound is reflected when it strikes hard, non-absorptive surfaces.

Slides 32-9

E. Sound transmission class (STC) 1. Single number rating a. Indicates effectiveness or assembly of material in reducing transmission of airborne sound 2. Larger the STC number a. More effective as a sound transmission barrier 3. Materials are tested following specifications in ASTM E90-70

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 32: Acoustical Materials

Slides 32-10

F. Impact isolation class 1. Single number 2. Approximate measure of floor construction effectiveness to provide isolation against sound transmission from impacts G. Noise reduction coefficient 1. Indication of airborne sound energy amount absorbed by a material

Slides 32-11 and 32-14

III.

Acoustical Materials A. Floor coverings 1. Installation of carpet and vinyl composition floor covering a. Reduce impact noise b. Dampen airborne noise B. Acoustical plaster 1. Composed of plaster made with perlite or vermiculite aggregate a. May be applied with brush but usually sprayed C. Acoustical ceiling tile and wall panels 1. Variety available a. Wood fibers, sugarcane fibers, mineral wool, gypsum, fiberglass, aluminum, and steel b. Ceramic ceiling tile, lightweight panels, baffles, etc.

D. Suspended ceiling tiles grid systems 1. Exposed grid, semi-exposed grid, and concealed grid E. Figure 32.8: Acoustical wall panels of molded glass fiber are used to control sound within a space.

Slides 32-15

F. Figure 32.11: Fabric baffles at the ceiling used to control noise in an indoor skating park.

G. Sound barriers 1. Wide range of materials 2. Blocks transmission of sound through an assembly a. Controls sound by providing mass 3. Examples: a. Lead sheet material b. Acoustical sealant

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 32: Acoustical Materials

Slides 32-16 and 32-17

IV.

Construction Techniques A. Several methods for increasing STC rating of wood and metal frame walls 1. All could have sound-deadening insulating batts, which increase STC value B. Several floor-ceiling assemblies 2. Floating floor technique used in commercial construction a. Same construction can be used with residential wood frame floors C. Figure 32.16: A suspended ceiling is hung from overhead wires that carry metal runners into which the acoustical tile is laid.

Slides 32-18 and 32-19

V.

Controlling Sound from Vibrations A. Sound dampened by mounting mechanical equipment on isolator pads 1. Rubber, neoprene, cork, and fiberglass a. Used for small pieces of equipment or larger pieces located in basement areas B. Steel spring mounting 1. Heavier-duty units mounted within a building or on its roof C. Figure 32.17: Neoprene pads used to damp the sound produced by vibrations of mechanical equipment.

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to visit a local theater, auditorium, or conference hall where good acoustics are required. Have them investigate what materials were used for the acoustical design and what factors were considered when the choice was made.

2. Have students visit a local store that sells acoustical materials, price various items, and report their findings to the class. Ask them to include the most popular type of acoustical materials bought in the area.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 32: Acoustical Materials

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

In what two ways do acoustical materials control sound? By absorbing sound and reducing impact noise.

2.

What is sound pressure? Sound waves produce changes in the atmospheric pressure above and below the existing static pressure. This deviation in atmospheric pressure is called sound pressure.

3.

In what directions do sound waves move? Sound waves move in a spherical direction.

4.

How long will it take a sound to travel one mile from its source? Sound travels 1130 ft. per second in air, so it will take 4.67 seconds to travel one mile.

5.

What is the wavelength of a sound having a frequency of 25cps? Wavelength of a sound having a frequency of 25 cps is 45.2 ft.

6.

What is the frequency in hertz of a sound having a frequency of 35 cps? The frequency in hertz of a sound having a frequency of 35 cps is 35 Hz.

7.

How does sound frequency influence the pitch of a sound? Low deep sounds have low frequencies and high pitched sounds have high frequencies

8.

What is the normal range of sound that can be heard by the human ear? Normal range of sound that can be heard by the human ear is from 0 dB (lowest) to 120 dB (highest without ear damage).

9.

How many decibels of sound will damage a person’s hearing? Sound above 120 dB can damage the ear.

10. What is the difference between sound-absorbing materials and sound-reflective materials? Sound-absorbing materials are porous and sound moves in and out of openings, absorbing the sound. Sound-reflective materials are hard and the sound bounces off them.

11. What are typical STC and IIC requirements for apartment construction? Typical STC requirements for apartments are walls STC 50, penetrations STC 50, and entrance doors STC 26 minimum. IIC requirements for floor-ceiling are IIC 45 to 65.

12. How does acoustical plaster differ from standard gypsum plaster? Acoustical plaster is made with perlite or vermiculate aggregate, which has sound absorbing properties

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 32: Acoustical Materials

13. What acoustic product is used to reduce airborne sound at the ceiling in a large area, such as an auditorium? In large open areas acoustical sound can be controlled at the ceiling by installing baffles.

14. What are the three types of grids used on suspended ceilings? Exposed grid, semiexposed grid, and concealed grid.

15. How is sound transmission of vibrations from mechanical machinery controlled? Much of the sound can be dampened by mounting the mechanical equipment on isolator pads. A steel spring mounting is used for heavier-duty units.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 8

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 33-2

  

Be aware of the code requirements for various interior walls, partitions, and ceilings.

Select appropriate materials and assemblies for interior walls, partitions, and ceilings.

Understand the installation of the various types of finish walls and ceilings.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to interior walls, partitions, and ceilings. It reviews their various designs, installation methods, and materials. How to select appropriate designs and materials for particular projects is also discussed.

Lesson Plan Slides 33-3 and 33-4

I.

Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings A. Interior walls and ceilings: 1. Constructed in a variety of ways a. Some are direct result of construction b. Others use further layers of materials that are applied to the structural frame B. Load bearing and non-load bearing C. Enclose openings D. Afford space for electrical and mechanical systems E. Provide sound attenuation F. Provide privacy, security, acoustical control, insulation, and fire and smoke protection G. Finish materials include: 1. Gypsum board products, plaster, wood, hardboard panels, fiberboard, and metals

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

Slides 33-5 and 33-6

II.

Fire-Resistant Interior Assemblies A. Fire-resistance rated construction assemblies used to control the spread of fire and smoke and provide sufficient time for evacuation and firefighting.

1. The fire-resistance property based on the amount of time an assembly can withstand a fire before failure.

2. An assembly that can resist a fire for an hour is designated as a one-hour assembly.

B. International Building Code (IBC) established six fire-resistive assemblies: 1. Fire separation walls 2. Fire barriers 3. Shaft enclosures 4. Fire-rated partitions 5. Smoke barriers 6. Horizontal assemblies

Slides 33-7 and 33-8

III.

Interior Gypsum Wall Partitions A. Metal Stud Non-Bearing Interior Walls 1. Wall framing procedures follow closely the conventions of wood framed walls. a. Typically made from 18- to 20- gauge steel sheet with either solid or perforated webs b. Manufactured in lengths ranging from 8'-0" to 24'-0" and tracks in 10'-0" lengths c. Studs are secured to structural floor and ceiling assemblies using runner tracks.

B. Figure 33.6: Fire ratings for different types of metal-framed gypsum wallboard and plaster partitions.

Slides 33-9 and 33-11

IV.

Types of Gypsum Board Products A. Regular gypsum wallboard has smooth, off-white paper on the finish side and gray paper on back of the gypsum core.

1. Boards are available with an aluminum foil back covering that acts as a vapor barrier.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

2. Standard sheet sizes start at 4 x 8 ft., with lengths in 2-ft increments up to 16 ft. in length available.

B. Metric sizes are approximately 1200 x 2400 mm.

C. Sheets are available in thicknesses of 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, 1/2, and 5/8 in. (6.4, 8, 9.5, 12.7, and 16mm).

D. A variety of edge profiles manufactured include tapered, square, beveled, rounded, or tongue and groove.

Slides 33-12

E. Types of gypsum boards: 1. Fire-resistant gypsum board (Type X) 2. Water-resistant gypsum board 3. Backer board 4. Gypsum linerboard 5. Gypsum lath V.

Installing Gypsum Wall Board

Slides 33-13

A. Cut by scoring front face with utility knife along the edge of a metal T-square 1. Board is bent to break the core.

2. Paper is scored at the back to separate the panel parts.

B. Panels are fastened: 1. To wood studs and ceiling joists with special nails or power driven screws 2. To metal studs and metal furring with self-drilling and self-tapping screws 3. With the long edge perpendicular to or parallel to the studs a. Perpendicular is usually used because it reduces the amount of joints that need taping

Slides 33-14 and 33-15

VI.

Finishing Gypsum Wall Board A. Fasteners and joints between gypsum panels are finished in joint compound to create a smooth and continuous surface.

1. Joint compound is a mixture of marble dust, binders, and admixtures, that when mixed with water produces a plaster like material.

B. Figure 33.15: The final layer of joint compound is applied with wide taping knives.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

Slides 33-16 and 33-17

VII.

Plaster Finishes A. Consists of a supporting base (gypsum or metal lath) and one or more coats of plaster 1. The main ingredient in plaster is usually gypsum, but some types use Portland cement.

B. The following plaster products are used for interior finish applications: 1. Plaster of Paris a. hardens rapidly and experiences little shrinkage 2. Regular gypsum a. used with sand aggregate and applied by hand

Slides 33-18 and 33-19

3. Lightweight plaster a. used with lightweight aggregates and manually applied C. Machine-applied gypsum 1. used with either sand or lightweight aggregates D. Gypsum neat plaster 1. A calcined gypsum plaster mixed at a mill with other ingredients to control its working quality and setting time E. Gypsum plaster with wood-fiber 1. Manufactured in powder form for lighter weight and increased fire resistance F. Plaster over masonry, concrete and clay tile walls 1. Concrete block walls are porous and provide a satisfactory base

Slides 33-20

2. Clay tile and brick walls may be good, but must be sufficiently porous to provide suction for plaster and scored to increase bonding.

3. Smooth-surface glazed or semi-glazed tile cannot be covered unless furred G. Figure 33.21: Plaster may be applied directly to masonry, and concrete walls that are not in direct contact with the exterior.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

Slides 33-21

VIII.

Structural Clay Tile Partitions A. Made with hollow clay masonry units that are glazed on one or both sides 1. Glazes provide a smooth surface impervious to penetration by water 2. Available in a wide range of colors

Slides 33-22

3. Tiles resist abrasion, wear, and mildew and can be routinely scrubbed and sanitized IX.

Ceramic Tile Wall Finishes A. Available in wide range of sizes, shapes, and colors

Slides 33-23

B. Provide a hard, water-resistant facing C. Durable and easily cleaned D. Three grades of ceramic tile: 1. Standard grade a. Is the best and meets the highest performance specifications 2. Second grade a. Meets all specifications, but may have facial defects noticeable from a distance of 10 ft.

3. Decorative thin wall tile grade a. Meets all specifications except breaking strength

Slides 33-24

X.

Wood Product Wall Finishes A. An interior wall finish may consist of many types of solid wood paneling.

1. Hardwood plywood is made using various species of hardwood veneers for the face and back surfaces of the panel. a. High quality wood veneers including mahogany, maple, and cherry wood are commonly used. b. They are bonded to plywood or particleboard panels that form the core.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

Slides 33-25 and 33-28

XI.

Ceiling Construction A. Shape interior spaces provide a finished surface to overhead areas.

B. Incorporate a variety of important functions 1. Enclose space below the floor structure in which electrical, mechanical and fire-suppression systems can be accommodated out of view 2. Most ceilings support lights and HVAC diffusers provide a measure of fire protection to the floor or roof above 3. Contribute to the acoustical treatment of a room 4. Provide a light-reflecting surface that can enhance illumination C. Ceiling finish materials: 1. plastic, metal, plaster, gypsum panels, wood, or fibrous panels D. Exposed structure ceilings, or open plenum ceilings, is becoming popular.

1. Exposed structure ceilings omit the finished ceiling and leave overhead HVAC systems and the roof or floor deck fully exposed as an integral part of the interior space E. Suspended ceilings 1. Hung from a floor or roof structure by a series of wires that support a metal grid that holds the finished ceiling 2. Figure 33.28: Suspended-ceiling grids accommodate lighting, HVAC diffusers, sprinkler heads, and other required penetrations.

F. Furred and direct contact ceilings 1. Ceilings made from gypsum board and other material panels can be fastened directly to the roof or floor deck above

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look at their home and buildings they enter on a weekly basis (e.g., stores they visit, their friends’ homes, their school, etc.) and observe various interior walls, partitions, and ceilings. Have them report their findings to the class.

2. Have students visit a local store that sells materials used for interior walls, partitions, and ceilings to price various items. Ask them to report their findings to the class, including the most popular materials used in their area.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What purposes do interior partitions serve? Interior partitions carry ceiling loads, divide a large area in smaller spaces, provide privacy, security, sound control, insulation, and fire and smoke protection.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 33: Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings

2.

What is the difference between a fire partition and a firewall? A fire partition provides enclosure of shafts, floor openings, exits, and subdivisions of an area. A firewall restricts the spread of fire running from the floor to the roof.

3.

How can electrical wiring be run inside partitions having metal studs? Metal studs have punch-outs through which wires and plumbing are run.

4.

What assembly of materials is often used in a fire-rated partition that also requires effective sound control? A typical fire-rated partition is made up of multiple layers of gypsum wallboard, type X. Design depends on local building code.

5.

How is gypsum wallboard secured to metal studs? Gypsum wallboard is secured to metal studs with self-drilling self-tapping screens.

6.

What can be done to reduce nail popping in gypsum wallboard installation? Nail popping can be reduced by double-nailing the panels.

7.

How are external corners on gypsum wallboard finished? Exterior corners on gypsum wallboard are finished with corner bead.

8.

What base materials are used when constructing a plaster interior finish? Plaster base materials are metal lath, gypsum lath, or veneer plaster base.

9.

What type of plaster coats are applied over metal lath? Over the metal lath the first coat (scratch coat) is applied to the lath. The second coat (brown coat) is applied over the scratch coat. The third coat is applied over the brown coat and finished to the desired finish texture.

10. Why can concrete block walls have plaster applied directly to them? Concrete blocks are porous and rough and the plaster will bond to it.

11. How can you plaster over a glazed tile wall? A glazed tile wall can be plastered by first installing metal lath to it.

12. Describe the construction of typical solid gypsum partitions. Solid gypsum partitions have a vertical core of metal mesh lath, which is connected to the ceiling and a metal floor runner. The lath is plastered in the normal manner.

13. What are the merits of using glazed hollow clay tiles for partition construction? Hollow glazed clay tiles provide a hard, water-resistant, and easily cleaned wall. They are also fire resistant.

14. What is a suspended ceiling? A suspended ceiling is an assembly of metal runners that are hung from the floor overhead on wires forming rectangular openings into which ceiling panels are laid.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 7

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 34-2 and 34-3

     

Understand the impact of building codes in the selection of flooring.

Select the appropriate flooring materials for various applications.

Understand the types of flooring available and their sizes and properties.

Understand various types of carpet construction.

Choose carpet for various applications.

Understand installation procedures for carpeting.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction and overview of flooring. Building codes that must be considered when installing flooring are reviewed. The chapter also discusses the materials used for various types of flooring, how to choose the appropriate flooring for a specific project, and installation of the flooring materials.

Lesson Plan Slides 34-4

I.

Flooring A. Three broad categories of floor coverings: 1. hard, soft, and resilient B. Finished flooring consists of: 1. The underlying sub-floor, floor covering, and surface finish that create the walking surface

Slides 34-5

C. In selecting flooring systems, the designer must consider: 1. Characteristics of the substrate 2. Expected traffic loads on a floor 3. Maintenance requirements 4. Fire resistance 5. Building code requirements 6. Appearance

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

Slides 34-6 and 34-7

D. The finish flooring must meet all of the required conditions at an acceptable cost 1. Some applications may require that special conditions be met: a. A need for water resistance b. Enhanced hygiene c. Other unique situations like those found in hospitals or laboratories E. Figure 34.1: Finish flooring forms a large part of the first impression occupants receive as they enter and move about a facility.

Slides 34-8 and 34-9

II.

Performance Criteria for Flooring A. The prevention of slips, trips, and falls is a primary performance criterion for any finish flooring material.

B. According to the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), flooring can have a large impact on air quality.

1. Floor covering should have minimum emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

C. Flame resistance: 1. Finished floors are classified into Class 1 and Class 2 finishes according to their flame resistance by ASTM E648.

D. Cleaning products specified should meet Green Seal GS-34.

Slides 34-12 and 34-14

III.

Hard-Surface Flooring A. Made of inflexible materials that provide little or no give 1. A variety of types and styles include: a. Concrete, clay tile, stone, brick, wood products, and terrazzo B. Most hard-surface flooring is expensive but has lowest lifecycle cost due to easy maintenance and very long durability.

C. Concrete flooring 1. Durable and economic flooring solution

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

D. Brick and stone flooring 1. Durable and available in wide variety of brick, stone, and cast stone tile E. Clay tile flooring 1. Quarry, paver, and ceramic tile F. Mortars and adhesives for tile floors 1. Dry-set, epoxy, latex Portland cement, and Furan mortars G. Tile grout 1. Mortar used for filling gaps between floor tiles H. Terrazzo flooring 1. Provides an attractive, hard, long lasting, and easily cleaned surface 2. Terrazzo is a matrix consisting of marble or granite chips, Portland cement, and water or a synthetic resin.

3. It is placed as a top layer over a concrete substrate, steel decking, or a wood subfloor.

I. Figure 34-9: Terrazzo floor installation details over different subfloor materials.

Slides 34-15

IV.

Wood Flooring A. Popular for light-traffic applications because of its warmth, durability, versatility, and variety.

B. Unique among flooring materials in that it is a renewable resource that is natural and organic 1. Hardwoods and softwoods 2. Engineered wood floorings

Slides 34-16

C. Solid wood flooring 1. Wood flooring is produced in four basic types: strips, planks, parquet (thin wood blocks), and solid end grain blocks a. Strip flooring available in soft and hard woods. b. Planks may be solid wood or laminated. c. Parquet flooring uses short wooden pieces that are laid in geometric patterns for decorative.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

Slides 34-17 and 34-18

D. Engineered and laminate wood flooring 1. Multi-ply construction to create a stable product 2. Designed to look like wood flooring 3. laminate is economical 4. does not need to be nailed, sanded, stained, or finished 5. Is resistant to scratches, fading, and stains 6. Factory-applied finishes are moisture resistant 7. Look like natural wood without a finish 8. Plastic finishes such as urethane and acrylic are applied to the wood fibers to make them hard and durable.

Slides 34-19 and 34-21

E. Bamboo flooring 1. While not technically a wood, bamboo is also a popular material for modern floors 2. Bamboo is one of the fastest growing, inexpensive, and most sustainable flooring materials available.

3. Physical characteristics are similar to those of hardwoods 4. Bamboo is a rapidly renewable material.

5. Inexpensive with a unique aesthetic 6. Moisture and insect resistant, bamboo is also much harder than typical hardwood flooring including oak 7. Premanufactured bamboo floors are available in planks with either vertical or horizontal grain orientation.

F. Figure 34-16: Bamboo is one of the fastest growing, inexpensive, and most sustainable flooring materials available.

Slides 34-22 and 34-23

V.

Resilient Flooring A. Made of materials that have more elasticity and pliability than do hard surface floor coverings 1. Made in sheet or tile form 2. Formed in place as a seamless material.

3. Linoleum, sheet vinyl, vinyl composition tile, asphalt, cork, rubber, and polymeric-poured floors 4. Extremely sturdy and stain resistant

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

5. Possess a natural resilience or springiness that is comfortable to stand on 6. Used in variety of applications where properties like durability, traction, comfort, and water resistance are primary considerations: a. Retail areas, corridors, patient rooms, laboratories, and work and storage areas

Slides 34-24

B. Linoleum and sheet vinyl 1. A natural material made of linseed oil, wood products, ground cork, mineral fillers, and pigments that are bonded to a jute or synthetic backing C. Vinyl composition tile (VCT) 1. harder, less flexible than sheet vinyl 2. durable, with ease of maintenance 3. low installation and life cycle cost

Slides 34-25

D. Rubber flooring 1. Strong, durable, and slip-resistant E. Cork flooring 1. Warm, natural aesthetic, and resilient F. Seamless flooring materials 1. Made from plastics and resins that chemically cure to form a rigid, highly moisture and abrasion resistant surface 2. Figure 34.22: Seamless flooring materials are poured and spread over a subfloor to provide a completely uniform surface.

Slides 34-26 and 34-27

VI.

Carpeting A. Competitive cost, durability, and maintenance B. Available in a wide range of fibers, textures, and colors C. Finished surface produces few seams and can efficiently cover large floor areas D. Often selected for its warmth and comfort E. Provides excellent sound deadening properties by reducing both impact noise and sound reflection within a space F. Carpet fibers 1. Wool 2. Acrylic

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

3. Nylon 4. Polyester 5. Polypropylene (olefin)

Slides 34-28

VII.

Carpet Construction A. Woven carpet 1. Axminster carpet 2. Loomed carpet 3. Wilton construction B. Tufted, flocked and fusion bonded carpet C. Carpet cushions 1. Materials include urethane, fiber, and rubber

Slides 34-29

VIII.

Carpet Installation A. Installed over concrete, plywood, particleboard, and other firm, smooth substrates in several ways: 1. Most frequently used method uses tack strips 2. Carpet can be also be glued directly to a wood or concrete floor without a cushion 3. Carpet tiles do not require any padding or glue

Slides 34-30 and 34-31

IX.

Raised Access Flooring A. Provides an elevated floor surface above the structural floor system to provide space for the passage of mechanical and electrical services 1. Widely used in: a. Data technology centers and computer rooms b. Commercial office spaces c. Unlimited ability in meeting complete rewiring operations when tenants change B. Figure 34-34: Raised access flooring provides an elevated surface above the structural floor system to provide space for the passage of mechanical and electrical services.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look at their home and buildings they enter on a weekly basis (e.g., stores they visit, their friends’ homes, their school, etc.) and observe various types of flooring. Have them report their findings to the class.

2. Have students visit a local store that sells materials used for flooring and price various items. Ask them to report their findings back to the class, including the most popular material used in their area.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What types of finish flooring are in common use? Common types of finish flooring are wood, vinyl, terrazzo, clay tile, laminated flooring, engineered flooring, rubber tile, resilient flooring, brick, brick and concrete pavers, concrete, stone, and carpet.

2.

What type of finish flooring presents the greatest hazard in a fire? Carpet presents the greatest fire danger.

3.

What techniques are used to secure wood flooring to a substrate? Solid wood floors are nailed to the subfloor. Some laminates are bonded to the subfloor. Others are laid on a soft underlayment and float unattached to the subfloor. Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer.

4.

How can a designer find the fire-spread and smoke-production data for various finish flooring products? The fire spread and smoke produced data are available from the manufacturer of the flooring.

5.

What type of floor tile is used for areas subject to heavy use? Tile used in areas of heavy use include quarry tile and paver tile.

6.

How is the surface of rubber flooring designed to provide slip resistance? Rubber tile and flooring sheets have a raised, gridded surface that provides good traction.

7.

What types of mortars and adhesives are used to install tile floors? Tile is bonded to the subfloor with Portland cement mortar, epoxies, and furans. Organic adhesives are also available.

8.

Why is grout used to finish the installation of ceramic tile floors? Grout is used to fill the spaces between the tiles.

9.

What substrate should be used under brick floors that will be subject to heavy use?

Brick pavers on interior floors subject to heavy use should be laid over a concrete substrate.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 34: Flooring

10. How is an exposed aggregate concrete floor surface produced? An exposed aggregate finish is made by leveling the concrete slab, embedding aggregates in the surface with a float and after the concrete begins to set, flushing the surface with the water, exposing the aggregate.

11. How are concrete floors given a colored surface? Concrete floors are colored by adding color pigments to the concrete mix. Another way is to spread dry shake coloring material over the concrete before it has hardened and floating the surface.

12. What substrates can be used when constructing a terrazzo floor? Terrazzo is placed over a concrete substrate, steel decking or a wood subfloor.

13. What are the commonly used types of terrazzo flooring? Types of terrazzo flooring are Portland cement terrazzo, monolithic terrazzo, sand cushion terrazzo, and synthetic resin matrix terrazzo.

14. Where are precast terrazzo products used? Precast terrazzo units are used as stair treads, risers, window stools, wall base, and other special shapes.

15. What materials are used to form seamless floors? Seamless floors are made with a poured-in-place two-compound polyurethane elastomer.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 13 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 13

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 35-2

   

Identify specialty products as classified by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Make informed decisions when deciding on and specifying specialty items.

Understand the extensive array of residential and commercial equipment a designer and contractor must be able to specify and install.

Understand both the range of furnishings used in residential and commercial buildings and the places that various art forms are used.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to specialty items. Various items are reviewed, such as display boards, cubicles, various floorings, lockers, partitions, and several others. How to decide on specialty items for specific projects is also discussed.

Lesson Plan Slides 35-3

I.

Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings A. The architect provides the location and layout of all specialty items 1. Per contract documents: a. Submittals are required as outlined. b. Contractor’s responsibilities relative to procurement, receiving, storage, and installation are outlined. c. Contractor plans and coordinates all blocking, support, and services for installation of these products.

Slides 35-4

B. Visual display boards 1. Include: a. Chalkboards: slate, porcelain enamel on steel, aluminum, or glass b. Whiteboards: vinyl sheet surface or porcelain enamel on steel c. Pegboard panels: thick hardboard with holes spaced 1 in. on center d. Bulletin boards (tack boards): cork surface laminated to fiberboard substrate

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-5

C. Compartments and cubicles 1. Types of enclosures: a. Metal, plastic laminate, and stone toilet compartments b. Shower and dressing compartments c. Various cubicles d. Dividers, screens, and curtains for showers, hospital cubicles, toilets, and urinals D. Louvers, vents, grilles, and screens 1. Variety considered specialty items a. Louvers and ventilation devices b. Operable, stationary, and motorized metal wall louvers c. Louvered equipment enclosures d. Door louvers e. Various types of wall and soffit vents

Slides 35-8

E. Figure 35.5: This cast iron trench drain is used to control surface water.

F. Service wall systems 1. Incorporate the following services: a. Clocks b. Fire hoses c. Drinking fountains d. Fire extinguisher cabinets e. Telephones f. Waste receptacles

Slides 35-9

G. Wall and corner guards 1. Protective devices a. Made from metal, plastic, rubber, etc. b. Withstand impacts and weather exposure i.

Cast iron wheel guards ii.

Rubber bumpers c. Some used to protect wall corners i.

Might be damaged by moving carts, forklifts, or other passing traffic

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-10

H. Access flooring 1. Free-standing flooring in modular units raised above basic floor system a. Provide space to run mechanical and electrical services b. Commercial systems have adjustable metal pedestals where modular floor panels rest i.

Panels typically covered with vinyl composition floor covering

Slides 35-11

I.

Pest control 1. Various mechanical, chemical, electrical pest-repellent systems, and protective devices 2. Devices control: a. Rodents b. Birds c. Insects

Slides 35-12

J.

Fireplaces and stoves 1. Manufactured fireplaces and stoves a. Dampers b. Metal chimneys c. Fireplace screens and doors d. Typically metal-framed firebox and vent units designed for gas-fired logs 2. Gas and wood-burning stoves a. Wide range

Slides 35-13 and 35-14

K. Manufactured exterior specialties 1. Stock and custom designed steeples a. Ornamental construction usually ending in a spire erected on a roof or tower 2. Spires a. Tall pointed pyramidal roof on a tower or steeple 3. Cupola a. Light-roofed structure mounted on a roof

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-15

L. Figure 35.11: A cupola with louvered sides used to provide attic ventilation.

M. Flagpoles 1. Complete flagpole assemblies a. Includes hardware and accessories 2. Typically made from wood, metal, or fiberglass 3. May be anchored in the ground or wall mounted

Slides 35-16 and 35-17

N. Identifying devices 1. Directories, direction signs, bulletin boards, and various letters, signs, and plaques a. Used to communicate or identify b. May be fixed, lighted, computerized, or other electronic device c. Usually have replaceable letters and locked glass door

Slides 35-18

O. Figure 35.12: The International Symbol of Accessibility.

P. Pedestrian control devices 1. Strong, durable products that can withstand exposure to weather a. Portable posts and railings b. Rotary gates c. Turnstiles d. Electronic detection and counting systems e. Items to limit access

Slides 35-19

Q. Lockers and shelving 1. Provide temporary storage 2. Open manufactured metal and wood shelving used for general storage a. Open shelving b. Various manufactured shelving systems c. Mobile storage systems

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-20

R. Fire protection specialties 1. Portable firefighting devices and their storage facilities a. Fire extinguishers b. Extinguisher cabinets c. Fire blankets and their storage cabinets d. Any fire extinguishing units on wheels Slides 35-21

S. Protective covers 1. Awnings, canopies, marquees, covered walkways, sheltered bus, and car stop structures a. Available as standard manufactured units or as custom designed and built structures b. Made from any commonly used materials that withstand weather exposure Slides 35-22

T. Postal specialties 1. All postal service facilities and devices a. View windows b. Letter slots c. Letter boxes d. Collection boxes e. Chutes 2. Can become extensive system used to speed mail collection Slides 35-23 and 35-24

U. Demountable partitions 1. Room dividers, screens, and enclosures a. Freestanding post-and-panel units i.

Hang from a wall or ceiling b. Secured to floor and ceiling c. Solid, open mesh, or screen panels ii.

Privacy iii.

Sound control V. Figure 35.20: Low demountable partitions provide privacy while using the general illumination and heating and air-conditioning systems.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-25

W. Operable partitions 1. Manual or power operated 2. Enclose or divide a larger area a. Suspended or top hung 3. Include: a. Folding panel partitions b. Accordion folding partitions c. Sliding and coiling partitions

Slides 35-26

X. Exterior protection devices for openings 1. Include: a. Sun control screens b. Shutters c. Louvers d. Screens for security e. Panels providing insulation and protection 2. May be fixed, manual, or electrical

Slides 35-27

Y. Telephone specialties 1. Manufactured telephone enclosures a. Completely enclosed, supported on a floor, or wall hung 2. Telephone directory and shelving units a. Usually wall hung and come in many sizes 3. Outdoor telephone enclosures a. Weathertight and equipped with integral lighting

Slides 35-28

Z. Toilet and bath accessories 1. Include: a. Products used in commercial restrooms, hospitals, and areas where accessibility and security are important i.

Mirrors, air fresheners, electric dryers, grab bars, waste receptacles, special cabinets, and bedpan storage units

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-29

A. Wardrobe and closet specialties 1. Devices used to store clothing a. Hat and coat racks b. Wardrobes i.

Hanging space and drawers ii.

Vanity area and lavatory c. Racks iii.

Wall mounted and floor supported II.

Residential and Commercial Equipment Slides 35-30 and 35-31

A. Maintenance equipment 1. Freestanding and built-in equipment providing building maintenance a. Window washing systems b. Automatic vacuum systems c. Floor and wall cleaning equipment d. Various types of housekeeping carts B. Figure 35.26: Window washing equipment assemblies for high-rise buildings sometimes use hoists mounted on the roof from which scaffolding is lowered.

Slides 35-32

C. Security and ecclesiastical equipment 1. Security equipment to store valuables a. Vault doors, day gates, and security systems b. Safes and safe deposit boxes c. Teller and service equipment 2. Ecclesiastical equipment a. Items related to churches Slides 35-33

D. Mercantile equipment 1. Retail and service store equipment a. Display cases b. Cash registers c. Checking and food processing machinery d. Barber and beauty shop items

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-34

E. Solid waste handling equipment 1. Collect, shred, compact, and incinerate solid waste a. Package incinerators b. Compactors c. Storage bins d. Pulping machines e. Pneumatic waste transfer systems f. Chutes and storage collectors Slides 35-35

F. Office equipment 1. Includes: a. Copiers b. Computers c. Word processors d. Printers e. Fax machines f. Modems g. Does not include office furniture Slides 35-36

G. Residential equipment and unit kitchens 1. Built-in or freestanding applications a. Stoves, washers, dryers, freezers, microwaves, dishwashers, refrigerators, surface cooking units, ovens, etc.

2. Unit kitchens a. Manufactured assemblies b. Combine refrigerator, cooking element, sink, and cabinets Slides 35-37

H. Fluid waste treatment and disposal equipment 1. Used to treat and dispose of fluid waste a. Oil/water separator b. Fluid pumping stations c. Sewage and sludge pumps d. Scum removal equipment e. Aeration equipment f. Package sewer treatment plants

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-38 and 35-39

I.

Medical equipment 1. Used for human and animal healthcare a. Equipment includes: i.

Sterilizing ii.

Examination iii.

Treatment iv.

Optical v.

Dental 2. Figure 35.32: Medical facilities utilize a large amount of testing, treatment, and examination equipment.

Slides 35-40

3. Laboratory items a. Fume hoods b. Incubators c. Sterilizers d. Refrigerators e. Emergency safety appliances

Slides 35-41

III.

Furnishings A. Include products that are decorative: 1. artwork, rugs, and window treatments 2. casework, furniture for commercial buildings, and multiple seating B. An interior decorator plays a major role in the selection of items C. The architect also is an important part of the overall design process

Slides 35-42

IV.

Artwork A. Murals and wall hangings 1. Photo and mosaic murals 2. Paintings and prints 3. Fabric wall hangings and tapestries

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

B. Sculpture 1. Carved 2. Welded 3. Relief work

Slides 35-43

C. Stained glass 1. Mosaics of cut translucent glass shards a. Leaded glass windows b. Faceted glass D. Ecclesiastical artwork 2. Pieces of religious significance a. Alter pieces b. Religious symbols

Slides 35-44 and 35-45

V.

Fabrics A. Fabrics, leathers, and furs 1. Upholstery 2. Curtains 3. Draperies 4. Wall hangings B. Various fabric treatments and fillers C. Fire codes may require fireproofing D. Figure 35.36: Fabrics are used extensively in interior design for upholstery, curtains, draperies, and wall hangings.

Slides 35-46

VI.

Manufactured Casework A. Includes: 1. Stock cabinets fashioned from wood, steel, and plastic laminates 2. Countertops, sinks, and accessories or fixtures mounted on countertops 3. Kitchen and bath casework 4. Designs for dental, hospital, optical use, nurses stations, and veterinary use

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-47

VII.

Window Treatment A. Decorative and provides privacy B. Includes: 1. Blinds (often called Venetian blinds) 2. Vertical blinds 3. Shades 4. Curtains Slides 35-48 and 35-49

VIII.

Furniture and Accessories A. Office furniture 1. Office partitions, storage, work surfaces, shelving, and light fixtures B. General furniture 2. Residential through commercial areas C. Furniture accessories 3. Clocks, ashtrays, lamps, and waste receptacles D. Figure 35.40: Libraries use large shelving units to store their inventory of publications

Slides 35-50

IX.

Rugs and Mats A. Loose rugs, mats, gratings, and foot grilles B. Products include: 1. Chair pads, floor mats, entrance tiles, and floor runners a. Made from rubber, carpet, vinyl, aluminum, and stainless steel Slides 35-51

X.

Multiple Seating A. Seating for areas where audiences gather 1. Schools, restaurants, theatres, churches, stadiums, and auditoriums B. Includes: 1. Fixed, portable, and telescoping seating 2. Booths 3. Various table and seat modules

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

12

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

Slides 35-52

XI.

Interior Plants and Planters A. Extensive use of live and artificial plants 1. Common in commercial buildings B. Includes: 1. Plants and plant holders 2. Landscaping accessories 3. Maintenance materials

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to look at their home and buildings they enter on a weekly basis (e.g., stores they visit, their friends’ homes, their school, etc.) and observe various specialty items used. Have them report their findings to the class.

2. Have students visit a local store that sells various specialty accessories (e.g., bath and kitchen accessories) and price various items. Ask them to report their findings to the class, including the most popular specialty items used in their area.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What finished surfaces are available when selecting chalkboards? Chalkboard surfaces may be slate or porcelain enamel on steel, aluminum or glass.

2.

What is a whiteboard? A whiteboard has a surface upon which special ink markers are used to write and can be wiped off.

3.

What are the typical ways toilet enclosures are hung? Toilet enclosures may be hung from the ceiling, braced overhead, or floor supported.

4.

What materials are used for the panels on toilet enclosures? Toilet panel enclosures are made stainless steel, steel with a baked enamel finish, plastic laminate over particleboard or a high-pressure plastic laminate core, or marble.

5.

What purposes do grilles serve? Grilles are used to cover, protect, or decorate an opening.

6.

What services are available with various service wall systems? Service wall systems incorporate clocks, fire hoses, drinking fountains, fire extinguisher cabinets, telephones, and waste receptacles.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

13

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

7.

Why are access floors used? Access floors are used to raise the finished floor above the subfloor to provide space to run electrical and mechanical systems.

8.

How are gas-fired fireplaces vented? Gas fireplaces are vented vertically through a metal pipe or horizontally through a wall. Some are so efficient no venting is required.

9.

What is the difference between a steeple, a spire, and a cupola? A steeple is an ornamental construction on a roof, usually ending in a spire. A spire is a tall pointed pyramid roof built to hold a clock or bells. A cupola is a small roofed structure mounted on the roof to provide attic ventilation.

10. What types of identifying devices are commonly used? Typical identifying units include directories, direction signs, bulletin boards, various letters, signs, and plaques used for identification purposes.

11. How do building codes govern the design of identifying devices? Building codes require identification such as exit signs and signs directing people to an exit.

12. What are some frequently used pedestrian control devices? Common pedestrian control devices include portable posts and railings, rotary gates, turnstiles, electronic detection, and counting systems and items that limit access.

13. Where are protective covers used? Protective covers include awnings, canopies, marquees, covered walkways, and sheltered bus and car structures.

14. What are the ways various partition systems may be installed? Partition systems may be free standing dividers, screens, enclosures and partitions. Some types are hung from the wall or ceiling; others are secured permanently to the floor and ceiling.

15. List some exterior protection devices. Typical exterior protection devices include sun control screens, shutters, louvers, security screens, and security panels.

16. What types of equipment are used for building maintenance? Building maintenance equipment includes window washing systems, vacuum systems, floor and wall cleaning equipment, and housekeeping carts.

17. What types of ecclesiastical equipment can you name? Ecclesiastical equipment varies by denomination. Following are some examples: Baptisteries, pulpits, altar, communion rail, and chancel furniture.

18. What operations are performed by solid waste handling equipment? Solid waste handling equipment includes units to collect, shred, compact, and incinerate solid waste.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

14

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 35: Specialties, Equipment, and Furnishings

19. How does a unit kitchen differ from a typical residential kitchen? Unit kitchens combine a refrigerator, cooking unit, and sink plus cabinets into a single unit.

20. What types of units are used for fluid waste treatment and disposal? Fluid waste disposal equipment includes oil/water separator, fluid pumping systems, sewage and sludge pumps, scum removal equipment, aeration equipment, and package sewer treatment plants.

21. What types of window blinds are commonly available? Commonly available window blinds include venetian blinds, shades, shutters, and curtains.

22. How are mosaic murals made? Mosaic murals are formed by bonding thousands of small ceramic tiles on a solid surface.

23. What types of sculpture are commonly available? Sculpture frequently found includes cast bronze, lead or aluminum figures, and stone and welded units.

24. How are leaded stained-glass pieces joined? Leaded stained glass pieces are joined with H-shaped lead stripes called cames.

25. What are the differences between leaded and faceted glass? Leaded glass has pieces of glass joined together with H-shaped lead strips (cames). Fractured glass pieces are set into reinforced concrete or an epoxy resin matrix much like laying bricks.

26. What types of units are used for window treatment? Windows can be treated with horizontal or vertical Venetian blinds, shutters, shades, and curtains.

27. Where is multiple seating commonly found? Typical multiple seating available includes fixed and portable seating as found in restaurants.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

15

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 36: Special Construction

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 36: Special Construction

Table of Contents Learning Objectives .......................................................................................................................... 2 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 6 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 6

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 36: Special Construction

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 36-2

•

Understand the range of special construction facilities available and how they function.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to special construction. It reviews various types of special construction, including special purpose rooms and integrated assemblies. Examples of each and an overview of their characteristics are provided.

Lesson Plan Slides 36-3 and 36-4

I.

Special Construction A. Special construction encompasses an extensive array of structures, systems, and assemblies, each designed to serve a specific purpose.

B. Construction ranges from complex facilities and large structures to individual components of a small scale, such as special-purpose rooms or an ornamental fountain.

C. Division 13 construction projects usually require professional expertise and construction experience, making them more expensive to design and build than standard projects.

1. Division 13 structures and systems often offer less flexibility for future space reconfiguration due to the unique nature of their purpose.

Slides 36-5 and 36-6

II.

Special Facility Components A. Pools and spas 1. Swimming pools a. Variety of sizes b. Designed to withstand all anticipated loadings c. Must have filtration system d. Small pools may be constructed of gunite

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 36: Special Construction

B. Saunas and steam rooms 1. Require insulated enclosures with integral mechanical systems to supply heat and steam C. Figure 36.3: Saunas are often finished in water- and moisture- resistant materials such as cedar or redwood.

Slides 36-7

III.

Special-Purpose Rooms A. Designed and constructed to meet specific performance requirements 1. Fire protection, thermal control, or sound control 2. Examples: a. Planetariums b. Athletic rooms c. Soundproof rooms d. Anechoic chambers

Slides 36-8

B. Special Structures 1. Innovative structures that are used to enclose a variety of activities a. While the concept is difficult to define, special structures listed in Division 13 include: i. space frames or grids ii. air supported or air-inflated iii. geodesic domes iv. fabricated engineered structures

Slides 36-9

C. Fabric and membrane structures 1. Provide free-form building designs for permanent and temporary applications D. Fabric membranes 1. Constructed of fabric, meshes, or films 2. Engineered and fabricated to meet structural, flame retardant, and weatherresistant specifications

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 36: Special Construction

Slides 36-10

3. Figure 36.5: This fabric roof structure uses a PTFE membrane to provide diffuse light, shade, and weather resistance.

E. Air supported structures 1. Air is main support of the structure.

2. Derive structural integrity from pressurized air used to inflate flexible material a. The structure is pressurized to produce pressure that is equal to or exceeds external pressures such as wind forces 3. Use single or multiple wall enclosures made of flexible membrane material

Slides 36-11 and 36-12

F. Geodesic structures 1. Spherical shell based on network of triangular elements 2. Triangulated rigidity and stress distribution G. Space frames 3. Truss-like, lightweight rigid structure 4. Interlocking struts in geometric pattern 5. Long spans with minimal internal supports H. Figure 36.11: Space frames derive their strength from the inherent rigidity of a triangular frame.

Slides 36-13 and 36-14

IV.

Integrated Assemblies A. Integrated ceilings 1. Pre-engineered and prefabricated for assembly on site 2. Wide range of products B. Systems include: 3. Lighting, air supply registers, ducts, air return grilles, fire sprinkler systems, and communication linkage C. Figure 36.12: Integrated ceilings incorporate lighting, mechanical, communications, and sprinkler systems.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 36: Special Construction

Slides 36-15

V.

Pre-Engineered Structures A. Classified as special construction 1. Even if erected on temporary foundations B. Structures include: 1. Metal building systems 2. Glazed structures (e.g., greenhouses) 3. Portable buildings 4. Grandstands and bleachers 5. Cable supported, fabric, and log structures

Slides 36-16

VI.

Waste and Utilities Sections A. Filters under drains and media 1. Piping and filters used in water and fluid waste treatment B. Filter media 2. Anthracite, charcoal, diatomaceous earth, mixed, and sand media

Slides 36-17

C. Digester covers and appurtenances 3. Special tank covers and assemblies D. Oxygenation systems 1. Site-assembled piping systems and related equipment a. Used for dissolution and mixing of gaseous oxygen in liquid waste E. Utility control systems 1. Operating and monitoring systems a. Used for water supply, wastewater, and electrical power generation plants

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 36: Special Construction

Slides 36-18

VII.

Measurement and Control Instrumentation A. Mechanical, electrical, fluid, pneumatic, and computer controlling devices 1. May be totally automated or semi-automated 2. Monitors temperatures or pressures 3. Regulates system operation 4. Controls safety

Slides 36-19

B. Recording instruments 1. Used to measure and record a. Seismic information, stresses in structures, and meteorological information C. Transportation control instrumentation 2. Used to monitor and control various transportation aspects a. Airport control, railway control, subway control, and transit vehicle control

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to search their city for various types of special construction.

Have them report their findings to the class.

2. Have students pick one of the special construction project they found in their city and arrange a tour of the location. Have them report what they learned to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What types of covering materials are used for air-supported structures? Air-supported structures are covered with a fiberglass fabric that is Teflon coated or a polyester fabric that is vinyl or neoprene coated.

2.

How are entrances to air-supported structures treated so the air pressure within a structure is maintained as people enter and leave? The entrance of air-supported structures has an air lock to enable the building to maintain the needed air pressure.

3.

What is meant by special-purpose rooms? Special-purpose rooms are those designed to meet specific performance requirements such as a cold storage room or a sound conditioned room.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 36: Special Construction

4.

What types of structures are available as pre-engineered units? Pre-engineer structures include metal building systems, glazed structures as a greenhouse, portable buildings, cable supported structures, and grandstands and bleachers.

5.

What kinds of materials are used to construct space frames? Materials used to construct space frames include steel tubes, hollow sections, and I-beams.

6.

What is the basic structural element of the geodesic dome? The basic structural element of the geodesic dome is a network of triangle elements that provide triangulated rigidity and distribute stresses over the entire structure.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 10 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 11

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 37-2

  

Understand the codes related to the design and installation of conveying systems.

Understand the various operating mechanisms used on elevators.

Be familiar with additional conveying systems used in buildings.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to conveying systems (e.g., lifts, elevators, and escalators). It reviews their designs and installation methods, as well as their operating mechanisms. Characteristics of common building conveying systems are discussed.

Lesson Plan Slides 37-3

I.

Conveying Systems A. Each designed for a special purpose 1. Commercial and industrial applications a. Some facilitate the movement of people b. Others transport materials and equipment 2. Passenger service, freight elevators, and escalators represent a major building expense a. Their quality of service is critical to occupant satisfaction

Slides 37-4

II.

Elevator Code Standards A. Elevators, escalators, moving walks, and dumbwaiters 1. Designed and installed following the code requirements of the American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks, ANSI/ASME A17.1, and local building codes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

Slides 37-5

B. Code examples: 1. Hoistway design criteria specify that hoistways: a. Be enclosed for their entire height with fire-resistant materials such as masonry, drywall, or concrete b. Tops must be enclosed by concrete or metal floors. c. Assembly design must prevent accumulation of gases and smoke in case of fire. d. No windows are permitted. e. Hoistway and machinery space must be free of any pipes or ducts.

Slides 37-6

C. Elevator machine room must have fire-resistant enclosures and doors.

1. Permanent and easy access to machine room is required.

D. Electrical equipment and wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFRA 70.

1. All main electrical feeds are installed outside hoistway.

E. Buffers are required in the pit.

1. Buffers are energy-absorbing units located at the bottom of the hoistway that absorb any impact from a car that descends below the normal lowest level.

Slides 37-7

F. Code requirements also include stipulations for required tests, emergency condition operation, venting, opening protection, signals, and signs.

G. Elevators are not considered part of the system of egress.

1. They might not operate as required during an emergency, such as a fire or an earthquake.

2. People could be stranded between floors.

3. If power fails, an elevator will automatically return to the lowest landing and the doors will open, allowing passengers to exit.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

Slides 37-8

III.

Elevator Components A. An elevator consists of: 1. A hoisting mechanism connected to a car or platform that slides vertically on guides on the sides of a fire-resistant hoistway.

B. Used to move passengers and materials between floors of multistory buildings C. Passenger elevators are designed to transport people between floors.

D. Freight elevators carry materials from a loading dock to upper floors.

1. Safety regulations permit only the operator or others needed to handle the materials being transported.

Slides 37-9

IV.

Elevator Hoistways A. Vertical, fire-resistant enclosed shaft in which an elevator moves 1. Hoistway doors a. Horizontal sliding doors, swinging doors, and vertical sliding doors 2. Machine rooms a. Part of hoistway b. Provides fire-resistant enclosure for hoisting machinery, controls, pumps, and hydraulic oil storage

Slides 37-10 and 37-11

B. Figure 37.3: A hydraulic elevator locates machine rooms on the side of the hoistway.

C. Venting hoistways 1. Becomes vertical flue for gases and smoke a. Carries away these materials via venting at top D. Hoistway sizes 1. Hoistways are sized according to car shapes, sizes, and door sizes.

Slides 37-12

E. Consideration given to space requirements for guide rails brackets, counterweight systems, running clearances, and ancillary equipment F. Sufficient air space must be provided around cars and elevator counterweights: 1. Minimize buffeting and airborne noise 2. National Elevator Industry Standard: Elevator Engineering Standard Layouts

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

Slides 37-13

V.

Elevator Cars A. Platform enclosed by walls and roof 1. Designed to carry passengers, freight, and other specialty loads a. Hospital beds and stretchers 2. Car is guided on its vertical travel by means of guide rails mounted in the hoistway.

3. Contains lighting, controls, venting units, handrails, telephones, and various types of wall, ceiling, and floor finish materials

Slides 37-14

VI.

Elevator Types A. Elevators are either electric or hydraulic.

B. Electric elevator 1. Uses electric motor to supply power 2. Mechanism includes a brake, a driving sheave or drum, gearing, belts, wire rope.

3. Electric elevators are used on low, medium, and high-rise buildings and are faster than hydraulic elevators.

Slides 37-15

VII.

Electric Passenger Elevators A. Suspend cars from wires 1. Use weights to counterbalance B. Traction driving mechanisms 1. Electric motor connected to driving sheave C. Geared traction elevators 1. Uses worm gear to drive large spur gear connected to traction sheave

Slides 37-16 and 37-17

D. Gearless traction elevators 1. Traction sheave and brake mounted directly on motor shaft E. Electric elevator control

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

1. Regulates starting, stopping, safety devices, speed of movement, direction of movement, acceleration, and deceleration 2. Multi-voltage or variable-voltage variable-frequency control 3. New copy F. Platform safeties 1. Stops car movement and holds position 2. Applies brake shoes against guide rails 3. Governor monitors speed and safety a. Also switches off motor electrical power G. Cables (Roping) 1. Traction-type machine cars suspended from three hoisting ropes a. Affects speed and load

Slides 37-18

H. Winding drum machines 1. Has gear driven drum I. Counterweights 1. Steel plates that slide on vertical steel guides J. Operating systems 1. Control operation of elevator 2. Simple to complex, automatic systems

Slides 37-19

VIII.

Hydraulic Elevators A. Used mainly for low-rise installations 1. Economical and simpler B. Hydraulic passenger elevators 1. Speed of 100 to 150 ft./min.

2. Lifting capacity 1500 to 4000 lb.

C. Hydraulic freight elevators 1. Speed of 50 to 100 ft./min.

2. Lifting capacity 3000 to 12,000 lb.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

Slides 37-20 and 37-21

IX.

Freight Elevators A. Carry general freight, motor vehicles, and heavy concentrated loads 1. Class A: maximum of 1/4 of rated load 2. Class B: only motor vehicles 3. Class C: heavy concentrated loads a. Class C1: materials plus industrial trucks b. Class C2: materials loaded by industrial trucks c. Class C3: heavy concentrated loads other than trucks B. Figure 37.15: Freight elevators are designed to carry the anticipated loads and resist actions from forklifts and other devices used to load them.

Slides 37-22

X.

Observation Elevators A. Move up hoistway secured to building exterior 1. Cars designed with glass walls a. Provide panoramic views 2. Geared, gearless, or hydraulic, and hoisting machinery is hidden 3. Lower end of hoistway must be enclosed with safety barrier

Slides 37-23

XI.

Residential Elevators A. Available in range of sizes and designs 1. Large enough to carry wheelchairs 2. Hydraulic or electric traction systems B. Car in electric system 1. Directed by channel guides C. Doors have safety locking devices.

D. Hydraulic unit uses piston to raise car

Slides 37-24

XII.

Automated Transfer Systems A. Dumbwaiters 1. Mechanism used to raise and lower a small car vertically within a building

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

B. Cart and tote box transfer systems 1. Use high-performance dumbwaiter and elevator lift equipment a. May work in connection with horizontal transfer system

Slides 37-25 and 37-26

XIII.

Wheelchair Lifts and Stair Lifts A. Wheelchair lifts 1. Used for interior and exterior locations 2. Steel platform with steel sides and front gate that forms ramp to load wheelchair B. Stair lifts 1. Move people who have difficulty climbing stairs a. Mounted chair runs along a track C. Figure 37.22: Vertical lifts provide a space efficient solution to making buildings accessible for wheelchair user.

Slides 37-27

XIV.

Escalators A. Inclined, continuous, power-driven stairways 1. Used to move passengers between floors 2. Components: a. Welded steel truss structural frame b. Stairs are cast metal and grooved. c. Treads and risers secured to continuous chain d. Each side of stair has a solid balustrade that covers ends of the stair and supports handrail.

Slides 37-28

B. Standards and safety 1. American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, and Escalators, ANSI/ASME A17.1 2. Life Safety Code of the National Fire Protection Association 3. Safety features covered by codes and manufacturers C. Installation examples 1. Stairs installed in a parallel arrangement or crisscross pattern

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

Slides 37-29

D. Figure 37.27: A characteristic crisscross escalator installation.

E. Escalator sizes i.

ANSI/ASME A17.1 1. Maximum rise of eight and a half inches and a max depth of 15 ¾ in.

2. Tread widths are typically 24, 32, and 40 in.

3. Built on an angle of 30° 4. Various maximum rises

Slides 37-30

F. Moving walks and ramps a. Moving walks i.

Horizontal conveyor belts that move people 5. May have slight rise or fall, seldom exceeding five degrees b. Moving ramps i.

Convey people up or down inclines 6. Maximum slope of 12° ii.

Connect with moving walks

Slides 37-31

G. Other conveying equipment a. Includes: i.

Shuttle transit ii.

Conveyors iii.

Pneumatic tube systems iv.

Material conveyors v.

Cranes vi.

Hoists vii.

Special-purpose material-moving

Slides 37-32

H. Shuttle transit a. Horizontal transportation for distances beyond practical limits of moving walks i.

Many applications:

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

1. Linking office or retail areas to remote parking facilities 2. Moving passengers between terminals in large airports 3. Rapid internal transportation on large campuses

Slides 37-33 and 37-34

I.

Conveyors and pneumatic tubes a. Used to move materials within building i.

Electric track vehicle conveyor system 1. Self-propelled electric cars travel over a network of tracks connecting stations 2. Used to transport paperwork, tools, test samples, and other small items b. Pneumatic tube systems i.

Transmits small items in tube-like carriers 1. Large-diameter closed-pipe vacuum network used to move trash or linens c. Material conveyors i.

Move items (e.g., packages, luggage, parts, aggregate, and concrete) within building or on construction site

Slides 37-35 and 37-36

J.

Cranes and hoists a. Move materials and heavy items at outdoor locations and within buildings i.

System depends on applications b. Examples: i.

Overhead, monorail, under-hung cranes, gantry crane, underslung crane, and mobile hoists c. Figure 37.37: A diesel-powered mobile gantry moves on wide-base radial tires for increased maneuverability.

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to search their city for various buildings that use elevators and report their findings to the class.

2. Have students pick one building they found to have an operating conveying system and arrange a tour of the mechanical room. Have them report their findings to the class.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What code is used to ascertain the safety standards of elevators and escalators?

American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks.

2.

Where can information on elevator size and shape standards be found? Elevator sizes and shape standards are available from the manufacturers. Also, consult ANSI/ASME A17.1.

3.

What items are permitted in the elevator machine room? The elevator machine room is limited to containing only the machinery required for the operation of the elevator.

4.

What types of doors are used on various types of elevators? Types of elevator doors are center-opening, two-speed car sliding, and single sliding.

5.

What controls are normally located on an elevator car panel? Control panel in the car contains an alarm button, telephone, buttons to indicate floor level desired, and button to hold door open.

6.

How is the capacity of an elevator car calculated? Capacity of car is indicated by the maximum number of people it is designed to carry. Total elevator load capacity divided by 150 lbs. gives the number of passengers.

7.

What happens to elevator cars in case of a power failure? With a power failure the car returns to the main floor and the doors open.

8.

What types of traction machines are used for hoisting elevators? Types of traction machines are freight elevators, passenger elevators, and hospital elevators.

9.

What are the major differences between gear-driven and gearless traction machines?

Gear-driven elevators use a worm gear to drive a large spur gear that is connected to the traction sheave. Gearless traction elevators have a traction sheave and brake mounted directly on the motor shaft.

10. How is the speed of gearless traction elevator drive mechanisms varied? The speed of gearless traction elevators is varied by using a DC electric motor build to run at the speed required.

11. What are the two types of elevator control systems? Types of elevator control systems are multi-voltage control and VVVF control.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 37: Conveying Systems

12. What types of roping systems are used with traction elevators? Types of roping systems used are 1:1 single wrap; 1:1 double-wrap, and 2:1 double-wrap.

13. What types of elevator operating systems are available? Types of elevator operating systems are car-switch system, signal system, automatic operating systems, single operating systems, selective collective automatic system, and group automatic systems.

14. What mechanism is used for moving hydraulic elevators? Hydraulic elevators are moved by a hydraulic piston raised by hydraulic oil under pressure.

15. What are the classes of freight elevators? Classes of freight elevators are class A, class B, class C, class C1, class C2, and class C3.

16. What purposes do automated transfer systems serve? Automated transfer systems provide vertical and horizontal distribution of materials.

17. What types of lifts are used to move the physically handicapped from floor to floor?

Physically handicapped can be moved by elevator or wheelchair lifts.

18. What escalator installation configurations are generally used? Escalator installation configurations include freight elevators, passenger elevators, and hospital elevators.

19. What emergency features are included in an escalator system? Escalator emergency features include providing a standard stair beside it, floor openings enclosed to provide fire and smoke protection, and a sprinkler system.

20. What is a moving walk? A moving walk is a horizontal conveyor belt designed to move people.

21. Where is a shuttle transit system likely to be used? A shuttle system is generally used to provide horizontal transportation for distances longer than practical for moving walks. They are used inside and outside the building.

22. What are the commonly used material conveyors? Material conveyors commonly used include flat belts, troughed belts, solid rollers, skate wheels, and segmented conveyors.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

12

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 38: Fire-Suppression Systems

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 38: Fire-Suppression Systems

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 6

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 38: Fire-Suppression Systems

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 38-2

 

Have an understanding of the fire codes and the agencies that maintain them.

Develop a working knowledge of the various types of fire-suppression systems.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to fire-suppression systems. Various codes and the agencies that maintain them are reviewed. In addition, the chapter discusses various kinds of fire-suppression systems, as well as how to develop a working knowledge of them.

Lesson Plan Slides 38-3

I.

Fire-Suppression Systems A. New construction must be designed to incorporate automatic fire-protection systems that are effective in detecting, controlling, and extinguishing a building fire in its early stages.

1. Fire protection engineers should be involved in all phases of project development.

Slides 38-4

B. Building fire protection is typically achieved through two basic strategies: 2. Passive fire protection a. involves the application of fire-resistance rated construction materials and assemblies 3. Active fire protection a. devices and systems that set in motion a physical reaction to fight a fire i. sprinkler systems, foam and fog extinguishing systems, gas and chemical systems

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 38: Fire-Suppression Systems

Slides 38-5

II.

Fire Codes A. Series of regulations mandating minimum requirements to prevent fire hazards that may occur from building operations, the storage or use of hazardous materials, or from other situations 1. Addresses necessary training and equipment 2. That the layout and design of a building supports fire prevention and containment goals

Slides 38-6

B. Direct the inspection and maintenance procedures for various fire-protection systems in order to maintain optimal active and passive fire protection measures.

C. The Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) tests and approves fire-protection equipment and issues reports in its Fire protection equipment list.

Slides 38-7 and 38-8

III.

Fire and Smoke Management A. Dictated by code for different building types, sizes, and configurations 1. Employed to protect building content and the area surrounding a fire from spreading 2. Provide a clear path for fire fighters to extinguish a fire quickly B. Fire management 1. Provided by compartmentalizing a building into smaller areas a. To confine fire, heat, smoke, and toxic gases to their area of origin until the fire is extinguished, or burns itself out b. Protects the designated egress ways and areas of refuge for occupants and firefighters Slides 38-9

C. Smoke control systems 1. Intended to limit and control movement of smoke during a fire to allow for evacuation of occupants in a nontoxic environment 2. These systems respond to a fire by activating equipment that exhausts smoke by natural or mechanical ventilation a. Dedicated smoke exhaust fans or reversible HVAC supply fans

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 38: Fire-Suppression Systems

Slides 38-10

IV.

Fire-Suppression Systems A. Fire-suppression systems include: 1. various types of sprinkler systems 2. foam and fog extinguishing systems 3. gas systems 4. chemical systems 5. manual water extinguishing

Slides 38-11 and 38-13

V.

Automated Water Sprinkler Systems A. Water is readily available, economical, and serves to smother and cool a fire.

1. As water interacts with fire, it turns to vapor which increases its volume and helps to disperse the oxygen the fire needs to continue growing 2. Uses water supply from a municipal water system B. Figure 38.5: A simplified illustration of an automatic water fire-suppression sprinkler system.

VI.

Sprinkler Heads A. Upright or pendant sprinkler heads B. Activate when exposed to excessive temperatures (usually about 165°F) 1. When activated, a valve opens, releasing water stored in the attached piping C. Sprinkler head densities determined according to a building’s occupancy hazard classification Figure 38.12: Pendant sprinkler heads hang down from the ceiling, whereas upright sprinkler heads project up into a space.

Slides 38-14 and 38-15

VI.

Foam Fire-Suppressant Systems D. Used on fires involving gasoline or chemicals for which water systems are ineffective 1. Foams are masses of air-filled or gas-filled bubbles formed by mechanical or chemical techniques a. Lighter than water and float on the surface of burning liquids, smothering them and sealing in gases

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 38: Fire-Suppression Systems

Slides 38-16

Figure 38.13: Foam systems produce large amounts of air-filled or gas-filled bubbles that fill a compartment with foam from large-diameter ducts.

Slides 38-17

VII.

Gas Fire-Suppression Systems A. Able to flood areas, suppressing fire with little harm to contents 1. Especially important in buildings with sensitive equipment, such as computer rooms, commercial aircraft, telephone exchanges, and libraries

Slides 38-18

B. Gas used for fire suppression is usually carbon dioxide or Halon 1301.

VIII.

Dry Chemical Systems A. Do not penetrate burning materials 1. Remain on the surface and smother fire B. Chemicals frequently used include sodium bicarbonate, potassium chloride, and monoammonium phosphate 1. Effective on flammable liquids, electrical, and ordinary combustible materials 2. High tolerance for extreme weather conditions and temperatures.

IX.

Manual Fire-Suppression Systems A. Fire hose stations on each floor of a building that are connected to the water piping system B. When water pressure is insufficient to supply stations on the upper floors of a building, standpipes are added to the system

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to search their city for various buildings that use firesuppression systems and report the types they find used to the class.

2. Ask students to pick a building equipped with an operating fire-suppression system and arrange a tour of how the system works. Instruct them to inquire if the system has ever been used. If it has been used, ask about the results.

Have them report their findings to the class.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 38: Fire-Suppression Systems

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What organization publishes the major fire-protection requirement manuals?

National Fire Protection Association.

2.

How is the Underwriters Laboratory involved in fire protection issues? Underwriters Laboratory tests and approves fire-protection equipment and issues reports.

3.

What purpose does a Siamese connection serve? A Siamese connection is used by fire departments to connect to a supplemental source of water from the building firesuppression system.

4.

How does the deluge fire-protection system differ from the wet-pipe system? A deluge fire-protection system delivers as much water as possible as quickly as possible. It opens all of the sprinklers at one time. The pipes in the system are dry. The wet-pipe system keeps water in the pipes under pressure at all times. It only opens the sprinklers in the immediate area of the fire.

5.

What is a suitable fire-protection system for areas exposed to freezing temperatures?

The dry-pipe system is used if it is exposed to freezing temperature.

6.

How does the pre-action system protect an area from water damage if a sprinkler head is accidentally opened? The pre-action system has all sprinkler heads closed and the pipes are dry. The pre-action system valve opens, allowing water to flow only to sprinkler heads activated by an actual fire.

7.

What types of foam fire-suppression systems are available? Common foam suppression systems are chemical foam, air foam, and high-expansion foam.

8.

What is a major advantage of the gas fire-suppression systems? Gas fire-suppression systems can flood the entire area and do little harm to the contents.

9.

What gases are commonly used in gas fire-suppression systems? Gas fire-suppression systems use carbon dioxide or Halon 1301 gas.

10. How do dry chemical systems extinguish a fire? Dry chemicals extinguish a fire by smothering it.

11. In a manual fire-suppression system, how is water supplied to the individual fire hose stations? Water is supplied in manual fire-suppressions systems by fire hose stations recessed in the wall. They are connected to a central water piping system within the building.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 10

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 39-2

   

Relate plumbing codes to plumbing system design.

Understand the types of piping, tubing, and fittings used on plumbing systems.

Be knowledgeable about the sources of potable water and its distribution systems.

Understand the components of sanitary piping systems.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to plumbing systems. It reviews the items used in plumbing systems (e.g., pipes, tubes, and fittings). Potable and non-potable water systems are discussed. The chapter also describes distribution systems, as well as the process of sanitizing drinking water.

Lesson Plan Slides 39-3

I.

Plumbing Systems A. System of pipes, drains, valves, and other devices installed in a building for: 1. Distribution of water for drinking, heating, and washing 2. Removal of waterborne wastes B. Composed of two separate subsystems 1. One system brings freshwater in 2. The other takes wastewater out

Slides 39-4

C. A typical building plumbing system includes: 1. Hot and cold potable water distribution systems 2. A sanitary disposal system 3. Additional plumbing systems are designed to suit a special need, such as: a. compressed air systems, fuel oil systems, natural gas systems, and oxygen gas systems

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

Slides 39-5

II.

Plumbing Codes A. Plumbing system design and installation procedures 1. Strictly regulated by local plumbing codes B. Local governments 1. Adopt the International Plumbing Code a. Sponsored by International Code Council

Slides 39-6 and 39-7

III.

Potable Water Supply A. Obtained from rivers, lakes, ponds, surface runoff, and wells 1. Quality problems a. Hardness, discoloration, corrosion, pollution, odor and taste problems, and turbidity 2. Water treatment plants a. Process water 3. Well water a. Does not require extensive treatments B. Figure 39.1: Water treatment plant processes include settling, screening, sedimentation and coagulation, filtration, disinfecting, aeration, and softening

Slides 39-8

IV.

Potable Water Distribution Systems A. Codes specify that all fixtures in a building must be supplied with potable water at required pressures 1. Water continues to a water softener if required, then on to a water heater and the horizontal circulation lines 2. Moves to fixtures in the upper stories through risers and to individual fixtures through small-diameter pipe connectors

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

Slides 39-9 and 39-10

B. Low multistory buildings may also use an upfeed system if water demand is not excessive 1. A series of basement pumps provide the needed pressure.

C. Tall multistory buildings utilize a down-feed potable hot and cold water distribution system 1. Water from the central system is pumped from a street main or water storage suction tank to a roof storage tank with one or more pumps a. Holds supply of potable water for fixtures b. Holds reserve for the fire-suppression system D. Figure 39.5: A simplified schematic of a downfeed potable hot and cold waterdistribution system typically used in high-rise buildings.

Slides 39-11

V.

Gas Distribution Systems A. Gas is piped to a meter outside a building by a utility company.

B. The building’s gas piping is run inside to individual fixtures that require fuel, such as a gas-fired furnace.

1. A building’s gas inlet must be above grade.

2. Gas piping within the building is black steel pipe.

Slides 39-12 and 39-13

VI.

Piping, Tubing, and Fittings A. Hidden inside walls, floors, or ceilings 1. If exposed, must protect from freezing B. Type used is based on: 1. Cost 2. Length of service 3. Water quality

Slides 39-14 and 39-15

C. Table 39.1: Pipe and Tubing used for Water Supply Systems D. Pipe connections 1. Water pipe uses butt-welded, socket, and threaded fittings 2. Bell and spigot connection is used on sewer lines

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

3. Flanged connection is used in applications such as petrochemical and power generation piping E. Water pipe fittings 1. Couplings connect two pipe ends 2. Elbows change pipe direction 3. Tee permits one pipe to intersect another 4. Pipe end can be closed by installing coupling and screwing plug into it with cap 5. Ball valve is used for shutoffs 6. Globe valves is used to control flow

Slides 39-16

VII.

Valves A. Control flow of liquids 1. Pressure regulator valve 2. Water hammer arrestor 3. Backflow preventers 4. “T and P” valve 5. Float valves and saddle valves 6. Gate-style stop and waste valves 7. Globe valves

Slides 39-17

VIII.

Pipe Insulation A. Covers pipes with preformed fiberglass or foam insulation 1. Prevents damage from condensation 2. Fitted around pipe and taped 3. Hot water pipe insulation reduces heat loss 4. Built inside jackets in most plumbing units a. Extra batts can be taped to outside

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

Slides 39-18

B. Figure 39.15: Hot and cold water pipes are insulated to maintain water temperature, prevent freezing, and stop condensation from dripping from the pipes.

IX.

Water Pipe Sizing A. Depends on: 1. Available pressure 2. Vertical and horizontal distances 3. Number of fittings and use demand

Slides 39-19 and 39-20

B. Experience 1. Allowed values determined for fixture flows under recommended minimum pressures a. Considered as pipe diameter calculated X.

Sanitary Piping A. Cast iron 1. Suitable for storm drain, sanitary, waste, and vent piping

Slides 39-21

B. Copper 1. Classified as DWV (drainage, waste, and vent) 2. Used in residential, low-rise, and high-rise buildings a. Including soil and vent stacks and soil, waste, and vent branches C. Figure 39.17: Hubless-type cast iron soil pipe fittings D. Plastic 1. ABS, SRP, PVC: sewer systems 2. ABS and PVC: drain, waste, and vent

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

Slides 39-22

E. Lead and glass 1. Dispose special liquids 2. Resist chemicals F. Clay 1. Waste disposal lines outside building

Slides 39-23

G. Calculating waste pipe sizes 1. Depends on amount of waste to carry a. Plumbing codes establish number of fixture units H. Sanitary piping systems 2. Removes water and waste materials discharged at fixtures a. Relies on gravity flow

Slides 39-24

I.

XI.

Indirect wastes 1. Food-handling equipment, dishwashers, sterilizers, and commercial laundries a. Discharged with indirect waste pipe b. Not discharged directly into building sanitary piping system

Residential Sanitary Piping A. Waste from fixtures drains through waste pipes or branch soil pipes into soil stack

Slides 39-25

1. Each fixture has vent pipe connected to a vent stack running through the roof a. House drain will have one or more cleanouts b. Various types of traps used

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

Slides 39-26 and 39-27

XII.

Multistory Building Sanitary Piping Systems A. Common to design plumbing chases on each floor 1. Runs water and waste disposal systems to building height 2. Consolidates plumbing 3. Reduces costs 4. Makes space planning more flexible B. Sovent system 1. Vertical cast-iron drainage and waste system a. Conveys waste from upper building levels to the base of each Sovent stack b. Waste flowing in vertical pipe clings to interior wall and moves down pipe in swirling motion

Slides 39-28

C. Figure 39.29: The cast iron Sovent aerator offsets the waste flow around the horizontal branch inlets and breaks up the hydraulic plug that occurs in unrestricted vertical flow and reduces the velocity of the falling waste.

XIII.

Non-Potable Water Systems A. Recycling flow 1. Helps conserve water supply and reduces load on wastewater disposal facilities

Slides 39-29

B. Graywater 1. Non-industrial wastewater generated from domestic processes (e.g., dish washing) C. Must be kept separate and clearly marked XIV.

Roof Drainage A. Flat roofs or balconies on multistory buildings collect water during storms 1. Requires drainage system separate from sanitary sewer

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

Slides 39-30

2. Drains into public storm sewer system a. Raised cast iron, plastic, or aluminum strainers set in center of sloped area b. Slope roof toward scuppers and drains surface water through them into downpipes B. Rainwater

Slides 39-31

1. Valuable natural resource that can be collected for use in a. landscape irrigation b. cooling tower make up water c. water to flush toilets and urinals 2. Ideal roofing for a water catchment surface: a. smooth, dense, and non-toxic, such as corrugated aluminum and neoprene-based membranes.

Slides 39-32

C. Rainwater harvesting system include: 1. The catchment surface 2. leaf screens and debris diverters 3. Roof drains & piping that convey the water to storage tanks or cisterns D. Delivery systems use gravity flow or pumps to deliver the water to its end use.

E. Treatment and purification can be added when used in a potable water system

Slides 39-33

XV.

Plumbing Equipment A. Water heating 1. Most utilize storage tank heated by electricity, natural gas, or heating fuel 2. Thermostat monitors temperature and controls the heating mechanism 3. Residential gas water heaters are rated by gallons of hot water they can produce 4. Direct venting through roof or exterior wall is required to exhaust fumes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

XVI.

Plumbing Fixtures A. Require steady supply of clean water to assist with discharge of waste materials 1. Water closets, composting toilet, urinals, and lavatories 2. Wash fountains 3. Kitchen sinks and service sinks 4. Bathtubs and showers 5. Drinking fountains

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to search their city for various buildings that use complex plumbing systems and report their findings.

2. Have students go to a water treatment facility to take a tour. Ask them to write a report about what they learned to share with the class.

3. Ask students to research practices for safe drinking water in their area.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What types of pipe are used to carry natural gas? Gas is piped with black steel pipe.

Some codes permit use of copper or brass pipe if the gas to be carried will not cause them to corrode.

2.

How are copper pipe joints secured? Copper joints are soldered.

3.

How can the expansion of copper pipe used to carry hot water be handled to prevent breakage? Copper pipe can be installed with a coiled loop, a U-bend or an offset and return to handle expansion.

4.

How are the various types of copper water tubing identified? The types of copper tubing are K, L, M, DWV, ACR, OXY/MED, OXY/ACR, OXY, MED, and G.

5.

What resins are used to produce plastic pipe? Resins used to produce plastic pipe are acrylonitrile butadiene styrene, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride, and styrene rubber plastic.

6.

What methods are used to join various types of plastic pipe? Plastic pipes are joined using solvent cement, elastomeric seals for bell-end piping and fittings, serrated insert fittings secured with stainless steel clamps, heat fusion, and threaded fittings.

7.

Where would glass pipe be used? Glass pipe is used where corrosion would be a problem.

8.

Where would you use a relief valve? A relief valve limits the water pressure, preventing damage to the piping and equipment.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 39: Plumbing Systems

9.

Why are pipes insulated? Pipes are insulated to keep them from forming condensation on the outside and wetting the area below, to keep the heat from hot water inside the pipe, and to retain the cold in pipes running cold fluids and prevent freezing.

10. What processes are used at a water purification plant to produce potable water?

Water purification plants screen the water at the intake, allow sediment to settle, and then use coagulation to remove suspended matter, filter the water to remove fine particles and bacteria, disinfect it to remove harmful organisms, and soften it and aerate it to improve taste and color.

11. What is meant by an up-feed potable water distribution system within a building? An up-feed potable water distribution system moves water from the source into the building and to the fixtures through a piping system with the water under pressure.

12. What type of potable water distribution system is used in large multistory buildings?

Potable water systems in large multistory buildings are a down-feed system for both hot and cold water. The water is pumped from the street to a storage tank on the roof and feeds down from it.

13. What materials are used for pipes in sanitary piping? Pipes used for sanitary pipe systems are made from cast iron, copper, plastic, lead, glass, and clay.

14. How does a plumbing contractor know what slope is required on sanitary piping installations? The required slope for piping installations is specified by the building code. This varies by the pipe diameter but typically runs from 1/8 to ½ in. per foot of run.

15. What are indirect wastes? Indirect wastes are from a variety of sources other than human waste. Examples are wastes from food processing equipment or commercial laundries.

16. How does the Sovent drainage and waste system operate without the venting piping used in traditional systems? The Sovent drainage and waste system by using a patented Sovent aerator fitting. A deaerator fitting handles pressure fluctuations that occur when falling water suddenly turns horizontal. A pressure relief valve provides an outlet for pressures developed.

17. What uses are made of non-potable water within a building? Non-potable water is run through a system of pipes separate from potable water. It is used for toilets.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 14 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 14

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 40-2 and 40-3

     

Understand the many factors to be considered when designing heating and airconditioning systems.

Make decisions concerning needs and types of ventilation system for acceptable indoor air quality.

Understand the impacts of the fuels used by heating, air-conditioning, and ventilation systems Select appropriate air heating and cooling systems.

Select appropriate designs for steam and hot-water heating systems.

Discuss the systems and equipment available for cooling systems in large buildings.

Introduction This chapter examines the systems used for heating, air-conditioning, ventilation, and refrigeration. Heating, venting, and air-conditioning (HVAC) equipment is used to accomplish climate control in buildings, producing comfortable humidity, and temperature levels that must be closely regulated to maintain safe and healthy conditions. How to decide on the type of system and equipment to use is discussed.

Lesson Plan Slides 40-4

I.

Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning A. Based on the principles of thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and heat transfer 1. Climate control in buildings, producing: a. Comfortable humidity and temperature levels that are closely regulated to maintain safe and healthy conditions b. Provide thermal comfort, acceptable indoor air quality, and reasonable installation, operation, and maintenance costs

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Slides 40-5

B. Design factors include: 1. The type and amount of glazing, insulation, and air infiltration levels 2. Heating and cooling loads generated by machinery 3. Industrial processes 4. Solar load

Slides 40-6

C. Materials used for walls, ceilings, floors, and roofs 1. Their coefficients of thermal conductivity D. HVAC engineers must also consider: 1. Need to control humidity 2. Removal of chemicals, noxious gases, or dust 3. Availability and cost of fuel 4. Cost of the various systems 5. Expected maintenance expenses

Slides 40-7

II.

HVAC Codes A. Regulate the following: 1. Installation, control, and operation of heating, ventilating, and airconditioning systems B. Codes: 1. National Fire Protection Association 2. International Code Council

Slides 40-8

III.

Heat Balance A. Establish and maintain comfortable level of indoor temperature and humidity 1. Remove excess heat from building’s interior at the same rate it gains heat 2. Add interior heat at the same rate it loses heat to cold outside

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Slides 40-9 and 40-10

IV.

Heat Transfer A. Movement of thermal energy from a heated item to a cooler item 1. Always flows from hot object to cold one 2. Occurs via: a. Radiation b. Conduction c. Convection

Slides 40-11

B. Figure 40.1: The HVAC engineer must consider various sources of radiant heat transfer energy and their influence on human comfort.

V.

Sensible and Latent Heat A. Sensible heat 1. Heat that can be detected by touch when heat energy is added to or removed from a material B. Latent heat 1. Involves action that changes the state of a substance

Slides 40-12

VI.

Human Comfort A. Vary by season and place 1. Space in which one area is cold while another is warm produces discomfort a. Control can be exercised by keeping inside temperatures close to outside 2. Comfort factors include clothing, air speed, temperature, thermal radiation, and occupants’ activity level

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Slides 40-13

VII.

Ventilation A. Controls heat, condensation, humidity, odors, and contaminants in the air 1. Replacing air to control temperature or remove moisture, odors, smoke, heat, dust, and airborne bacteria

Slides 40-14

2. Includes exchange of air to outside and circulation of air within building 3. Methods are mechanical or natural B. Methods of Ventilation 1. Natural ventilation a. Utilizes outside air without using fans or other mechanical assistance 2. Windows, skylights, roof ventilators, or other openings

Slides 40-15

3. Mechanical or forced ventilation a. Removes humidity, odors, and contaminants via dilution or replacement 4. Fans or blowers 5. Types of air filters a. Viscous impingement fibrous panel filters b. Dry-type extended surface air filters c. Renewable filters d. Electronic air cleaners e. Electronic air cleaner cells f. Combination air cleaners

Slides 40-16

VIII.

Fuel and Energy Used for HVAC A. Sources: 6. Coal 1. Fuel oil 2. Natural gas 3. Propane and butane 4. Solid waste 5. Wood

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

6.

7.

8.

9.

Electricity Geothermal Ground heat Solar

Slides 40-17

IX.

Air Heating Equipment A. Warm air furnaces 1. Use blowers to move heated air through ducts a. Upflow, downflow, and horizontal furnaces B. Heat pumps 2. Cools using forced air through ducts a. Air-to-air, water-to-air, water-to-water, and air-to-water b. Horizontal or vertical ground loops

Slides 40-18

X.

Air-Conditioning with Duct Systems A. Cooling coil unit placed on furnace and connected to outside air conditioner 1. Connected by pipes a. Carry refrigerant from compressor in outdoor unit to indoor coil B. Furnace blower 2. Moves air over cold coils and through ducts into building

Slides 40-19

XI.

All-Air Distribution Systems A. The desired temperature is maintained by delivering the proper amount of air so new air can mix with existing 1. May be low or high velocity. Types include: a. Single-zone systems b. Multi-zone systems c. Reheat systems d. Variable air volume systems e. Dual-duct systems

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Slides 40-20

XII.

Types of Duct Systems A. Ducts 1. Warm air distribution systems a. Use ducts to move heated air from a furnace to diffusers in various rooms

Slides 40-21

B. Duct pressure 1. Movement of air results in velocity pressure and air pressure loads C. Figure 40.23: A typical duct system for a roof-mounted heat pump or electric/gas-fired unit. The controls permit it to condition the air in in discreet zones.

Slides 40-22

D. Classification for commercial ducts: 1. Class 0 a. Zero flame spread, zero smoke spread 2. Class 1 a. 25 flame spread, 50 smoke developed E. Particle conveying ducts classifications: 1. Class 1 a. Non-particulate applications 2. Class 2 a. Moderately abrasive particles in air

Slides 40-23

3. Class 3 a. Highly abrasive material in low concentration 4. Class 4 a. Highly abrasive particles in high concentration

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

XIII.

Forced Air Duct Systems A. Perimeter loop 1. Concrete construction, downflow furnaces, or buildings with basement or crawl space

Slides 40-24

B. Perimeter radial 1. Uses upflow furnace with radial ducts in attic C. Extended plenum systems 1. Furnace in basement or on first floor XIV.

Supply-Air Outlets and Return-Air Inlets for Warm-Air Heating A. Air velocity and temperature in supply duct 1. Greater than permitted within a room 2. Air must be supplied to room with termination device a. Provides air dispersion pattern for human comfort

Slides 40-25

B. Surface effect 1. Caused when airstream from duct outlet moves across ceiling or contacts wall C. Smudging 1. Occurs with slot and ceiling diffusers D. Outlet’s sound level 1. Must be considered E. Types of supply outlets:

Slides 40-26

2. Grilles 3. Slot diffusers 4. Air distributing ceilings 5. Ceiling diffusers F. Figure 40.37: This diffuser fits into the grid of the suspended ceiling and is fed from a supply duct above.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

G. Diffuser applications 1. Outlet diffusers 2. Inlet diffusers

Slides 40-27

H. Return-air inlets and exhaust-air inlets 1. Return-air inlets a. Connect to ducts that return room air to furnace for reconditioning I. Exhaust-air inlets 1. Move air from inside a building through ducts and discharge outside

Slides 40-28

XV.

Humidity Control A. Humidification equipment 1. Increase amount of water vapor in air 2. One type adds heat: a. Air flows through humidifier’s wet section, picks up moisture, and is distributed to the room 3. Another type: a. Takes heat from air flow and evaporation occurs in the room

XVI.

Desiccant Dehumidification

Slides 40-29 and 40-30

A. Dehumidification 1. Removal of water vapor from air, gases, or fluids by mechanical or chemical means B. Dehumidifier 1. Device used to remove moisture from air C. Desiccation 1. Use of desiccant to remove moisture from material

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Slides 40-31 and 40-32

XVII.

Hydronic (Hot Water) Heating Systems A. One-pipe systems B. Two-pipe direct-return system C. Two-pipe reverse-return system D. Multi-zone two-pipe systems E. Figure 40.44: A single-pipe hydronic system carries water from the boiler through each terminal and back to the boiler.

F. Hydronic controls 1. Water thermostat regulates operation of oil or gas burner.

2. Room thermostat starts and stops circulation pumps regulating supply of water to radiators.

3. Boiler is used to supply hot water for domestic use.

Slides 40-33

G. Expansion chambers 1. Space into which uncompressible water can flow as it expands within the system a. Due to temperature increases 2. Three types: a. Open tank b. Closed tank c. Diaphragm tank

Slides 40-34

XVIII.

Pipe Systems for Water Heating and Cooling A. Two-pipe systems 1. Provide heating and cooling supply to terminal units by running heating supply pipe to each terminal B. Four-pipe systems 1. Used when system provides both heating and cooling modes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Slides 40-35

XIX.

Steam Heating Systems A. Includes boiler or steam-generating device, piping system, radiators or convectors, and controls B. Two-pipe steam heating systems 1. Two-pipe gravity return system a. Separate piping for steam supply and return of condensate to boiler 2. Two-pipe vacuum system a. Vacuum pump added for pressure difference

XX.

Boilers A. Transfer heat from fuel source to fluid 1. Classified by working pressure

Slides 40-36

2. Types: a. Steam and water boilers b. High- and low-pressure boilers c. Firetube boilers and watertube boilers d. Condensing and non-condensing boilers e. Cast-iron, steel, and copper boilers f. Gas-fired pulse combustion boiler XXI.

Terminal Equipment for Hot-Water and Steam-Heating Systems A. Natural convection terminal units 1. Distribute heat by natural air circulation 2. Finned tube units 3. Baseboard units 4. Steel radiators

Slides 40-37

B. Forced convection heating units 1. Use fan or blower to produce air movement over cooling or heating coil a. Unit ventilators and heaters b. Induction units c. Fan coil units d. Large central air handling units

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Slides 40-38

XXII.

Chilled-Water Cooling Systems for Large Buildings A. Common cooling system uses chilled water to remove heat from air 1. Closed circuit piping in which water recirculates through chiller and other equipment used to remove heat 2. Types of liquid chillers: centrifugal, absorption, and positive displacement

Slides 40-39

XXIII.

Centrifugal Chillers A. Driven by electric motor, steam or gas turbine, or internal combustion engine 1. May be diesel or natural gas fueled 2. Use vapor compression refrigeration system 3. Include a compressor, condenser, an evaporator, and expansion valve

Slides 40-40

XXIV.

The Absorption Chiller Refrigeration System A. Refrigerating machine 1. Uses heat energy and absorption input to generate chilled water B. Types: 1. Single-effect absorption chillers 2. Double-effect absorption chillers C. Figure 40.62: A direct-fired double-effect absorption chiller/heater.

Slides 40-41

XXV.

Positive Displacement Chillers A. Use scroll, reciprocating, and rotary screw compressors 1. Typically with electric motor drives 2. Scroll compressor a. Positive displacement compressor 3. Reciprocating compressor a. Positive-displacement compressor b. Produces change in compression chamber volume

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

12

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Slides 40-42

XXVI.

Evaporative Air Coolers A. Direct evaporative air coolers 1. Evaporative pads, usually of wood fiber, water-circulating pump, and large fan B. Indirect evaporative air coolers 1. Contains heat exchanger, system to provide water vapor, secondary fan, and secondary air inlet

Slides 40-43 and 40-44

XXVII. Radiant Heating and Cooling A. Panel surface temperatures 1. Controlled and operated by electrical resistance units, circulating water, or air B. Piping in ceilings 1. Hydronic ceiling panels 2. Tied to member by metal lath and plaster 3. Tubing bonded to flat metal panels

Slides 40-45

C. Piping in floors 1. Radiant heating piping 2. Piping attached to subfloor 3. Piping intertwined with subfloor D. Figure 40.65: Radiant heating pipes can be installed over a subfloor and then embedded in a gypsum or concrete underlayment.

XXVIII. Electric Heating Systems A. Types: 1. Factory-assembled panels a. Mount on walls or ceiling 2. Fabrics and wall covering material a. Contain resistance heating wires 3. Various types of electric resistance cables a. May be embedded in concrete or laminated in drywall ceilings or in plaster

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

13

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to search their city for various buildings that use complex HVAC systems and report their findings.

2. Have students interview a local contractor who specializes in HVAC systems.

They should inquire about the most important factors to consider before deciding on the type of system to use and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What is the difference between thermal radiation, thermal conduction, and thermal convection? Thermal radiation transfers heat energy emitted by a source, and it is absorbed by the material that it strikes. Thermal conduction transfers heat by transmitting kinetic energy from one molecule to the next. The movement is caused by a temperature difference in the material. Thermal convection involves the transfer of heat by the circulation of heated air, gas, or liquid.

2.

What is a major source of information about thermal conditions necessary for human comfort? American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers.

3.

What types of ventilation are used to assist with the conditioning of inside air?

Methods of ventilation include mechanical and natural.

4.

What types of air cleaners are currently available? Types of air cleaners are vicious impingement fibrous panel filters, dry-type extended surface air filters, renewable filters, electronic air cleaners, and combination air cleaners.

5.

What are the three basic directions of heat flow from warm-air furnaces? The three basic directions of heat flow from warm-air furnaces are upflow, downflow, and horizontal.

6.

What fuels are used to fire warm-air furnaces? Fuels for warm-air furnaces are gas, electric, and oil.

7.

How does an air-to-air heat pump produce heat? An air-to-air heat pump compresses a refrigerant in the compressor. The refrigerant is circulated to coils in the house and the outdoor unit. The refrigerant absorbs heat in the exterior air and moves it to the inside coils where a fan moves it into the house. In the summer, the reverse occurs. Inside heat is absorbed and discharged to the outside air.

8.

What is meant by a ground-loop heat pump? A ground-loop heat pump has a large section of pipe buried in the ground. This loop or coil circulates refrigerant. In the winter it takes heat from the ground and moves it into the house. In the summer, the reverse occurs.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

14

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

9.

How can a gas-fired warm-air furnace be used to cool a building? A gas-fired warm-air furnace can be used for air conditioning by adding an electric air conditioner which cools coils in the furnace. The blower moves air over the chilled coils and into the house.

10. What are the types of all-air distribution systems? The types of all-air distribution systems are single-zone systems, multi-zone systems, reheat systems, variable air volume systems, and dual duct systems.

11. What factors must a designer consider as an all-air duct distribution system is being designed? Factors to consider when designing an all-air system include size of the ducts, outside air requirements, supply air 12. How does a reheat warm-air distribution system differ from a variable air volume system? A reheat warm-air system supplies a single source of preconditioned air at a constant rate but varies the temperature to several zoned areas. A variable air volume system supplies air at a constant temperature and vary the quantity of air supplied but does not change the temperature.

13. How does a dual-duct warm-air system regulate air temperature? A dual-duct warmair system regulates air temperature by using mixing valves to combine warm and cold air from two ducts mixing it to the desired temperature.

14. What are the classes of commercial warm-air ducts? Commercial warm-air duct classifications are Class O, Class 1, Class 2, Class 3, and Class 4.

15. What is the difference between the perimeter-loop and perimeter-radial duct systems? A perimeter-loop duct system is placed in the concrete floor and runs around the exterior wall. The perimeter-radical duct system is used in concrete floors and houses with basements or crawl spaces. The air flows form a downflow furnace and runs through ducts from it directly to the floor registers in the house.

16. What is meant by the surface effect from a ceiling warm-air diffuser? Surface effect from a warm-air diffuser refers to the fact that moving air streams may move from the duct along the surface of a ceiling or wall.

17. What is a comfortable relative humidity for indoor air? A comfortable relative humidity should be between 30 to 60 percent.

18. What types of residential and industrial humidifiers are available? Types of humidifiers include pan humidifier, wetted type, bypass, spinning disc atomizing, small portable humidifier, jacketed steam, and self-contained steam.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

15

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

19. Why is the control of humidity in the air important? Humidity control is important because human comfort depends on a stable relative humidity. Low humidity causes drying of the membranes of the nose, throat, skin, and hair. It will cause furniture to crack. High humidity will cause doors and drawers to stick and increased human discomfort. Mold can form on walls and other surfaces.

20. How does a liquid-desiccant dehumidification system remove moisture from the air?

Liquid-desiccant dehumidification systems remove moisture form the air by flowing it through a mist-like spray of a liquid desiccant, which absorbs the moisture in the air and passes it into a regeneration chamber where the air is heated, giving off the moisture.

21. What types of hydronic heating systems are in use? The types of hydronic heating systems are one-pipe, two-pipe direct turn, two-pipe reverse return, and multi-zone two-pipe systems.

22. What is the difference between a two-pipe direct-return and a two-pipe reverse-return hydronic system? In a two-pipe direct-return hydronic system, all radiators receive hot water from the boiler through the hot water pipe. The cooled water returns to the boiler through a second loop of pipes. A two-pipe reverse-return hydronic system has the return cooled water flow in the same direction as the hot water.

23. Why do hydronic heating systems need an expansion chamber? Hydronic heating systems need an expansion chamber to provide space into which the water can flow as it expands due to increases in temperature.

24. What is the advantage of a four-pipe system for hydronic heating and cooling? The advantage of the four-pipe hydronic system for heating and cooling is that it provides each terminal with separate hot and chilled water supply and return lines, allowing changing from heating to cooling any time either is needed.

25. How does the condensate in a one-pipe steam heating system return to the boiler?

Condensate in one-pipe steam systems returns to the boiler through the same pipe that supplies the steam. Valves are used to control the flow both ways.

26. What purpose do thermostatic traps on each radiator of a steam heating system serve?

Thermostatic traps on steam radiators keep the steam within the unit until it has dispersed its latent heat. The trap opens and the condensate flows out the return line.

27. Why is a two-pipe vacuum steam-heating system used in large buildings? A two-pipe vacuum steam-heating system is used on large buildings because it requires lower steam pressures and can fill the system rapidly.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

16

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 40: Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation, and Refrigeration

28. What is the major difference in the way water is heated in firetube and watertube boilers? Water is heated in fire tube boilers by hot combustion gasses passing through the tubes that are surrounded by water. Watertube boilers have water inside tubes and hot combustion gasses pass over the tubes.

29. What is the difference in the operation of condensing and non-condensing boilers?

Condensing boilers salvage latent heat from the products of combustion by condensing the flue gas. Non-condensing boilers operate with a high flue gas return temperature.

30. What is the unique feature identifying a wet-base boiler? Wet-base boilers have the firebox surrounded by fluid-backed sections on all sides.

31. What are the commonly used natural convection terminal units? Commonly used natural connection terminal units are finned tubes, baseboard units, steel radiators, and cast iron radiators.

32. What are the major components of a fan coil unit? Components of a fan coil unit include a fan, filter, and heating and cooling coils.

33. What types of refrigeration units are used to chill water for air-conditioning purposes?

Refrigeration units used to chill water for air-conditioning include centrifugal, absorption, and positive displacement.

34. How does a shell-and-coil condenser remove heat from the refrigerant? A shell-andcoil condenser removes heat from the refrigerant, absorbs heat from the refrigerant, and moves it to the cooling tower on the roof.

35. How does a single-effect water-cooled absorption chiller cool the water for the airconditioning system? A single-effect water-cooled absorption chiller cools the water used on evaporated refrigerant. It uses a process in which an absorbent such as a lithium bromide solution pulls vapor off evaporator coils, creating a cooling reaction.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

17

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints .................................................................................................................................... 12 Review Questions ............................................................................................................................. 12

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 41-2 and 41-3

    

Understand the various sources of electrical power and how it is distributed from a generating source.

Describe an electrical current and the difference between AC and DC current.

Specify the types of electrical conductors for various applications.

Identify and discuss the various units used to measure, control, and distribute electrical power within a building.

Specify lighting installations for meeting needs in a wide range of situations.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to electrical equipment and systems. The modern building depends heavily on electricity to make it functional and habitable. The chapter discusses sources of electrical power and how it is conveyed to different systems. Various units used to measure, control, and distribute electrical power within a building are described. In addition, the chapter examines how to specify lighting installations for meeting needs in a wide range of situations.

Lesson Plan Slides 41-4

I.

Electrical Loads A. Vary widely, depending on building’s occupancy 1. All buildings have extensive lighting requirements.

2. Industrial plants, internal transportation, internal communications, and controls have heavy electrical demands.

Slides 41-5

II.

Basics of Electricity A. Electric current 1. Flow of electrons along a conductor

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

a. Electric current flow in continuing circuit is like flow of fluid in hydraulic circuit 2. Units a. Ampere (A) b. Volt (E) c. Ohm (Ω)

Slides 41-6 and 41-7

B. Ohm’s law 1. Amperes, volts, and ohms relation C. Conductors 1. Materials electric current flows along a. Copper b. Aluminum c. Nichrome D. Figure 41.2: Electricity flows through a circuit from the positive connection to the negative connection.

Slides 41-8

III.

AC and DC Current A. Direct current 1. Constant flow in one direction B. Alternating current 1. Varies in value and direction a. First flowing in one direction and then in the opposite b. Each complete repetition is called a cycle

Slides 41-9

IV.

Power and Energy A. Energy 1. Term used to express work a. Expressed in units of kilowatt-hours, foot-pounds, BTU’s, joules, or calories

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

B. Power 1. Rate at which energy is used a. Expressed in terms of watts, kilowatts, and other units

Slides 41-10

V.

Electrical Codes A. National Fire Protection Association 1. Sponsors National Electrical Code® Requirements for One- and Two-Family Dwellings B. International Code Council 1. International Code Council Electrical Code C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. Tests and certifies electrical devices

Slides 41-11

VI.

Electric Power Sources A. Hydroelectric power generation 1. Energy of falling water to turn generator and produce electricity B. Fossil fuel powered generators 1. Rotating machinery converts combustion energy into mechanical energy C. Nuclear powered generators 1. Energy produced in nuclear reactor by fission D. Renewable Energy

Slides 41-12

VII.

On-Site Power Generation A. Used when utility system not available or unable to provide reliable service 1. Wind turbines 2. Solar photovoltaic cells 3. Thermal sources 4. Gas- or steam-powered turbines 5. Cogeneration

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

Slides 41-13

B. Solar energy 1. Active a. Use mechanical assistance to utilize solar energy b. Manufactured components convert energy to thermal energy and electrical power 2. Photovoltaic (PV) systems harness solar radiation and convert it to electricity

Slides 41-14

C. Components of a photovoltaic system 1. Solar cell a. Thin wafer b. Ultra-thin layer of phosphorus silicon on top of thicker layer of boron silicon c. Connected in series or parallel circuits 2. Additional components are required a. Mounting, inverters, batteries, etc.

Slides 41-15

D. Figure 41.7: A schematic of a grid-connected photovoltaic power system.

E. Wind energy systems 1. Use wind to drive turbines 2. Variety of applications a. Residential stand alone or grid-connected to farm- or community-scale systems F. Cogeneration 1. Heat engine or power station to generate electricity and heat

Slides 41-16

VIII.

Electrical Supply A. Public utility 1. Uses form of energy or fuel to operate generators at power plant a. Produces electricity for transmission

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

2. Area transformer stations a. Step down power voltage 3. Power connects to commercial building through service entrance

Slides 41-17 and 41-18

IX.

Electrical Distribution Systems in Buildings A. Includes: 1. Service entrance a. Conductors and equipment for delivering electricity from utility to building wiring system 2. Interior distribution system a. Trays, wiring, raceways, wireways, etc.

3. End equipment a. Lighting, motors, etc.

B. Figure 41.15: The service entrance panelboard is wired to distribute electricity through individual circuits to various parts of the building and to equipment.

Slides 41-19

X.

Switchgear and Switchboards A. Provide switching and feeder protection for circuits connected to main power source 1. Switchboard a. Distributes incoming electrical power in smaller amounts within building 2. Switchgear a. Handles higher voltages

Slides 41-20

XI.

Panelboards A. Receives large amount of electrical power from public utility 1. Distributes it in smaller amounts through circuits 2. Used in residential and small commercial construction 3. Surface-mounted, semi-recessed, or recessed into a wall

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

6

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

Slides 41-21

XII.

Electrical Power Conductors A. Cable types 1. AC, ACL, ACT, MC, MI, NM, NMC, SE, USE, SNM, UF B. Flat conductor cables 1. Copper cables formed flat and embedded in plastic sheathing C. Cable bus and busways 1. Bare conductor run in metal trough

Slides 41-22 and 41-23

XIII.

Raceways A. Cable trays 1. Open-faced metal channels a. Provide support for electric wires with adequate insulation and don’t require extra protection B. Conduit 1. Form of closed raceway a. Supports insulated electric wire and provides protection C. Figure 41.29: Rectangular raceways are used for surface-mounted wiring installations.

Slides 41-24

XIV.

Meters A. One kWh is equal to 1000 Wh 1. Amount used is measured by kilowatt-hour meter B. Residential applications 1. Typically use three-wire meters C. Electric utility supplies meters 1. Installed outside but can be installed inside building if easy access is provided

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

7

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

Slides 41-25

XV.

Motor Control Centers A. Used to start and stop motors and protect them from potential overloads 1. Disconnect switch must be located within sight of controller and motor 2. Typically a heat-operated relay opens the circuit when line temperatures rise 3. Motor circuit is closed after overload situation has been corrected by pressing reset button.

Slides 41-26

XVI.

Transformers A. Used to change (transform) alternating current from one voltage to another 1. Primary voltage a. Voltage coming into transformer 2. Secondary voltage a. Voltage leaving transformer 3. Heat generated a. Must be removed to prevent overheating

Slides 41-27

XVII.

Switches A. Used to open electrical circuits and interrupt current flow 1. Types: a. Single-pole, single-throw b. Single-pole, double-throw c. Double-pole, single-throw d. Double-pole, double-throw 2. Other switches: a. Many designed to serve special purposes

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

8

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

Slides 41-28

XVIII. Overcurrent Protection Devices A. Circuit breakers 1. Automatically disconnect circuit when current attains established value a. Value could cause overheating or fire in circuit B. Fuses 1. Protect circuits from overloads and shorts a. Internal metal link melts when overheated b. Types: cartridge and plug C. Figure 41.15: The service entrance panelboard is wired to distribute electricity through individual circuits to various parts of the building and to equipment

Slides 41-29 and 41-30

XIX.

Lighting A. Illumination design considerations 1. Specific lighting needs each area requires B. Daylighting 1. Use of light from sun and sky to complement or replace electric light C. Task lighting 1. Provide adequate level of light to perform a specific activity without undue eyestrain D. General illumination 1. Lighting over a large area a. Includes spaces in which specific task lighting luminaires are also present E. Selective lighting 1. Focuses light on a specific object or area

Slides 41-31

F. Glare 1. Intense and uncomfortable to a viewer G. Reflection 1. Reflectance coefficient a. Percentage of incident light reflected from a surface

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

9

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

Slides 41-32 and 41-33

H. Room cavity ratio 1. Size of a space to be lighted affects light distribution throughout the space XX.

Lighting-Related Measurements A. Levels of illumination 1. Luminous power of light source measured in footcandles or candelas B. Measuring illuminance levels 1. Measure of illumination quantity a. One lumen of luminous flux uniformly imposed on one square foot of area results in illuminance of one footcandle

Slides 41-34 and 41-35

C. Measuring luminance 1. Luminance (L): measure of brightness and contrasts caused by photometric luminance a. What is seen rather than illuminance XXI.

Lighting Systems A. Types: 1. Direct lighting a. Projects 90–100 percent of light down 2. Indirect a. Does not project light down 3. Semi-indirect a. Projects 10–40 percent of light down 4. General-diffuse a. Projects about equal amounts of light up and down

Slides 41-36

5. Semi-direct a. Projects most of their light down B. Figure 41.38: The distribution of light can be varied depending on the type of fixture used.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

10

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

XXII. Types of Lamps A. Three major types: 1. Incandescent lamps 2. Fluorescent

Slides 41-37

3. High intensity discharge B. Lamp input is in terms of electrical power and has the units of watts 1. Efficacy is measured in units of lumens per watt. a. The higher the lumen per watt, the better the efficiency

Slides 41-38

XXIII. Incandescent Lamp A. Contains a filament joined to a metal base with copper lead-in wires.

1. Types of incandescent lamps a. Tungsten halogen

Slides 41-39

XXIV. Fluorescent Lamps A. Long glass tube filled with a mixture of inert gas (argon) and low-pressure mercury vapor B. Sealed at each end C. Compact Fluorescent Light (CFL) 1. Made in special shapes to fit standard light sockets

Slides 41-40

XXV. High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps A. Produce light by passing an electric arc through a metallic vapor confined in a sealed quartz or ceramic tube B. The high-intensity discharge lamps available include 1. Mercury vapor 2. Metal-halide 3. High- and low-pressure sodium

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

11

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

XXVI. Light Emitting Diodes (LED) A. Small light bulbs based on semiconductor technology 1. Electrons of semiconductor diode are brought from high energy to low energy state with energy difference being emitted in form of light 2. Low energy consumption, long lamp life, and small size

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to search their city for various buildings that use complex electrical systems and report their findings.

2. Have students interview a local contractor who specializes in electrical system installation. They should inquire about the most important factors to consider before deciding on the type of system to use and report their findings to the class.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What is the rate of flow of electric current if it is available at 120V and has a resistance of 15 ohms? The rate of flow is amperes divided by ohms so 120V divided by 15 ohms equals 8 amperes.

2.

What is the difference between alternating current and direct current? Alternating current varies periodically in value and direction first flowing in one direction in the circuit and then flowing in the other direction. Direct current has a constant flow in one direction.

3.

What are the various ways electric power can be produced? Electric power can be produced by hydroelectric generation, fossil fuel generation, nuclear generation, wind generation, co-generation, solar photovoltaic cells, thermal sources, and turbines.

4.

What fuels are used to power fossil-fuel electric-generating plants? Fossil fuel generators are powered by coal, oil, and natural gas.

5.

What power source is used to drive emergency generators? Emergency generators are driven by internal combustion engines.

6.

How is electricity produced by utilizing normally wasted heat? Electricity is produced using wasted heat by cogeneration, which utilizes wasted heat to heat water or produce steam.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

12

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 41: Electrical Equipment and Systems

7.

What are the types of electrical conductors recognized by codes? Code approved electrical conductors are Type AC, Type ACL, Type ACT, Type MC, Type MI, Type NM or NMC, Type SE or USE, Type SNM, and Type UF.

8.

What type of electrical conductor is used for underground applications? Electrical conductors used underground are Type UF and Type MI.

9.

What voltage current can be carried by flat conductor cables? Flat conductors can carry 120V current.

10. What types of conduit are in general use? Conduits in general use include rigid steel, intermediate metal, electric metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, aluminum conduit, metal raceways, and plastic.

11. One kilowatt equals how many watt-hours? One kilowatt equals 1000 watts.

12. What purpose do motor control centers serve? Motor control centers are used to start and stop motors and to protect them from overloads.

13. What is the difference between the primary transformer voltage and the secondary voltage? Primary transformer voltage is the voltage coming into the transformer. The voltage that leaves the transformer is the secondary voltage.

14. What are the commonly available switch actions? Common switch actions include single-pole, single-throw, single-pole double-throw, double-pole single-throw, and double-pole double-throw.

15. What ways are various types of switches activated? Switches are activated by manually pushing a button or throwing lever, using solid state switches electronically create a conducting or non-conducting action.

16. What devices are used to protect a circuit from overloads? Overload circuit protection can be provided by circuit breakers and fuses as well as by ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs).

17. How does a type S plug fuse keep someone from putting the wrong size fuse in a panelboard? A type S plug fuse has the threaded base too small to be screwed into the fuse panel. It requires a special adapter.

18. What are the types of fuses in common use? Common types of fuses include cartridges and plugs.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

13

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 42: Electronic Signal and Security Systems

Instructor Manual Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 42: Electronic Signal and Security Systems

Table of Contents Learning Objectives............................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 2 Lesson Plan .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Chapter Hints ....................................................................................................................................... 4 Review Questions ................................................................................................................................ 5

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

1

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 42: Electronic Signal and Security Systems

This column contains references to corresponding subject matter in the PowerPoint slides.

Learning Objectives Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to:

Slides 31-2

    

Understand the signal systems used to provide electronic safety and security.

Identify various fire detection and alarm strategies in common use.

Describe the various devices used in the design of security systems.

Understand the principles of intrusion protection.

Understand the functions of a building automation system.

Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to electronic safety and security. Electronic safety and security involve the design and operation of various control, signal, and communications systems. Various types of systems and their functions are reviewed.

Lesson Plan I.

Automatic Fire Detection and Alarm Systems A. The primary purpose of a fire alarm system is to 1. Notify emergency responders 2. Initiate the proper reaction from them B. The second purpose is to 1. Initiate fire safety functions a. Building and fire control procedures intended to increase the level of safety for occupants b. Control the spread of the harmful effects of fire C. Fire alarm systems 1. Classified by National Fire Alarm Code a. Household fire warning systems b. Protected premises systems c. Off-premises systems D. Variety of signal sources act as alarm initiating systems 1. Able to sense products of combustion at different stages of fire’s duration E. Normally locked doors that act as emergency exits are fitted with panic hardware that automatically signals an alarm when opened in an emergency F. Manually operated pull stations 1. Type and location specified by code G. Fire-suppression systems:

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

2

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 42: Electronic Signal and Security Systems

1. Automatic sprinklers 2. Water fog generators a. Used on highly flammable solids or liquids 3. Liquid foaming agent a. Introduced into water in a sprinkler system H. Figure 42.1: A common fire detector that senses smoke and sounds an alarm.

I. Figure 42.2: Fire extinguishers are often placed in close proximity to manually activated fire alarm stations.

II.

Security Systems A. Electronic security systems 1. Surveillance and control for buildings to detect and prevent crime and vandalism 2. Range in size B. Visual surveillance systems 1. CCTV cameras mounted throughout a building to monitor problematic activity.

C. Access control systems 1. Requires a source and a means of activating a signal through motive devices 2. Signals are conveyed via low voltage wiring through a variety of sensors a. Activated by keypad or electronic access cards 3. Integrated-systems design approach that incorporates security with other operational functions into a building automation system.

D. Figure 42.5: Electronic coded key cards are used to gain access and monitor building occupancy.

III.

Electronic Monitoring and Control A. Building automation systems (BAS) 1. Central control facility a. Supervision and control of various functions 2. Processes data from remote systems and calculates operational responses 3. Monitors and regulates a. Fire protection, HVAC, lighting controls, elevator functions, communications, and security systems B. Figure 42.6: A building automation control center must be staffed by trained personnel.

C. Building automation systems increasingly powered by direct digital control (DDC) devices.

D. The BACnet protocol provides mechanisms for computerized building automation devices to exchange information, regardless of the building service they perform.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

3

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 42: Electronic Signal and Security Systems

IV.

Telecommunications and Data Systems A. Involve a building service entry and a distribution network that is run within cables that are surface mounted or hidden in wall, floor, and ceiling assemblies 1. Historically, telephone and data systems were installed by the providing utility. a. Today, these systems are run by the owner during the construction process B. Demarcation point: the dividing line that determines who is responsible for installation and maintenance of wiring and equipment 1. In the U.S. and Canada, the demarcation point is the network interface device.

2. The incoming service is controlled at a panel or telecommunications closet.

C. The system of raceways, boxes, and outlets dedicated to communications systems of all sorts is known as premise wiring 1. Premise Wiring is the cabling, connectors, and accessories that are used to connect LAN (Local Area Network) and phone equipment within a commercial building.

D. Premise Wiring is made up of vertical and horizontal cable run from a central location throughout buildings to individual outlets.

1. The transmission lines can be metallic, usually copper, or optical fiber.

2. Most premise wiring is surface mounted to allow for frequent access.

Chapter Hints 1. Ask students to search their city for various buildings that use security systems and report the types they find in use.

2. Have students contact a security system company and inquire about various security options. Ask them to report the most popular options, including their costs.

Review Questions (Answers appear in bold italics.)

1.

What type of security units are used in areas requiring a very secure situation? In banks and other businesses where valuable materials are kept, audio sensors, waterproof outlets, and an alarm control cabinet are used. They may also have alarm actuators to sense a particular activity and signal an alarm in combination with strategically placed surveillance cameras

2.

Where are fire flame detectors used? Fire flame detectors are especially important in areas where flammable materials are stored.

3.

What are the most commonly used type of fire alarms? The most commonly used types of fire alarms include flashing lights and audible bells or horns.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

4

Instructor Manual: Kultermann | Spence, Construction Materials, Methods, and Techniques: Building for a Sustainable Future, 2022, 978-0-357-51383-5; Chapter 42: Electronic Signal and Security Systems

4.

How are occupants alerted to the presence of carbon monoxide and natural and propane gas? Occupants get warning of the presence of carbon monoxide, natural, and propane gases by electronic detectors.

5.

How can people entering the property near a building be detected? People entering a property near a building can be detected by exterior sensors, such as pressure detectors, photoelectric beams, and motion detectors.

6.

Why are flashing light warning units used? Flashing light security warning units are used so the hard of hearing can be alerted to a problem.

© 2022 Cengage. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

5